JP6935034B1 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a gaming machine for awarding points to a player, which can give a sense of expectation regarding the awarding of points without deteriorating the interest. SOLUTION: The present invention has a first point granting state in which it is easy to determine that points are awarded, and a second point granting state in which it is difficult to determine that points are granted. It has one mode and a second mode which is more advantageous than this, and the mode can be changed with the change of the gaming state as an opportunity. When a predetermined initialization process including the initialization of points is executed, the mode may be shifted to a mode more advantageous than the mode stayed before the process, and the transition of the point-giving state is a mode transition. It can be done at different times. FIG. 41.

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Is paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, each time a game ball wins a prize in a predetermined area (for example, a starting port) provided in the game area, a predetermined number (for example, 4) is set as an upper limit, and a predetermined area is set. It is possible to store (hold) a plurality of information (starting memory) indicating that the game ball has won a prize, and based on the starting memory, whether or not to win (including a big hit and a small hit) is determined. The game is played by making a judgment and displaying the identification information in a variable manner according to the judgment result. Here, the information regarding the mode of the variation display of the identification information and the variation time is also referred to as a variation pattern, and the progress of the game is controlled by determining the variation pattern. Further, in such a pachinko gaming machine, an effect display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) for displaying the effect is provided, and the effect displayed on the effect display device based on the determined fluctuation pattern. The content is decided.

In recent years, in such pachinko gaming machines, there are known gaming machines that determine points to be given according to an executed effect (for example, reach effect) and a combination of effects (for example, a combination of advance notice effect and reach effect). (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-236703

However, in a gaming machine as shown in Patent Document 1, for example, since the executed effect and the points to be given are associated in advance, the points given by repeating the game for a certain period of time can be obtained. There is a problem that it is predicted in advance, and depending on the type of production or the like performed, the interest of the game may be lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and in a gaming machine that grants points to a player, it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the granting of points without deteriorating the interest. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine of the present invention has a lottery means for drawing whether or not a result is advantageous to the player when the lottery conditions are satisfied, and a game state control for controlling whether or not to shift to a special gaming state which is advantageous for the player. Means, point-giving determination means for determining whether or not to grant points related to privilege grant to the player according to the lottery by the lottery means, and points for storing the points determined by the point-giving determination means. It is determined that the points are given by the storage means, the privilege giving means for giving the privilege, and the point giving determining means based on the number of the points stored by the point storage means becoming a specific number. It has a first point granting state that is easy, and a second point granting state in which it is more difficult for the point granting determination means to determine that the points are granted than the first point granting state. It has at least a first mode and a second mode which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, and the transition of the gaming state by the gaming state controlling means can be performed. The mode control means is provided with a mode control means capable of shifting the mode as an opportunity, and the mode control means is triggered by the execution of a predetermined initialization process including the initialization of the point stored in the point storage means. The mode may be shifted to a mode more advantageous than the mode stayed before the initialization process, and the transition of the point granting state by the point granting state control means is performed at a different opportunity from the mode transition by the mode control means. It is characterized in that it is possible.

According to the present invention, in a gaming machine that grants points to a player, it is possible to have a sense of expectation regarding the granting of points without deteriorating the interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the 2nd big prize apparatus of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention, and FIG. Is a state in which the game ball wins the V winning opening. It is a schematic block diagram of the payout unit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the prize ball case unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd start opening winning apparatus of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention, and FIG. 9A shows the 2nd start opening winning apparatus in the state which can win a prize. 9 (b) is a diagram showing a second starting port winning device in a state in which winning is not possible. It is a figure explaining the structure of the game ball contact part of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention, and FIG. 10A is the figure which shows the game ball contact part of the modification 1. 10 (b) is a diagram showing the game ball contact portion of the modified example 2, and FIG. 10 (c) is a diagram showing the game ball contact portion of the modified example 3. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd prize-winning apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a perspective view which looked at the front decoration set of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention from the back side. It is a perspective view of the state in which the front decoration set of the 2nd prize-winning apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention is removed. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 1st movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 1st movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view of the 3rd movable accessory and the 4th movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left third movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left third movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left third movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd connecting member of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left third movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left third movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left third movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the arm member of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. 28 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA'in FIG. 25, and FIG. 28 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB'in FIG. 27. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 3rd connecting member of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 4th movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 4th movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view of the 3rd movable accessory and the 4th movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. FIG. 34 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, FIG. 34 (a) is a diagram showing a special symbol game specification table, and FIG. 34 (b) is a normal symbol. It is a figure which shows the game specification table, FIG. 34C is a figure which shows the hit distribution table, and FIG. 34 (d) is a figure which shows the open pattern table. It is a state transition diagram of the main control of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a state transition diagram of the sub-control of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the main variation time determination table 1 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the main variation time determination table 2 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ceiling lottery table of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. Each table used for determining the number of continuations of the second high-probability state of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, FIG. 40A is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition lottery table. 40 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a second high-probability continuation number table (initial mode), and FIG. 40 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a second high-probability continuation number table (low mode). 40 (d) is a diagram showing an example of the second high probability continuation number table (high mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the point addition table of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention, FIG. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows an example of the time saving navigation lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit navigation lottery table of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation lottery table at the end of a set game of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation time management process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit start interval management processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit middle processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing after the end of a small hit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot start interval management processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening reopening waiting time management processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol-related switch check process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the movable member control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control main process executed by the sub-CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command interrupt processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization command reception processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st start opening winning command reception processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol effect start command reception processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing in a normal game state in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing in a normal game state in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing in a normal game state in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st high-probability middle-effect determination process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd high-probability middle-effect determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 3rd high-probability middle effect determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 4th high-probability middle effect determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving the jackpot start command in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving the start command per V in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving a small hit end command in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving the display command opening opening opening in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving the interval end command per special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the penalty check processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation time monitoring process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sequence monitoring processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the holding number monitoring processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the rotation speed monitoring process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect per 16R of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect per 2R of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the detection process with a collateral ball executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the detection process without a collateral ball executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counting switch detection process executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start waiting process executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start initial processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the excitation system of the payout motor in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart about the reception of the prize ball control data of the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart concerning the transmission of the payout error information data by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the communication form between the main control circuit and the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of error information transmission by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the method of synthesizing error information in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of the error information in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart of origin adjustment control using the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart of the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment is not completed using the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart of the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the excitation data for each drop request number in the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart when a retry operation is required during the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the payout state notification display device in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the error occurrence of overpayment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the error occurrence of the payout ball clogging in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the error occurrence of the lower plate full tank in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the payout motor abnormality occurrence in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart concerning the reception process of the payout control circuit at the time of power failure of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the point addition table of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention, FIG. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of the loss super reach of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing in the 1st high probability state in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the prize ball case unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counting switch detection process executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor drive processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the origin adjustment excitation data setting process executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counting switch detection process executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start waiting process executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start initial processing executed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, the configuration and various operations of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

(Embodiment 1)
First, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described.

[Structure of pachinko machine]
The structure of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main body 2, a base door 3 that is openable and closable to the main body 2, and a glass door that is openable and closable to the base door 3. 4 and.

[Main body]
The main body 2 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 2). The main body 2 is formed of a material such as wood.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a rectangular outer shape substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is arranged in front of the main body 2 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and by rotating the base door 3 around one side end of the main body 2, the main body 2 The opening 2a is opened and closed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the base door 3 is provided with a square opening 3a. The opening 3a is formed from the vicinity of the central portion of the base door 3 to the upper region, and is formed in a size that occupies most of the base door 3.

Further, a speaker 11, a game board 12, a liquid crystal display device 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a payout unit 16, and a board unit 17 are attached to the base door 3.

The speaker 11 is arranged at the upper part (near the upper end portion) of the base door 3. The game board 12 is arranged in front of the base door 3 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and is arranged so as to cover the opening 3a of the base door 3.

The game board 12 is composed of a plate-shaped resin member having light transmission. As the light-transmitting resin, for example, an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a methacrylic resin, or the like may be used.

Further, on the front surface of the game board 12 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko game machine 1), a game area 12a on which the game ball launched from the launching device 15 rolls is formed. The game area 12a is an area surrounded by a guide rail 41 (specifically, an outer rail 41a shown in FIG. 3 described later), and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially circular.

Further, a plurality of game nails (see FIG. 3 described later) are driven into the game area 12a.
The configuration of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 3 described later.

The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1). The liquid crystal display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 13a is set so as to occupy all or a part of the surface of the game board 12.

In the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, various images such as an identification symbol for effect, an effect image, and a decorative image (decorative pattern) are displayed. The player can visually recognize various images displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 via the game board 12.

In the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 13 is used as the display device, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the liquid crystal display device 13, for example, a display device such as a plasma display, a rear projection display, or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display may be applied.

Further, a spacer 19 is provided on the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1). The spacer 19 is provided between the back surface of the gaming board 12 (the surface on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 13 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). It forms a space that serves as a flow path for a gaming ball that rolls in the gaming area 12a.

The spacer 19 is made of a light-transmitting material. The present invention is not limited to this, and the spacer 19 may be, for example, partially formed of a light-transmitting material or a non-light-transmitting material. ..

The plate unit 14 is arranged below the game board 12. The plate unit 14 has an upper plate 21 and a lower plate 22 arranged below the upper plate 21. As shown in FIG. 2, the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22 are formed with a payout outlet 21a and a payout outlet 22a for lending a game ball and paying out a game ball (prize ball), respectively.

When the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout port 21a and the payout port 22a, and are stored in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, respectively. Further, the game ball stored in the upper plate 21 is launched into the game area 12a by the launching device 15.

Further, the plate unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. Specifically, the effect button 23 is mounted on the upper plate 21. Further, a dial operation unit (jog dial) 24 is rotatably attached to the peripheral edge of the effect button 23 with respect to the effect button 23.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has a predetermined effect function performed by using at least one of the effect button 23 and the dial operation unit 24, and when the predetermined effect is performed, the display of the liquid crystal display device 13 is displayed. In the area 13a, an image prompting the operation of at least one of the effect button 23 and the dial operation unit 24 is displayed.

The launcher 15 is arranged in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The launching device 15 includes a launching handle 25 that can be operated by the player, and a panel body 26 that engages with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14. The firing handle 25 is arranged on the front surface side of the panel body 26 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 26.

Although not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a solenoid actuator (driving device) for controlling the firing operation of the game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 26. Similarly, although not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a touch sensor is provided on the peripheral edge of the launch handle 25, and a launch volume is provided inside the launch handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25, and changes the electric power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the player's hand comes into contact with the touch sensor of the firing handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. That is, it is detected that the player holds the firing handle 25. Then, when it is detected that the player holds the launch handle 25, the game ball can be launched by the solenoid actuator.

Then, when the player holds the launch handle 25 and rotates it clockwise (clockwise when viewed from the player side), the resistance value of the launch volume changes according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 25. Then, the electric power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are sequentially launched, and the launched game balls are guided by the guide rail 41 (see FIG. 3 described later) and discharged to the game area 12a of the game board 12.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a launch stop button is provided on the side portion of the launch handle 25. The launch stop button is a button provided to stop the launch of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. Even when the launch handle 25 is held and rotated by the player, the launch of the game ball is stopped by the player pressing the launch stop button.

The payout unit 16 and the substrate unit 17 are arranged on the back side of the base door 3. A game ball is supplied to the payout unit 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout unit 16 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22 based on the establishment of the payout condition.

The board unit 17 has various control boards. The various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70, a sub control circuit 200, a payout control circuit 300, and the like, which will be described later (see FIG. 33, which will be described later).

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially square surface. Further, the glass door 4 is arranged on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size of covering the game board 12. On the front surface of the glass door 4, a speaker cover 29 is provided in an upper region facing the speaker 11.

Further, in the central portion of the glass door 4, an opening having a size that exposes at least the game area 12a is formed in the area of the game board 12 facing the game area 12a. A protective glass 28 having light transmission is attached to the opening of the glass door 4, whereby the opening is closed.

Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is arranged so as to face at least the game area 12a of the game board 12.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board.

On the front surface of the game board 12, as shown in FIG. 3, a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector 43, a first starting port 44, a second starting port 45 (starting area), and an ordinary electric accessory 46 And are provided. Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, there are a plurality of general winning openings 51 and 52, a first large winning device 54 (variable winning device), a second large winning device 53 (variable winning device), and an out opening 55. The game nail 56 is provided.

Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, a special symbol display device 61 (identification information display means, special symbol display means) and a normal symbol display are displayed above the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 arranged substantially in the center thereof. A device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are provided.

In the first embodiment, a notification LED (Light Emitting Diode) that lights up when the result of the stop display of the special symbol is "big hit", a round number display LED that displays the number of rounds during the big hit game, and the like are provided. May be good.

[Various components of the game area]
The guide rail 41 is composed of an outer rail 41a extending in an arc shape for partitioning the game area 12a, and an inner rail 41b extending in an arc shape arranged inside (inner peripheral side) of the outer rail 41a. Will be done.

The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are arranged so as to face each other near the left end portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, whereby the launching device is placed between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b. A guide path 41c for guiding the game ball launched by 15 to the upper part of the game area 12a is formed.

Further, at the tip of the inner rail 41b located on the upper left side of the game area 12a, a ball discharge port 41d is formed by the tip of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a facing the tip of the inner rail 41b. Then, at the tip of the inner rail 41b, a ball return prevention piece 42 is provided so as to close the ball discharge port 41d.

The ball return prevention piece 42 prevents the game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d into the game area 12a from passing through the ball discharge port 41d again and entering the guide path 41c.

The game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d flows down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 12a such as the plurality of game nails 56, the first start port 44, and the second start port 45, and changes the traveling direction of the game area 12a. It flows down from the top to the bottom.

A display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided at substantially the center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the game ball does not pass over the area overlapping the display area 13a in the game area 12a.

The ball passage detector 43 is arranged near the right end portion of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The ball passing detector 43 is provided with a passing ball switch 43a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passing detector 43. Further, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery for whether or not it is a "hit" is performed, and the variation display of the normal symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

The first starting port 44 is arranged below the display area 13a, and the second starting port 45 is arranged below the first starting port 44. The first starting port 44 and the second starting port 45 are made of members capable of accepting a game ball.

Hereinafter, the entry or passage of the game ball into or passing through the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 is referred to as "winning". Then, when the game balls win a prize in the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, when the first starting port 44 is won, three game balls are paid out, and when the second starting port 45 is won, two game balls are paid out. The game ball to be paid out is called a prize ball.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting port 44, a lottery is performed to determine whether the ball is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and the special symbol is changed based on the result of the lottery. The display starts. When the game ball enters the second starting port 45, a lottery is performed to determine whether it is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and the variation display of the special symbol starts based on the result of the lottery. Will be done. In the first embodiment, the probability of winning a "small hit" when a game ball enters the first starting port 44 is zero. That is, even if the ball enters the first starting port 44, the "small hit" is not won. Further, in the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the second starting port 45, the "small hit" is won with a higher probability than the probability of winning the "big hit". That is, when the ball enters the second starting port 45, it is easier to win the "small hit" than the "big hit". In the first embodiment, as described above, the probability of winning the "small hit" when the game ball enters the first starting port 44 is set to zero, but the probability is not limited to zero. This probability may be lower than the probability of winning a "small hit" when a game ball enters the second starting port 45. In this way, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 44, there is a possibility of winning the "small hit", so that the range of the game can be expanded. For example, it is possible to shift from a "short-time game state" described later to a set game described later, and the range of games can be expanded.

The first starting port 44 is provided with a first starting port winning ball switch 44a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 44. Further, the second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 45. The game balls that have won the first start port 44 and the second start port 45 pass through the collection port (not shown) provided in the game board 12 and are conveyed to the collection unit (not shown) of the game ball. Will be done.

The ordinary electric accessory 46 is provided at the second starting port 45. The ordinary electric accessory 46 includes a pair of blade-shaped members rotatably attached to both sides of the second starting port 45, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a (described later) that drives the pair of blade-shaped members. 33) and.

The ordinary electric accessory 46 is driven by the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, and has an open state in which a pair of blade-shaped members are expanded to facilitate winning a game ball in the second starting port 45, and a pair of blade-shaped members. The member is closed to generate one of the closed states in which the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 45.

In the first embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade-shaped members is not a form that makes it impossible to win a prize, but a form that makes it difficult to win a game ball. It may be.

The general winning opening 51 is arranged near the lower left portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side. Further, the general winning opening 52 is arranged below the ball passage detector 43, and is arranged near the lower right portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side.

The general winning opening 51 and the general winning opening 52 are made of members capable of accepting a game ball.
In the following, the entry or passage of a game ball into or passing through the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, when a prize is won in the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52, there are 10 prize balls each.

The general winning opening 51 is provided with a general winning ball switch 51a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 51. Further, the general winning opening 52 is provided with a general winning ball switch 52a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 52.

The first grand prize device 54 and the second grand prize device 53 are arranged below the ball passage detector 43 and between the first starting port 44 and the general winning port 52. Then, the first prize-winning device 54 and the second prize-winning device 53 are arranged in the vertical direction along the flow path of the game ball, and the second prize-winning device 53 is arranged above the first prize-winning device 54. NS.

The first prize-winning device 54 is a so-called attacker-type opening / closing device, and has a shutter 54a that can be opened / closed and a solenoid actuator (the first prize-winning opening solenoid 54b in FIG. 33 described later) that drives the shutter.

The first prize-winning device 54 accepts the game ball when the corresponding shutter 54a is open (open state: first state), and the shutter 54a is closed (closed state: second state). At that time, the game ball is not accepted.

In the following, the entry or passage of a game ball into or passing through the first major winning device 54 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins in the first large winning device 54, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out.
In the first embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the first large prize device 54, there are 15 prize balls.

Further, the first prize-winning device 54 is provided with a count switch 54c (see FIG. 33 described later) for counting the game balls that have won the first prize-winning device 54.

The second prize-winning device 53 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the second prize-winning device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4A shows a state in which the game ball does not win the V winning opening, and FIG. 4B shows a state in which the game ball wins the V winning opening. The second prize-winning device 53 has a blade member 53a capable of opening and closing, and when the blade member 53a is in the open state, the second prize-winning device 53 accepts a game ball and the blade member 53a is in a closed state (FIG. 3). Do not accept game balls at (see). That is, when the blade member 53a is in the open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter the second large winning device 53, and when the blade member 53a is in the closed state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter the second large winning device 53. No.

In the following, the entry of the game ball into the second major winning device 53 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins in the second large winning device 53, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, there are 15 prize balls even when the game ball wins the second prize winning device 53.

Further, a V winning opening 57 is provided inside the second large winning device 53. The second large winning device 53 has a movable member 57a that can be opened and closed in order to open and close the V winning opening 57. When the V winning opening 57 is open, the V winning opening 57 accepts a game ball, and when the V winning opening 57 is closed, the V winning opening 57 does not accept a game ball. Entering the game ball into the V winning opening 57 is called "V winning". Further, when the game ball wins the V winning opening 57, it becomes "V hit".

The timing at which the movable member 57a is in the open state is related to the timing at which the blade member 53a is in the open state. For example, both the blade member 53a and the movable member 57a are normally closed. When the blade member 53a is in the open state, the movable member 57a may be in the open state at the same time or slightly later, and the movable member 57a may be in the closed state before the blade member 53a is closed. For example, the time during which the blade member 53a is in the open state may be twice as long as the time during which the movable member 57a is in the open state.

Further, the second special winning device 53 is provided with a count switch 53c (see FIG. 33 described later) for counting the game balls that have won the second big winning device 53. Further, the V winning opening 57 is provided with a V winning opening winning ball switch 57c (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the V winning opening 57. Further, the second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 45. Further, the second special winning device 53 has a V winning opening solenoid 57b for operating the movable member 57a.

The out port 55 is provided at the bottom of the game area 12a. The out port 55 is a game in which none of the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, the general winning opening 51, the general winning opening 52, the first large winning device 54, and the second large winning device 53 has won a prize. Accept the ball.

When the arrangement of the various constituent members in the game area 12a of the first embodiment is as shown in FIG. 3, when the game ball is driven into the area on the right side of the game area 12a by the player (when the game ball is hit right). The game ball is guided by the game nail 56 or the like to the vicinity of the second start port 45 below the first start port 44.

In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first starting port 44. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the first starting port 44 is won, the "small hit" is not won. Further, in the first embodiment, when the second starting port 45 is won, it is easier to win the "small hit" than the "big hit".

Therefore, in the "short-time game state" described later, in which the winning of the second starting opening 45 becomes relatively easy, the possibility of winning the winning of the first starting opening 44 is reduced by hitting right, and the second starting opening 44 is won. It is possible to increase the possibility of winning a prize in the starting port 45 and make it easy to win a "small hit".

[Special symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the special symbol display device 61 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the special symbol in the special symbol game. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the special symbol display device 61 is configured by a device that displays a special symbol as a symbol composed of numbers, symbols, or the like.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display device 61 may be configured by, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The special symbol display device 61 displays the special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 (special symbol starting prize). Then, the special symbol display device 61 displays the special symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and then displays the stop of the special symbol.

In the following, when the game ball wins the first starting port 44, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is referred to as the first special symbol. Further, a special symbol that is variablely displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the second starting port 45 is referred to as a second special symbol. Whether the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be determined by the displayed color. That is, the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in a different color when it is the first special symbol and when it is the second special symbol. For example, when the first special symbol is displayed, it may be displayed in red, and when the second special symbol is displayed, it may be displayed in green. Thereby, it is possible to distinguish which special symbol is displayed.
In the first embodiment, the special symbol display device 61 has one digit. For example, the special symbol display device 61 has two digits, the left digit (tens digit) has the first special symbol, and the right digit (one). Even if the second special symbol is displayed, it is possible to distinguish which special symbol is displayed without having different colors for the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol. can.

In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (a mode of "big hit"), the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state. It shifts to the jackpot game state which is the state. That is, in the special symbol display device 61, it is "big hit" that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the big hit game state. Further, in the special symbol display device 61, when the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in the "small hit" mode, the blade member 53a is opened. As described above, even if the first starting port 44 is won, the "small hit" will not be won.

In the big hit game state, the first big prize device 54 is opened. Specifically, in the first embodiment, the game ball wins the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode in the special symbol display device 61. If so, the first prize-winning device 54 is opened.

The open state of the first large winning device 54 is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or a certain period of time elapses. Further, there are a plurality of types of jackpot game states, and the opening time of the first jackpot winning device 54 is not constant and varies depending on each type. When the elapsed period of the open state of the first large winning device 54 satisfies any of these conditions, the large winning opening that was in the open state is closed.

In the following, a game in which the first prize-winning device 54 is in a state in which it is easy to accept a game ball (open state) is referred to as a round game. During the round game, the first prize-winning device 54 is closed.

In addition, the round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds.
For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the special symbol display device 61, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game state is shifted or maintained depending on the result.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 44 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable first special symbol corresponding to the winning is changed. The display (holding ball) is put on hold.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the pending display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called "holding number (number of holding balls)") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

Further, in the first embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 45 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning is made. Is put on hold.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the pending display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable display of the second special symbol to be held (the number of holdings) is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in the first embodiment, the maximum number of pending special symbols for variable display is eight in total.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is preferentially executed over the variable display of the other special symbol. .. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the reserved order. The second special symbol may not be put on hold.

[Ordinary symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the ordinary symbol display device 62 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. Then, in the first embodiment, the ordinary symbol display device 62 is arranged on the right side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

The normal symbol display device 62 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the normal symbol in the normal symbol game. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the ordinary symbol display device 62 is composed of two LEDs (ordinary symbol display LEDs) arranged in the vertical direction. Then, in the normal symbol display device 62, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of each normal symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

The normal symbol display device 62 alternately turns on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, and displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Then, the normal symbol display device 62 performs a variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the normal symbol.

In the normal symbol display device 62, when the stopped-displayed normal symbol is in a predetermined mode (“hit” mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period.
On the other hand, when the normal symbol displayed as stopped is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of "loss"), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state. In the first embodiment, when the normal symbol is in the "hit" mode, the operation of the normal electric accessory 46 from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state again is performed three times in a row. The time in the open state is 1.5 seconds.

In addition, the lottery in the normal symbol game has a high probability in the "short-time game state" and a low probability in other cases. In the first embodiment, if the probability is low, the player will not win, and if the probability is high, the player will win. In the lottery in this case, if the probability is low, the random number value may be acquired but not won, or if the probability is low, the lottery itself may not be performed.

That is, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the ordinary symbol display device 62, then the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol in which the variable display has been suspended is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable displays of ordinary symbols to be held (that is, the “number of holds”) is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[Ordinary symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the ordinary symbol hold display device 63 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. Then, in the first embodiment, the ordinary symbol holding display device 63 is arranged below the special symbol display device 61 and the ordinary symbol display device 62.

The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of hold items for variable display of normal symbols.
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the ordinary symbol hold display device 63 is composed of four LEDs (ordinary symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays the number of holds for the variable display of the normal symbol by turning on / off each of the normal symbol hold display LEDs.

Specifically, when the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol is 1, the normal symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side when viewed from the player side (the first normal symbol hold display LED from the left). Turns on and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs turn off.

When the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol is 2, the first and second normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. When the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol is 3, the 1st to 3rd normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. Then, when the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol is 4, all the normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned on.

[1st special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol holding display device 64 is arranged on the upper side of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 and to the left of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

The first special symbol hold display device 64 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol (holding ball of the first special symbol) that is being held. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol hold display device 64 includes a first special symbol hold quantity display unit 64a and a first special symbol hold information display unit 64b.

The first special symbol reservation information display unit 64b is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display device 61, and the first special symbol reservation number display unit 64a is arranged on the left side of the first special symbol reservation information display unit 64b. Will be done.

The first special symbol reservation number display unit 64a has four LEDs (first special symbol reservation display LED) arranged in the left-right direction. The display mode of the first special symbol hold quantity display unit 64a is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol hold display device 63.

That is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is held, the first special symbol hold display LED from the first special symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side to the number of holds is displayed from the player side. Lights up.

In addition, the first special symbol hold information display unit 64b displays information about the hold ball of the first special symbol. For example, the first special symbol holding information display unit 64b displays information (identification information) regarding the holding ball of the first special symbol to be variablely displayed next as a symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like.

The configuration of the first special symbol holding display device 64 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 3, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of holdings of the variable display of the first special symbol. ..

[2nd special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the second special symbol holding display device 65 is arranged on the upper side of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 and to the right of the normal symbol display device 62 when viewed from the player side.

The second special symbol hold display device 65 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol (holding ball of the second special symbol) that is being held. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the second special symbol hold display device 65 includes a second special symbol hold quantity display unit 65a and a second special symbol hold information display unit 65b.

The second special symbol reservation information display unit 65b is arranged on the right side of the normal symbol display device 62, and the second special symbol reservation number display unit 65a is arranged on the right side of the second special symbol reservation information display unit 65b. Will be done.

The second special symbol reservation number display unit 65a has four LEDs (second special symbol reservation display LED) arranged in the left-right direction. The display mode of the second special symbol hold quantity display unit 65a is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol hold display device 63.

That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is held, the second special symbol hold display LED from the second special symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side to the number of holds is displayed on the leftmost side when viewed from the player side. Lights up.

In addition, the second special symbol hold information display unit 65b displays information about the hold ball of the second special symbol. For example, the second special symbol holding information display unit 65b displays information (identification information) regarding the holding ball of the second special symbol to be variablely displayed next by a symbol including numbers and symbols.

The configuration of the second special symbol holding display device 65 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 3, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of holdings of the variable display of the second special symbol. ..

[Liquid crystal display]
The liquid crystal display device 13 is composed of a liquid crystal display as described above, and performs various effect displays in the display area 13a.

Specifically, in the first embodiment, the effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of identification symbols (decoration) composed of numbers 1 to 8 and various characters are used, except for specific cases. The symbol) is variablely displayed in the display area 13a.

Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols (such as the liquid crystal symbol alignment stitch described later) corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed on the display area 13a.

Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61 has a specific mode (the result of the stop display is a "big hit"), the player is made to understand that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 13a.

As an effect for making the player understand that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of decorative symbols stopped and displayed are arranged in a specific mode (for example, the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction). ), And then an effect such as displaying an image notifying the "big hit" can be mentioned.

Further, in the first embodiment, the effect image related to the display contents of the first special symbol holding display device 64 and the second special symbol holding display device 65 is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. For example, in the display area 13a, hold information (for example, the same number of hold symbols as the hold number) for notifying the hold number of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. When performing a so-called look-ahead effect, which is a well-known technique, based on the information of the reserved ball of the special symbol, the advance notice at this time may be displayed in the display area 13a.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 62 is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for causing the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. A function for causing the image may be further provided.

[Notification effect]
Although the details will be described later, in the first embodiment, the notification about the game state to be executed when the game ball wins the V winning opening 57 and becomes "V hit" by satisfying a certain condition is sent. It is executed when a small hit that triggers this "V hit" is won. This notification is performed by displaying the effect image in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. As a result, the player can perform an operation of launching the game ball based on the notification so that an advantageous game state can be executed. Specifically, depending on the content of the notification, a firing operation is performed so that the game ball enters the second large winning device 53 so as to be "V hit", or a second so as not to be "V hit". It is possible to perform a firing operation so that the game ball does not enter the grand prize device 53.

[Outline configuration of payout unit]
Next, the payout unit 16 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of the payout unit 16, and is a view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the rear side. Further, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a configuration of a prize ball case unit 170 as a payout device described later.

As shown in FIG. 5, the payout unit 16 includes a ball tank 161 as a ball storage tank in which game balls are supplied from a storage unit (not shown) on the upper part of the gaming machine and the supplied game balls are stored, and balls. It is possible to manage the payout of game balls, such as paying out the ball tank lower passage 162 connected to the ball tank 161 so as to communicate with the tank 161 and the game ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22. It is equipped with a prize ball case unit 170.

Further, a board unit 17 in which various control boards including a payout control circuit 300 are incorporated is arranged in parallel with the prize ball case unit 170 in the lower part of the ball tank 161 and the passage under the ball tank 162. ..

Here, the above-mentioned storage unit (not shown) is, for example, a replenishment device as ancillary equipment of a hall (game hall) installed for supplying game balls to the ball tank 161 of the pachinko game machine 1. In the payout unit 16, the game balls supplied from the storage unit are guided to the prize ball case unit 170 through the ball tank 161 and the ball tank lower passage 162, and are stored.

As shown in FIG. 6, the prize ball case unit 170 has a first starting port 44, a second starting port 45, and a general winning port 51 as a plurality of winning openings provided in the game area 12a (see FIG. 3) described above. , The game ball is paid out from the ball tank 161 to the payout passage 180, which will be described later, on condition that the game ball has won a prize in any of the general winning opening 52, the first large winning device 54, and the second large winning device 53. be. The payout passage 180 is arranged at the bottom of the prize ball case unit 170.

The prize ball case unit 170 includes a first ball supply passage 171A, a first 15-ball collateral switch 172A as a supply detecting means, and a first sprocket 173A as a moving means. Here, the prize ball case unit 170 is the same as the first ball supply passage 171A, the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A, and the first sprocket 173A described above, although the prize ball case unit 170 is omitted in FIG. 6 except for a part. The second ball supply passage 171B, the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B, and the second sprocket 173B as a means of transportation are arranged behind the paper surface direction (front-back direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1) of FIG. There is.

That is, the prize ball case unit 170 has a structure including two rows of ball supply passages 171 and 15 ball collateral switches 172 and sprockets 173.

However, the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are arranged so as to be out of phase with each other by 60 °. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the first ball supply passage 171A and the second ball supply passage 171B are collectively referred to as "ball supply passage 171", and the first 15-ball sprocket switch 172A and the second ball supply passage 171B. The 15-ball collateral switch 172B of 2 is collectively referred to as "15-ball collateral switch 172", and the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are collectively referred to as "sprocket 173".

Further, the payout passage 180 is actually a two-row structure having a first payout passage 180A and a second payout passage 180B. However, in the following, unless otherwise specified, the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B are collectively referred to as “payout passage 180”.

The ball supply passage 171 communicates with the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162, and the game balls are supplied from the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162. The ball supply passage 171 can store up to a specified number of game balls replenished from the ball tank 161 (15 in the first embodiment). Actually, since it has a two-row structure of the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B, a total of 30 game balls can be accumulated in these passages.

The 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects a game ball replenished in the ball supply passage 171. Specifically, the 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects that the game ball is being replenished by detecting the ball detection shielding plate 172a by the detection sensor 172b each time the game ball is replenished (passed). do.

Therefore, when the number of game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 is insufficient, that is, less than 15, the ball detection shielding plate 172a operates and deviates from the detection area of the detection sensor 172b, so that the inside of the ball supply passage 171 It is detected that the specified number (15 in the first embodiment) is not accumulated in.

Further, the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is turned on while detecting that the game ball is being replenished. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is detecting the replenished game ball.

Further, the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is turned on while it is detected that the game ball replenished in the ball supply passage 171 is passing over the 15-ball collateral switch 172. "The game ball is replenished" means that the 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects that the game ball passes through the ball supply passage 171 and that the game ball exists in the ball supply passage 171. Therefore, on the premise that the game balls are connected, it is included that it is guaranteed that a predetermined number of game balls exist in the ball supply passage 171.

The sprocket 173 is connected to a payout motor 174 as a drive means composed of a stepping motor, and rotates clockwise in the drawing according to the drive of the payout motor 174 described later. The sprocket 173 receives the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 one by one, rotates by driving the payout motor 174 by a predetermined number of steps, and moves the game balls one by one to the payout passage 180, that is, pays out. It has become.

In addition to the above, the sprocket 173 rotates by driving the payout motor 174 by a predetermined number of steps, and as a result, the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 become a rotation that can be accepted one by one. It can also include a form that depends on the rotation of the payout motor 174.

That is, it can be expressed that the sprocket 173 rotates one ball at a time and is paid out one ball at a time by the payout motor 174, and as a result of the sprocket 173 performing a predetermined rotation, the sprocket 173 rotates one ball at a time. It can also be expressed as accepting and paying out one ball at a time.

Further, the sprocket 173 is premised on rotating, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sprocket 173 is a plate-shaped slide type that can be moved or driven in parallel and perpendicular to the payout passage 180. The shape of the sprocket 173 may be any shape as long as a predetermined number of game balls can be received and paid out.

As the payout motor 174, the one common to the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B is used. The sprocket 173 and the payout motor 174 in the first embodiment constitute a game ball control means and a payout means capable of moving the game ball passing through the ball supply passage 171.

Further, the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B are provided with a first counting switch 181A and a second counting switch 181B, respectively. However, in the following, unless otherwise specified, the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B are collectively referred to as "counting switch 181".

The counting switch 181 detects the game ball paid out to the payout passage 180 by the sprocket 173. The counting switch 181 in the first embodiment constitutes a payout detecting means.

Further, a ball removal shutter 175 is provided near the uppermost portion of the ball supply passage 171.
When the ball removal shutter 175 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the drawing, the ball supply passage 171 is opened so that the game balls accumulated in the upper part of the ball supply passage 171 are discharged through the ball removal passage 176. It has become. The ball removal shutter 175 is normally in a locked state, and is used, for example, when discharging a game ball stored in the ball tank 161.

[Modification 1 of Embodiment 1]
Next, a modification 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in the game board 120 or the game board 120, which will be described below, in addition to or instead of the configurations provided in the game board 12 or the game board 12 of the first embodiment. Can have a configuration.

FIG. 7 is a front view showing the configuration of the gaming board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the game board according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention.
Here, the player plays a game facing the game area 120a of the game board 120, which will be described later. In the description of the game board 120, the "front side" means the player side (front side shown in FIG. 8), and the "back side" means the side opposite to the player (back side shown in FIG. 8). It means that it is on the side). Further, "right" means to be right when viewed from the player (viewed from the front side shown in FIG. 8), and "left" means to be viewed from the player (front side shown in FIG. 8). It means to be on the left (as seen from).

As shown in FIG. 8, the game board 120 according to the first modification is arranged on the front side, and is fitted to the panel main body 500 in which the panel opening 500a is formed and the panel opening 500a of the panel main body 500. It includes a base plate 600 and a rear box 700 arranged on the back side of the panel body 500.

A game area 120a on which a game ball can roll is formed on the front surface of the panel body 500, and a second start opening winning device 510 is provided below the panel opening 500a in the game area 120a.

The center base plate 600 is formed in a ring shape, and a game area 120a connected to the game area 120a of the panel main body 500 is formed. The center base plate 600 is provided with a second special winning device 610 in the game area 120a, and is provided with a first movable accessory 620 that can move inside the ring shape.

In the rear box 700, a substantially square box opening 700a is formed at a position overlapping the panel opening 500a of the panel main body 500, and a second movable accessory 710 is provided below the box opening 700a, and the box opening is provided. Four third movable accessories (upper left third movable accessory 720, upper right third movable accessory 730, lower left third movable accessory 740, lower right third movable accessory 750) are located near the four corners of the portion 700a. A fourth movable accessory 760 is provided above the box opening 700a.

2nd start opening winning device 510, 2nd big winning device 610, 1st movable accessory 620, 2nd movable accessory 710, 3rd movable accessory (upper left 3rd movable accessory 720, upper right 3rd movable accessory 730) , Lower left third movable accessory 740, lower right third movable accessory 750) or fourth movable accessory 760 will be described as a configuration provided on the game board 120 of the first modification of the first embodiment. The configuration can be provided at an arbitrary position of any of the pachinko gaming machines 1 of the first to fourth embodiments.

(Second start opening winning device of modification 1)
FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a second starting port winning device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a second starting port in a winning state. It is a figure which shows the winning device, and FIG. 9B is a figure which shows the 2nd start opening winning device in a state where a winning is impossible. FIG. 9 is a side view of the second starting port winning device.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the second starting port winning device 510 as a winning device is capable of entering a game ball that rolls in the game area 120a, and an opening for the winning device formed in the panel body 500. A front decoration 511 arranged on the front side of the 500b, an entrance 512 formed between the front decoration 511 and the panel body 500 and capable of entering a game ball rolling in the game area 120a, and an electric chew unit 513. And. The electric chew unit 513 includes a winning detection means 514, a first movable piece 515, and a second movable piece 516 inside a second starting port winning device box (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the panel body 500. The drive means 517 and the link member 518 as an interlocking member are provided.

The winning detection means 514 can detect that the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 512 has passed the predetermined area 514a. The winning detection means 514 is provided with a second starting port winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later).

The first movable piece 515 is provided in the second starting port winning device box (not shown) below the ball entry port 512 so as to be slidable toward the front side or the back side. The first movable piece 515 satisfies a predetermined driving condition (for example, in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is a predetermined mode (“hit” mode)). A first guideable state (state shown in FIG. 9A) in which the game ball can be guided to the predetermined region 514a of the winning detection means 514 and a first non-guidance state in which the game ball cannot be guided (FIG. 9). It can be driven to the state shown in (b)). The predetermined drive condition may be satisfied when the special symbol displayed as stopped is in a predetermined mode (“hit” mode) in the special symbol display device 61 shown in FIG. Further, the second start opening winning device 510 is an example of a winning device, and among the winning devices having the same configuration as the second starting opening winning device 510, it is a normal symbol that the game ball is detected by the winning detecting means 514. In the case of the starting condition of, this winning device functions as a winning opening having an ordinary electric accessory, and when it is a starting condition of a special symbol that a game ball is detected by the winning detecting means 514. This winning device functions as a winning opening with a special electric accessory.

The first movable piece 515 is connected to the guide surface 515a that guides the game ball in the direction of the winning detection means 514 and the guide surface 515a, extends upward and inclined toward the front side, and protrudes to the front side in the first guideable state. A receiving surface 515b for receiving a ball is provided.

The second movable piece 516 is located below the ball entry port 512 and above the first movable piece 515 (upper middle of FIG. 9A) in the second starting port winning device box (not shown). It is provided so that it can be slidably moved to the front side or the back side. The second movable piece 516 is that a predetermined driving condition is satisfied (for example, in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is a predetermined mode (“hit” mode)). From the non-guideable second non-leadable state (state shown in FIG. 9 (b)) to the second guideable state (FIG. 9 (a)) in which the game ball can be guided to the first movable piece 515. It can be driven to the state shown).

The second movable piece 516 includes a game ball contact portion 516a that comes into contact with the game ball in contact with the receiving surface 515b of the first movable piece 515 and does not come into contact with the game ball in contact with the guide surface 515a of the first movable piece 515. .. That is, the distance between the lower end of the game ball contact portion 516a of the second movable piece 516 (the portion of the game ball contact portion 516a closest to the first movable piece 515) and the guide surface 515a of the first movable piece 515 is , It is almost the same size as the diameter of the game ball.

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a game ball contact portion of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 10 (a) shows the game ball contact portion of the first modification. 10 (b) is a diagram showing a game ball contact portion of the modified example 2, and FIG. 10 (c) is a diagram showing a game ball contact portion of the modified example 3. FIG. 10 is a side view of the game ball contact portion.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the game ball contact portion 516a of the first modification 1 is provided at the front end portion of the second movable piece 516, extends downward, and the front surface is a vertical surface. On the surface on the back surface side, an inclined surface 516a'inclining from the back surface side to the front surface side toward the lower end is formed. By forming the inclined surface 516a'on the surface on the back surface side in this way, for example, the second movable piece 516 can be finely moved up and down, and is in a second inducible state (state shown in FIG. 9A). When driving to the second non-guidance state (state shown in FIG. 9B), it becomes easier to get over the game ball rolling on the first movable piece 515 on the back side of the game ball contact portion 516a (winning detection means 514). (See Fig. 9), which makes it easier to guide in the opposite direction).

As shown in FIG. 10B, the game ball contact portion 516b of the second modification 2 is provided at the front end portion of the second movable piece 516A, extends downward, and extends toward the lower end on the front surface. An inclined surface 516b'inclining from the front side to the back side is formed, and the surface on the back side is a vertical surface. By forming the inclined surface 516b'on the front surface in this way, for example, the second movable piece 516A can be finely moved up and down, and is in a second inducible state (state shown in FIG. 9A). When driving to the second non-guidance state (state shown in FIG. 9B), it becomes easier to get over the game ball rolling on the first movable piece 515 on the front side of the game ball contact portion 516b (winning detection means). It becomes easier to guide in the direction of 514 (see FIG. 9)).

As shown in FIG. 10 (c), the game ball contact portion 516c of the modified example 3 is provided at the front end portion of the second movable piece 516B, extends downward, and faces the lower end on the front surface. An inclined surface 516b'inclining from the front side to the back side is formed, and an inclined surface 516a'inclining from the back side to the front side toward the lower end is formed on the back surface side. In this way, by forming the inclined surface 516b'on the front surface and the inclined surface 516a' on the back surface, the effect of the inclined surface 516a'of the modification 1 can be combined with the above modification. The effect of the inclined surface 516b'of 2 is added, the outcome of the game ball becomes more fluid, and the effect of the game ball can be improved.

The driving means 517 is composed of, for example, a solenoid, is provided on the back side of the second movable piece 516, and is connected to the vicinity of the rear end of the second movable piece 516. For example, in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is pulled to the back side based on a predetermined mode (when the “hit” mode), and the predetermined end condition is satisfied. (For example, in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, when a predetermined time elapses after the stopped-displayed normal symbol becomes a predetermined mode (“hit” mode)), the normal symbol is pushed out to the front side. The driving means 517 may be provided behind the first movable piece 515, and the piston 517a may be connected in the vicinity of the rear end of the first movable piece 515.

The link member 518 extends from one end to the other end, one end side rotatably engages with the first movable piece 515, the other end side rotatably engages with the second movable piece 516, and one end side and the other end. A fulcrum 518a is provided between the sides, and the other end side and the one end side rotate about the fulcrum 518a by the drive of the driving means 517.

In this way, the first movable piece 515 and the second movable piece 516 are engaged with one end side and the other end side of the link member 518, and the link member 518 is rotated around the fulcrum 518a to cause the first movement. When the piece 515 is driven from the first non-leadable state to the first guideable state, the second movable piece 516 is driven from the second non-leadable state to the second guideable state, and the game is played by the first movable piece 515. The sphere can be guided to the predetermined region 514a. Further, when the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first guideable state to the first non-leadable state, the second movable piece 516 is driven from the second guideable state to the second non-leadable state. The guidance of the game ball to the predetermined area 514a by the 1 movable piece 515 can be blocked by the second movable piece 516.

Specifically, the drive means 517 pulls the piston 517a toward the back side based on the fact that a predetermined drive condition is satisfied. Then, the link member 518 rotates in a predetermined direction, the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first non-leadable state to the first guideable state, and the second movable piece 516 is driven from the second non-leadable state to the second. It is driven to the inducible state and becomes the state shown in FIG. 9 (a).

On the other hand, the drive means 517 pushes the piston 517a to the front side based on the fact that the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Then, the link member 518 rotates in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first guideable state to the first non-leadable state, and the second movable piece 516 is moved from the second guideable state. It is driven to the second non-inducible state and becomes the state shown in FIG. 9 (b).

At this time, among the game balls in contact with the first movable piece 515, the game balls that have flowed down to the guide surface 515a are guided to the predetermined region 514a without contacting the game ball contact portion 516a of the second movable piece 516. The game ball in contact with the receiving surface 515b comes into contact with the game ball contact portion 516a of the second movable piece 516, and the guidance to the predetermined region 514a is blocked.

According to the second starting port winning device 510 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following effects are exhibited. According to the second start port winning device 510, when the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first guideable state to the first non-leadable state, the second movable piece 516 is guided from the second guideable state to the second guide. In order to drive to the impossible state, the first movable piece 515 guides the game ball to a predetermined region detected by the winning detection means 514 at the start of driving from the first guideable state to the first non-leadable state. Even if it is in the middle of the game, it is possible that the second movable piece 516 does not guide the game ball guided by the first movable piece 515 to a predetermined region. As a result, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls are won, even in a gaming machine that switches between the first guideable state and the first non-leadable state, it is possible to prevent the prize from exceeding the predetermined number. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to accurately calculate the performance of the game machine with respect to the prize ball, and it is possible to accurately manage the balance of profits between the player and the game hall.

Further, by engaging the first movable piece 515 and the second movable piece 516 together with the link member 518, for example, if one movable piece is driven by one driving means 517, the other movable piece is also driven. be able to. Further, by using the link member 518, for example, when the second movable piece 516 is further added to the gaming machine provided with only the first movable piece 515 driven by the driving means 517, it is not necessary to provide another driving means. The second movable piece 516 can be driven in conjunction with the first movable piece 515. This makes it possible to easily design and replace the winning device.

Further, since the first movable piece 515 and the second movable piece 516 are interlocked by the link member 518, for example, due to a defect, the first movable piece 515 is changed from the first guideable state to the first non-leadable state. When stopped during driving, if only the first movable piece 515 is used, the game ball may continue to be picked up and the game ball may be guided to a predetermined area detected by the winning detection means 514, but the second movable piece is movable. By providing the piece 516, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being guided to a predetermined region by the second movable piece 516 to some extent. Therefore, it becomes possible to more accurately calculate the performance of the game machine with respect to the prize ball, and it is possible to more accurately manage the balance of profits between the player and the game hall.

(Second big prize device of modification 1)
FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a second prize-winning device of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The second large prize device 610 as a variable prize device includes a front decoration set 611, a V shutter 612 as a first movable member, and a right prize ball sensor 613 and a left prize ball sensor 614 as a plurality of first passage detection means. A V-velocity 615 as a second movable member, a V winning sensor 616 as a second passage detecting means, and an discharge sensor 617 as a third passing detecting means are provided. In the following description, the second prize-winning device 610 will be described as the second prize-winning device, but the same configuration as the second prize-winning device 610, which is limited to this, will be used as the first prize-winning device and the starting port. It can be applied to a starting port device, a general winning opening device as a general winning opening, and the like. Further, for example, when the same configuration as that of the second large winning device 610 is applied to the starting port device, the first starting port winning ball switch 44a (see FIG. 33 described later) or the second starting is used instead of the V winning sensor 616. A mouth winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) may be provided. Further, for example, when the same configuration as the second special winning device 610 is applied to the general winning opening device, a passing ball switch 43a (see FIG. 33 described later) may be provided instead of the V winning sensor 616.

The front decorative set 611 is on the front side of the center base plate 600 and is provided in the game area 120a. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the front decoration set of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the back side.

The front decoration set 611 includes a front plate 611a arranged at a position predetermined dimension away from the front surface of the center base plate 600 (see FIG. 11), a side wall 611b extending from the center base plate 600 to the front plate 611a, and a side wall at the uppermost portion. A specific area 611c in which the V shutter 612 (see FIG. 11) is arranged without the 611b, and a V shutter 612 and a right prize ball sensor 613 (FIG. 11) projecting from the front plate 611a toward the center base plate 600 near the uppermost portion. A contact member 611d provided between the contact member (see 11) and the contact member 611d.

A game ball can pass between the protruding tip of the contact member 611d and the front surface of the center base plate 600. The contact member 611d can come into contact with the game ball that has passed through the specific region 611c. Further, the contact member 611d is provided in a range substantially right half of the specific region 611c. As will be described in detail later, a right prize ball sensor 613 is provided on the lower right side of the specific area 611c, and a left prize ball sensor 614 is provided on the lower left side of the specific area 611c. That is, the contact member 611d is provided above the right prize ball sensor 613 and not above the left prize ball sensor 614.

Further, the front decoration set 611 is a space formed by the distribution portion 611e formed by the side wall 611b, the front plate 611a and the side wall 611b below the specific area 611c, and guides the game ball that has passed through the specific area 611c. It has a first guide passage 611f, a second guide passage 611 g, and a third guide passage 611h that function as guide passages.

The first guide passage 611f, which is an example of the predetermined region, is provided between the V tongue 615 and the V winning sensor 616. In the first guide passage 611f, a deceleration unit 611j capable of decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball passing through the first guide passage 611f is arranged. Here, the deceleration unit 611j in the present embodiment is provided between the V tongue 615 and the V winning sensor 616, and before the game ball passing through the first guide passage 611f reaches the V winning sensor 616. It is a member having a function of being able to attenuate (decelerate) the rolling speed of the game ball, and if it has such a function, its shape may be a rib, a curved passage, or the like. That is, the deceleration unit 611j is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment as long as it has a function of attenuating the rolling speed of the rolling game ball, for example, forward from the game board 12. The protruding ribs, the ribs protruding from the front plate 611a of the front decoration set 611 toward the game board 12, and the rolling direction of the game ball formed in the game area 120a provided with the second prize-winning device 610. It may have an arbitrary configuration such as an inducible curved passage (curved portion), a wind turbine, a structure including a distribution valve, and the like. By temporarily reducing the rolling speed of the game ball by such a deceleration unit 611j, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the game ball, and then an advantageous gaming state can be given to the player. Since the game ball passes through the winning sensor 616, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect on the game ball passing through the V winning sensor 616. Further, in the first guide passage 611f, a passage protrusion portion that protrudes from the front plate 611a toward the center base plate 600, extends along the first guide passage 611f, and can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the first guide passage 611f. 611k is provided. By providing such a passage protrusion 611k, the game ball flowing down the first guide passage 611f flows down in the first guide passage 611f while contacting the passage protrusion 611k as compared with the case where it simply flows down. It moves more complicatedly, and the effect of the game ball is improved.

As shown in FIG. 11, the distribution portion 611e is formed in a mountain shape that is inclined downward to the left and right, with the substantially center in the left-right direction as the apex. The first guide passage 611f extends downward from the hem of one of the distribution portions 611e (left side in FIG. 12), and the V tongue 615 is arranged in the intermediate portion.
The second guide passage 611g extends downward from the hem of the other side (right side in FIG. 12) of the distribution portion 611e. One end of the third guide passage 611h is connected above the V tongue 615 of the first guide passage 611f, is inclined downward, and the other end is connected to the second guide passage 611g. Further, the front decoration set 611 is made of a transparent material, and at least a part of the game ball guided by the first guide passage 611f, the second guide passage 611g, and the third guide passage 611h can be visually recognized.

FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front decoration set of the second prize-winning device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention is removed. The V-shutter 612 is slid to the front side or the back side by a solenoid actuator (the second winning opening solenoid 53b in FIG. 33 described later). The V-shutter 612 is arranged in the specific area 611c (see FIG. 11), slides to the back side, and when retracted from the front surface of the center base plate 600, the game ball easily passes through the specific area 611c (first state). In the open state), the game ball slides to the front side and protrudes from the front surface of the center base plate 600, resulting in a second state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 611c. Further, the V-shutter 612 is arranged so as to be inclined downward from one side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side in the example shown in FIG. 11) to the other side (for example, the right side in the example shown in FIG. 11) when viewed from the front side. There is.

The right prize ball sensor 613 and the left prize ball sensor 614 are arranged side by side in the game area 120a in the left-right direction at substantially the same height, and are provided with a count switch 53c (see FIG. 33 described later), and a V shutter 612. Is in the first state, it is possible to detect the passage of a game ball that has entered the second large prize device 610 and give the player a predetermined game value (for example, payout of a predetermined number of prize balls). be. As described above, the V-shutter 612 is arranged so as to be inclined downward from the left side to the right side in the left-right direction, and the right prize ball sensor 613 and the left prize ball sensor 614 are arranged side by side at substantially the same height in the left-right direction. That is, the distance between the right prize ball sensor 613 and the V shutter 612 is shorter than the distance between the left prize ball sensor 614 and the V shutter 612. In the present embodiment, the V shutter 612 is arranged so as to be inclined downward from the left side to the right side in the left-right direction, and the right prize ball sensor 613 and the left prize ball sensor 614 are arranged side by side at substantially the same height in the left-right direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the V shutter 612 is arranged substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, and the right prize ball sensor 613 is arranged at a position higher than the left prize ball sensor 614 (a position closer to the V shutter 612). May be good.

The V-bello 615 slides to the front side or the back side by a solenoid actuator (V winning opening solenoid 57b in FIG. 33 described later). The V-bello 615 is arranged below the left prize ball sensor 614, slides to the back side, and is in a first state in which the game ball easily passes through the first guide passage 611f when retracted from the front of the center base plate 600. (Open state), the game ball slides to the front side, and in a state of protruding from the front surface of the center base plate 600, the game ball is in a second state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the first guide passage 611f.

The V winning sensor 616 is arranged below the V tongue 615 in the game area 120a, is provided with a V winning opening winning ball switch 57c (see FIG. 33 described later), and is left when the V tongue 615 is in the first state. Among the game balls that have passed through the prize ball sensor 614, the game balls that have passed through the first guide passage 611f can be detected, and if the passage of the game balls is detected, a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a small game described later). It is possible to give a hit process (a game by seeing FIG. 27 described later).

The discharge sensor 617 is arranged below the right prize ball sensor 613 in the game area 120a, and among the game balls that have passed through the right prize ball sensor 613 or the left prize ball sensor 614 when the V-bello 615 is in the second state. , It is possible to detect a game ball that has not passed through the first guide passage 611f.

Returning to FIG. 11, a specific region 611c is formed at the uppermost portion of the second special winning device 610, and the V shutter 612 is arranged in the specific region 611c. A distribution portion 611e is arranged below the specific region 611c. A right prize ball sensor 613 is arranged on the right hem of the distribution portion 611e, and a left prize ball sensor 614 is arranged on the left hem of the distribution portion 611e. That is, the distribution unit 611e can distribute the game ball that has passed through the specific area 611c to the left prize ball sensor 614, which is one first passage detection means, and the right prize ball sensor 613, which is the other first passage detection means. Is.

Below the left prize ball sensor 614, a first guide passage 611f leading to the V winning sensor 616 is formed, and below the right prize ball sensor 613, a second guide passage 611 g leading to the discharge sensor 617 is formed. .. Further, a V tongue 615 is arranged in the first guide passage 611f, and a third guide passage 611h connected to the second guide passage 611g is connected above the V tongue 615. With such a configuration, the game ball that has passed through the left prize ball sensor 614 can pass through the first guide passage 611f when the V-bello 615 is in the first state (open state). On the other hand, when the V-bello 615 is in the second state (closed state), the game ball that has passed through the left prize ball sensor 614 passes through the third guide passage 611h and enters the second guide passage 611 g, and enters the second guide passage 611 g. It becomes possible to detect by the discharge sensor 617. Further, the game ball that has passed through the right prize ball sensor 613 is guided to the second guide passage 611 g, and is detected by the discharge sensor 617 regardless of the state of the V tongue 615.

According to the second prize-winning device 610 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following effects are exhibited. According to the second prize-winning device 610, for example, when the V-shutter 612 is in the first state (for example, the open state), the player enters the second prize-winning device 610 into the second prize-winning device 610. When guided by the guide passage 611f, the second guide passage 611 g, or the third guide passage 611h, at least a part of the game ball becomes visible. Since the right prize ball sensor 613, the left prize ball sensor 614, the V winning sensor 616, and the discharge sensor 617 are provided in the game area 120a, it is possible to detect a game ball rolling in the game area 120a. Therefore, the game ball can roll in the game area 120a at least until just before the game ball is detected by each sensor.

Therefore, by making at least a part of the game ball visible to the player from the time when the game ball enters the second big prize device 610 until it reaches each sensor, the second big prize is won. It is possible to improve the visibility of the game ball in the device 610. Further, since it is possible to roll the game area 120a until the game ball is detected by each sensor, the effect using the game ball that rolls the game area 120a is performed even in the second large winning device 610. It becomes possible to improve the effect of the effect on the player.

Further, the first guide passage 611f, the second guide passage 611g, and the third guide passage 611h are provided in the game area 120a, and the right prize ball sensor 613, the left prize ball sensor 614, the V winning sensor 616, and the discharge sensor 617 are used for the game. Since the area 120a is provided, the game area 120a can be used as a part of the second prize-winning device 610. Therefore, for example, the passage path of the game ball provided on the back side of the game board as in the conventional case can be omitted. , It is also possible to simplify the configuration of the variable winning device.

Further, when the game ball rolling in the game area 120a passes through the V winning sensor 616, if the game ball passes through the game area 120a at the rolling speed, the rolling speed is too fast and the V winning sensor 616 plays a game. It is also possible that the passage of the ball cannot be detected accurately, and in order for the V winning sensor 616 to accurately detect the passage of the game ball, it is necessary to reduce the speed of the game ball rolling in the game area 120a. It is possible to use the deceleration unit 611j to adjust the rolling speed of such a game ball. Therefore, it is possible to accurately detect the passage of the game ball by the passage detecting means.

Further, for example, when the game ball rolls from upstream to downstream of the V shutter 612, the game ball comes into contact with the contact member 611d on the downstream side, so that the speed of the game ball is reduced and the player's game ball is subjected to. It becomes possible to gather consciousness. Further, the distribution unit 611e makes it possible to distribute the game ball to either the left prize ball sensor 614 or the right prize ball sensor 613.
Then, the game ball that has passed through the left prize ball sensor 614 may pass through the V winning sensor 616 that can give an advantageous gaming state to the player, but the game ball that has passed through the right prize ball sensor 613. Passes through the discharge sensor 617 without passing through the V winning sensor 616. That is, the rolling of the game ball in the distribution unit 611e determines whether or not it is advantageous for the player.

Therefore, the gameability is improved by the distribution unit 611e, and the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced immediately before the distribution unit 611e, which is improved by the contact member 611d, so that the visibility of the game ball is improved. As a result, it is possible to further improve the effect of the effect on the player in the second prize-winning device 610.

Further, since the distance between the right prize ball sensor 613 and the V shutter 612 is shorter than the distance between the left prize ball sensor 614 and the V shutter 612, among the game balls that have passed through the V shutter 612, the V shutter 612 and the left prize The rolling speed of the game ball passing between the V-shutter 612 and the right prize ball sensor 613 tends to be faster than that of the game ball passing between the ball sensor 614, and the right prize ball sensor 613 causes the game ball to roll faster. It may be difficult to detect the passage of the game ball, but by reducing the rolling speed of the game ball by the contact member 611d, the passage of the game ball can be reliably detected by the right prize ball sensor 613.
Further, since the contact member 611d is provided above the right prize ball sensor 613 and not above the left prize ball sensor 614, the contact member 611d is more than a gaming machine having contact members above both prize ball sensors. It is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost.

Further, by providing the contact member 611d only above the right prize ball sensor 613 and not above the left prize ball sensor 614, the contact member 611d attracts the player's awareness of the game ball while playing the game. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest in.
Further, since the contact member 611d is provided only above the right prize ball sensor 613 and not above the left prize ball sensor 614, the falling speed of the game ball passing through the left prize ball sensor 614 is not reduced. The game ball that has passed through the left prize ball sensor 614 quickly rolls in the direction of the V-bello 615.
If the contact member 611d is also present above the left prize ball sensor 614, the falling speed of the game ball is excessively reduced, and the V-bello 615 is arranged after the game ball passes through the left prize ball sensor 614. It takes a long time to pass through the first guide passage 611f.
This is because when the V-bello 615 is provided with an opening time (time in the first state), the opening time ends and the V-bello 615 is closed (second state) because the falling speed of the game ball has slowed down. The game ball that has passed through the left prize ball sensor 614 loses the opportunity to pass through the first guide passage 611f. Therefore, according to the second prize-winning device 610 of the first modification, by not providing the contact member 611d above the left prize ball sensor 614, the falling speed of the game ball before reaching the V-bello 615 is increased. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the reduction.
Since the second large winning device 610 of the first modification does not reduce the falling speed of the game ball until it passes through the first guide passage 611f in which the V tongue 615 is arranged as described above, the V winning sensor 616 A deceleration unit 611j is provided upstream, and a mechanism for temporarily decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball is provided.

In this way, in the first guide passage 611f, it is possible to guide the game ball passing through the V tongue 615 so that the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 616 after the game ball has been decelerated by the deceleration unit 611j. Therefore, the player's awareness of the game ball can be concentrated on the game ball whose rolling speed is temporarily reduced by the deceleration unit 611j, and then the V prize can be given to the player in an advantageous game state. Since the game ball passes through the sensor 616, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect on the game ball passing through the V winning sensor 616.

(1st movable accessory)
14 and 15 are views for explaining the configuration of the first movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. 14 and 15 are front views of the first movable accessory 620, and in order to facilitate understanding of the first movable accessory 620, the decorative portion 625 provided on the foremost surface has only the outer shape drawn with dotted lines. Shown. Further, FIG. 14 shows a state (standby position) of the first movable accessory 620 before driving, and FIG. 15 shows a state (driving position) of the first movable accessory 620 after driving.

As shown in FIG. 14, the first movable accessory 620 includes a base member 621 attached to the center base plate 600 (see FIG. 8), a motor 622 fixed to the back side of the base member 621, and a base member 621. A gear 623 arranged on the front side of the base member 621, a movable base 624 provided on the front side of the base member 621, and a decorative portion 625 fixed to the front side of the movable base 624 are provided.

The base member 621 is formed with a pair of engaging grooves 621a that engage with the movable base 624 and extend in a predetermined direction (in the example shown in FIG. 14, the direction of the arrow shown in FIG. 14). The motor 622 is driven and controlled by a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. The gear 623 is rotated by driving the motor 622. The movable base 624 engages with the meshing portion 624a in which a plurality of teeth arranged in the same direction as the engagement groove 621a mesh with the gear 623 and the pair of engagement grooves 621a of the base member 621, respectively, and the engagement groove 621a It has a pair of engaging portions 624b that can be moved along. The decoration unit 625 is provided with, for example, characters or characters or an LED substrate, and the LED substrate can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33).

Next, the operation of the first movable accessory 620 will be described. In the state (standby position) shown in FIG. 14, the first movable accessory 620 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33), and when the gear 623 is rotated counterclockwise by the drive of the motor 622, this driving force is applied to the gear. It is transmitted to the meshing portion 624a of the movable base 624 that meshes with the 623. Then, in the movable base 624, the pair of meshing portions 624a is guided by the pair of engaging grooves 621a of the base member 621, and the engaging grooves 621a and the meshing portion 624a extend in the direction (obliquely downward in the example shown in FIG. 14). Slide to move.
Further, the decorative portion 625 fixed to the movable base 624 also slides and moves together with the movable base 624 to be in the state (driving position) shown in FIG.

As a result, it is possible to produce an effect in which the decorative portion 625 slides and moves in a predetermined direction. Further, by providing a pair of engaging grooves 621a of the base member 621 with which the movable base 624 is engaged, the movable base 624 can be stably slid and moved as compared with the case where only one engaging groove 621a is provided. Is possible.

(2nd movable accessory)
16 to 19 are views for explaining the configuration of the second movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. 16 and 19 are front views of the second movable accessory 710 as viewed from the front side, FIG. 16 shows a state (initial position) of the second movable accessory 710 before driving, and FIG. 19 shows a second movable accessory 710. The state (driving position) after driving of the accessory 710 is shown. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the second movable accessory 710 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the second movable accessory 710 as viewed from the back side. In addition, in FIGS. 17 and 18, in order to explain the inside of the 1st movable member 713 and the 3rd movable member 715, the 1st movable member cover 713c and the 3rd movable member of the 1st movable member 713 shown in FIG. It shows a state in which the third movable member cover 715c of 715 is removed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second movable accessory 710 includes a base member 711 as a first member, a motor 712, a first movable member 713, a second movable member 714, and a third movable member 715. A fourth movable member 716 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 18, the base member 711 is fixed to the rear box 700 (see FIG. 8), and the base main body 711a as the first member main body and the second transmission member rotatably supported by the base main body 711a. The base transmission member 711b and the motor drive transmission member 711c (see FIG. 16) that mesh with the base transmission member 711b are provided.

The base body 711a has a pair of left and right arc-shaped outer edges, and the base tooth portion 711d as a pair of left and right first member teeth in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge. A movable member receiving portion 711e that protrudes from the base tooth portion 711d in the left-right direction and supports the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 from below in the initial state. Is formed. Due to the movable member receiving portion 711e, when the second movable accessory 710 is in the initial state (state before driving or standby state), in the movable accessory in which a large number of parts spread in the left-right direction, the load applied to the joint portion of each part is borne. It is possible to reduce the number and prevent failures due to defects in the joints. Further, as shown in FIG. 16, the base main body 711a is formed with a base front panel 711f having a symmetrical outer shape on the front side. The base front panel 711f has a shape different from that of the upper edge (arc shape in the example shown in FIG. 16) and the shape of the lower edge (straight line shape in the example shown in FIG. 16). As a result, it is possible to form a body having different shapes on the outer circumference and the inner circumference.

As shown in FIG. 18, the base transmission member 711b is composed of four gears arranged in the left-right direction, and the gears adjacent to each other are meshed with each other. The motor drive transmission member 711c (see FIG. 16) is composed of gears, is rotated by the drive of the motor 712, and meshes with any of the four gears constituting the base transmission member 711b. The motor 712 is an example of the driving means, is fixed to the base member 711, and is driven and controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later.

As shown in FIG. 17, the first movable member 713 is rotatably supported by the first movable member main body 713a whose right end side is rotatably supported by the base member 711 and the first movable member main body 713a. It includes a first transmission member 713b and a first movable member cover 713c (see FIG. 16) that is fixed to the first movable member main body 713a and covers the first transmission member 713b.

As shown in FIG. 18, the first movable member main body 713a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the right end side, and the first movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge. It has 713d. The first movable member tooth portion 713d meshes with a gear arranged at the left end of the base transmission member 711b. As a result, by driving the motor 712, the motor drive transmission member 711c (see FIG. 16) rotates, and the base transmission member 711b that meshes with the motor drive transmission member 711c rotates, and the first movable that meshes with the base transmission member 711b. The first movable member main body 713a having the member tooth portion 713d rotates. That is, the first movable member main body 713a is rotated by the drive of the motor 712 via the motor drive transmission member 711c and the base transmission member 711b.

As shown in FIG. 17, the first transmission member 713b is composed of two gears arranged in the left-right direction and meshing with each other, and the rightmost gear meshes with the left base tooth portion 711d of the base member 711.

As shown in FIG. 16, the first movable member cover 713c is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the left half portion of the base front panel 711f.

As shown in FIG. 18, the second movable member 714 is fixed to the front side of the second movable member main body 714a whose right end side is rotatably supported by the first movable member 713 and the second movable member main body 714a. A second movable member cover 714b is provided.

As shown in FIG. 17, the second movable member main body 714a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the right end side, and the second movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge. It has 714c. The second movable member tooth portion 714c meshes with a gear arranged at the left end of the first transmission member 713b.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second movable member cover 714b is formed in substantially the same shape as the shape of the left half portion of the base front panel 711f.

As shown in FIG. 17, the third movable member 715 is rotatably supported by the third movable member main body 715a whose left end side is rotatably supported by the base member 711 and the third movable member main body 715a. It includes a third transmission member 715b and a third movable member cover 715c (see FIG. 16) that is fixed to the third movable member main body 715a and covers the third transmission member 715b.

As shown in FIG. 18, the third movable member main body 715a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the left end side, and the third movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge. It has 715d. The third movable member tooth portion 715d meshes with a gear arranged at the right end of the base transmission member 711b.

As shown in FIG. 17, the third transmission member 715b is composed of two gears arranged in the left-right direction and meshing with each other, and the leftmost gear meshes with the right base tooth portion 711d of the base member 711.

As shown in FIG. 16, the third movable member cover 715c is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the right half portion of the base front panel 711f.

As shown in FIG. 18, the fourth movable member 716 is fixed to the front side of the fourth movable member main body 716a whose left end side is rotatably supported by the third movable member 715 and the fourth movable member main body 716a. A fourth movable member cover 716b is provided.

As shown in FIG. 17, the fourth movable member main body 716a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the left end side, and the fourth movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge. It has 716c. The fourth movable member tooth portion 716c meshes with a gear arranged at the right end of the third transmission member 715b.

As shown in FIG. 16, the fourth movable member cover 716b is formed in substantially the same shape as the shape of the right half portion of the base front panel 711f.

Next, the operation of the second movable accessory 710 will be described. The second movable accessory 710 is a motor when the motor 712 rotates in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise rotation) under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) in the state (initial position) before driving shown in FIG. The drive transmission member 711c and the base transmission member 711b rotate. At this time, of the four gears of the base transmission member 711b, the leftmost gear rotates to the left side and the rightmost gear rotates to the right side. Then, the first movable member 713 that meshes with the gear at the left end of the base transmission member 711b rotates to the right side, and the third movable member 715 that meshes with the gear at the right end of the base transmission member 711b rotates to the left side. That is, the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 rotate so as to be close to each other.

Then, when the first movable member 713 rotates to the right, the right gear of the first transmission member 713b that meshes with the left base tooth portion 711d rotates to the right, and the left gear that meshes with the right gear is on the left side. Rotates to. When the third movable member 715 rotates to the left, the left gear of the third transmission member 715b that meshes with the right base tooth portion 711d rotates to the left, and the right gear that meshes with the left gear is on the right. Rotates to.

Then, the second movable member 714 that meshes with the left gear of the first transmission member 713b rotates to the right. Further, the fourth movable member 716 that meshes with the right gear of the third transmission member 715b rotates to the left. That is, the second movable member 714 and the fourth movable member 716 rotate so as to be close to each other. Then, the second movable accessory 710 moves to a drive position where the ends of the second movable member 714 and the fourth movable member 716 rotate to positions facing each other and then stop, and is shown in FIG. It becomes a state.

As described above, the first movable member 713 is provided with the right gear of the first transmission member 713b, and the third movable member 715 is provided with the left gear of the third transmission member 715b. Then, when the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 move, together with these, the rotation shaft (axis core) of the right gear of the first transmission member 713b and the rotation shaft of the left gear of the third transmission member 715b ( Axial core) also moves. At this time, the left base tooth portion 711d with which the right gear of the first transmission member 713b meshes and the right base tooth portion 711d with which the left gear of the third transmission member 715b meshes are a part of the base member 711. It is fixed. As a result, the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 move, so that the gears of the first transmission member 713b and the third transmission member 715b rotate. That is, the movement of the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 generates a driving force for rotating the gears of the first transmission member 713b and the third transmission member 715b.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first movable member cover 713c of the first movable member 713, the second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714, the third movable member cover 715c of the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member. The fourth movable member cover 716b of the 716 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the shape of a half portion of the base front panel 711f of the base member 711, so that the base front panel 711f, the first movable member cover 713c, and the first are formed. 2 The movable member cover 714b, the third movable member cover 715c, and the fourth movable member cover 716b form a formed body having a predetermined shape (in the example shown in FIG. 19, a formed body having a hexagonal outer shape and a circular inner shape). ) Is integrally formed.

Further, the second movable accessory 710 includes a first movable member cover 713c of the first movable member 713, a second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714, a third movable member cover 715c of the third movable member 715, and a second movable member cover 715c. 4 When the fourth movable member cover 716b of the movable member 716 moves to the drive position, the second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714 and the fourth movable member cover 716b of the fourth movable member 716 are used. When the ends of the two are close to each other, one component (in the example shown in FIG. 19, a structure having a hexagonal outer shape and a circular inner shape) is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, the second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714 and the fourth movable member cover 716b of the fourth movable member 716 are close to each other. When the second movable member cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b are present at a short distance, including the case where the end portions of the cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b come into contact with each other, the pachinko game machine 1 is first from the front surface. When the 2 movable member cover 714b and the 4th movable member cover 716b are visually recognized, the 2nd movable member cover 714b and the 4th movable member cover 716b overlap each other in the front-rear direction, or the 2nd movable member cover 714b. Includes the case where the fourth movable member cover 716b and the fourth movable member cover 716b are close to each other (or are in contact with each other) in the front-rear, up-down, and left-right directions. Further, when the second movable member cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b are close to each other, the second movable accessory 710 has a hexagonal outer shape as shown in FIG. Although it has a circular inner shape, the player can visually recognize the display area 13a (see FIG. 3) through the inside of the circular inner shape, and the circular inner shape and the display in the display area 13a (For example, characters, characters, images, etc. are displayed in the area of the display area 13a that can be seen through the inside of the circular inner shape), and the movable member of the player and the display area are used. You may try to improve the interest in the production to be performed. Further, the hexagonal outer shape and the circular inner shape are treated as one component each, and the display linked with the hexagonal outer shape is displayed in the display area 13a, and the display linked with the circular inner shape is displayed. It can also be performed in the display area 13a. The shape of the second movable accessory 710 in the completed state is not limited to the hexagonal shape, and may be any shape as long as it is an annular shape, a square shape, or a shape forming one other component.

Further, the second movable accessory 710 has each configuration when the motor 712 rotates (for example, counterclockwise) in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) at the drive position shown in FIG. By the operation by the reverse rotation of, it rotates to the initial position shown in FIG.

According to the second movable accessory 710 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following effects are exhibited. According to the second movable accessory 710, the driving force for rotating the first movable member 713 is generated from the motor 712. On the other hand, the driving force for rotating the second movable member 714 is that the meshing position between the first transmission member 713b and the base tooth portion 711d of the base member 711 moves with the rotation of the first movable member main body 713a. Caused by.

As described above, the driving force for rotating the first movable member 713 and the second movable member 714 is not only simply generated from the motor 712, but also the locations where the driving force is generated are different from each other.
Therefore, for example, the drive mode of the first movable member 713 can be determined by the motor 712, and the drive mode of the second movable member 714 can be determined by the base member 711. For example, two movable modes can be determined by one drive means. It is possible to drive the members in different modes.

Therefore, the first movable member 713 and the second movable member 714 are interlocked with each other, but rotate at different driving forces. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the variation of the operation of the movable accessory composed of a plurality of movable members, and it is possible to give each movable member an individual effect and synergistically enhance the effect. Therefore, even when a plurality of movable members are interlocked with each other, it is possible to enhance the individual effect of each movable member and improve the interest of the player in the effect.

Further, the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 move to the drive position, so that the base member 711, the first movable member 713, and the second movable member 714 are moved. , The third movable member 715 and the fourth movable member 716 integrally form a formed body having a predetermined shape. As a result, the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 can be interlocked, and the variation of the operation can be diversified, and the drive position can be changed. It is possible to form a predetermined shape and complete it. Therefore, it is possible to give each movable member an individual effect, synergistically enhance the effect, and improve the effect of the movable accessory as a whole.

Further, the end of the second movable member 714 pivotally supported by the first movable member 713 and the end of the fourth movable member 716 pivotally supported by the third movable member 715 are brought close to each other at the drive position. , The base member 711, the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 form a completed state. This makes it possible to individually rotate a plurality of movable members up to the drive position and form a structure in which all of them are connected at the drive position. Therefore, it is possible to give each movable member an individual effect, synergistically enhance the effect, and further improve the effect of the movable accessory as a whole.

(Third movable accessory of modification 1)
FIG. 20 is a front view of a third movable accessory and a fourth movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. When viewed from the front side, the third movable accessory is the upper left third movable accessory 720 arranged in the upper left, the upper right third movable accessory 730 arranged in the upper right, and the lower left third movable accessory arranged in the lower left. It includes an accessory 740 and a lower right third movable accessory 750 arranged at the lower right. FIG. 20 shows a state (standby) before driving of the upper left third movable accessory 720, the upper right third movable accessory 730, the lower left third movable accessory 740, the lower right third movable accessory 750, and the fourth movable accessory 760. Position) is shown. 21 to 23 are views for explaining the configuration of the upper left third movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. 21 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the upper left third movable accessory 720, and FIGS. 22 and 23 are rear views of the upper left third movable accessory 720. Further, FIG. 22 shows a state (standby position) of the upper left third movable accessory 720 before driving, and FIG. 23 shows a state (driving position) of the upper left third movable accessory 720 after driving. In addition, in FIGS. 22 and 23, in order to facilitate understanding, the description of the flat cable 728 is omitted, and only the outer shape of the arm member 723 is shown. The part that cannot be seen from the side is indicated by a dotted line.

As shown in FIG. 21, the upper left third movable accessory 720 includes a base member 721 as a first member, a motor 722, an arm member 723 as a second member, a first connecting member 724, and a rotating member. 725 and.

As shown in FIG. 22, the base member 721 is fixed to the rear box 700 (see FIG. 8) and the motor 722 is attached. Further, the base member 721 includes a base rotating portion 721a that rotates at a position separated by a predetermined dimension from the rotating shaft 722a of the motor 722 by driving the motor 722, and a plurality of base member 721s that project in the radial direction along the outer edge of the arc shape. It is provided with a base tooth portion 721b in which the teeth of the above are arranged, and a position detecting portion 721c for detecting the state of the base rotating portion 721a in the standby position.

The base rotating unit 721a has a detection piece 721a'detected by the position detecting unit 721c at the standby position. The position detection unit 721c is composed of, for example, a photo sensor, and detects and detects the detection piece 721a'of the base rotation unit 721a. 3 A standby position signal indicating that the movable accessory is in the standby position is transmitted. Although the position detection unit 721c is provided only at the position where the detection piece 721a'is detected in the standby position, it may be provided at the position where the detection piece 721a'is detected at the drive position. When the detection piece 721a'is detected, the position detection unit 721c provided at this position sends, for example, a drive position signal indicating that the third movable accessory is in the drive position to the sub-control circuit 200 described later. Send.

The motor 722 is an example of the driving means, is attached to the base member 721, and is driven and controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later.

The arm member 723 is formed in an abbreviated shape, and is rotatably supported by the base member 721 around a predetermined position 723a in the vicinity of the apex of the abbreviated shape. Further, the arm member 723 extends from the base end in the direction of the predetermined position 723a from the predetermined position 723a on the base end side, and has a predetermined engagement groove 723b in which the base rotating portion 721a of the base member 721 is slidably engaged. On the tip side from the position 723a, a magnet 723c that attracts the contact member 726b of the second connecting member 726, which will be described later, is provided. Further, when the base rotating portion 721a is rotated by the drive of the motor 722, the arm member 723 rotates around the predetermined position 723a by rotating the base rotating portion 721a while sliding the engaging groove 723b. Rotate. That is, the arm member 723 is rotatably supported by the base member 721 about the predetermined position 723a, and is rotated by the drive of the motor 722.

The first connecting member 724 is rotatably supported by the arm member 723. Further, the first connecting member 724 is fixed to the first gear 724a that meshes with the base tooth portion 721b of the base member 721 and the first gear 724a and meshes with the second connecting member 726 described later, and becomes the first gear 724a. It is provided with a second gear 724b having the same shaft core. The axis of the first connecting member 724 is moved by the rotation of the arm member 723, so that the contact position of the base member 721 that meshes with the base tooth portion 721b is moved and rotated. The second gear 724b is not limited to the configuration fixed to the first gear 724a, and may be rotatably fixed to any of the first connecting members 724, and is integrally formed with the first gear 724a. May be good.

The rotating member 725 is rotatably supported by the arm member 723, rotates around a predetermined position 723a, and rotates around a specific position 725a separated from the predetermined position 723a by a predetermined distance. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the rotating member 725 includes a second connecting member 726, an illumination body 727 which is an example of a decorative member, and a flat cable 728 as a connecting member.

As shown in FIG. 22, the second connecting member 726 is rotatably supported by the arm member 723, rotates around a predetermined position 723a in accordance with the rotation of the arm member 723, and is first connected. It meshes with the member 724 and rotates around the specific position 725a as the first connecting member 724 rotates.

The second connecting member 726 includes a second connecting member main body 726a, a contact member 726b, an accommodating portion 726c, and a locking portion 726d. The second connecting member main body 726a is composed of gears and meshes with the second gear 724b of the first connecting member 724. The abutting member 726b is formed on the peripheral edge of the second connecting member main body 726a, is formed of a ferromagnetic substance, and is attracted to and joined to the magnet 723c in the vicinity of the magnet 723c of the arm member 723. In the second connecting member 726, a magnet 723c is provided in place of the abutting member 726b formed of a ferromagnetic material, and in the arm member 723, a abutting member 726b formed of a ferromagnetic material instead of the magnet 723c is provided. It may be provided. Further, the contact member 726b is not limited to a ferromagnetic substance, and may be formed of a magnet having a polarity of attracting each other to the magnet 723c.

FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a second connecting member of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The accommodating portion 726c is formed in a tubular shape that stands upright on the back side of the second connecting member main body 726a, and accommodates the tape measure portion 728a of the flat cable 728 described later.
The locking portion 726d is a hole formed in the second connecting member main body 726a inside the accommodating portion 726c, and one end side of the tape measure portion 728a, which will be described later, accommodated inside the accommodating portion 726c is from the back side to the front side. It is possible to penetrate and one end of the tape measure portion 728a is locked.

As shown in FIG. 22, the illumination body 727 is attached to the front surface side of the second connecting member 726, and includes a decoration member 727a and an illumination substrate 727b. The decorative member 727a is formed into a predetermined shape (for example, a donut shape divided into four. The illumination substrate 727b is provided on the back side of the decorative member 727a, and a flat cable 728 described later is connected to the flat cable. It is controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later via the 728, and the decorative member 727a can emit light in a predetermined mode.

As shown in FIG. 21, one end of the flat cable 728 is connected to the illumination body 727 via a second connecting member 726, and the other end is a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later via various relay boards. )It is connected to the. As shown in FIG. 24, the flat cable 728 is wound around a specific position 725a on one end side to form a tape measure shape that can be elastically changed, and the winding direction (the direction in which the second connecting member 726 rotates). ) Is provided with a tape measure portion 728a having an urging force. The tape measure portion 728a is accommodated in the accommodating portion 726c of the second connecting member 726, and one end thereof extends from the locking portion 726d to the front side and is connected to the illuminated substrate 727b (see FIG. 22).

Next, the operation of the upper left third movable accessory 720 will be described. The sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) rotationally drives the upper left third movable accessory 720 from the standby position shown in FIG. 22 to the drive position by rotating the motor 722 in a predetermined direction in a preset number of steps. Rotate it to the state shown in FIG. 23. Further, the sub-control circuit 200 drives the upper left third movable accessory 720 in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction from the drive position until the detection piece 721a'is detected by the position detection unit 721c and the standby position signal is transmitted. By rotating to the standby position, it is rotated to the standby position.

Specifically, the upper left third movable accessory 720 has a base rotation when the motor 722 rotates in a predetermined direction under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) at the standby position where rotation starts, as shown in FIG. The moving portion 721a rotates while sliding the engaging groove 723b of the arm member 723, and the arm member 723 rotates about the predetermined position 723a accordingly.

Then, the first connecting member 724 that meshes with the base tooth portion 721b of the base member 721 also rotates. Then, the rotating member 725 that meshes with the first connecting member 724 rotates around the arm member 723 and the predetermined position 723a, and also rotates around the specific position 725a and around the predetermined position 723a. Rotate in the opposite direction. In this way, the second connecting member 726 of the rotating member 725 rotates around the specific position 725a from the standby position where the rotation starts to the drive position where the rotation ends, and is shown in FIG. It will be in the state shown. The rotating member 725 may be stopped from rotating immediately before the contact member 726b abuts on the magnet 723c of the arm member 723 at the drive position by the drive control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. Alternatively, the rotation may be stopped by bringing the contact member 726b into contact with the magnet 723c of the arm member 723 at the drive position. The contact member 726b can be urged by a magnetic force in the direction of the driving position by the magnet 723c in the vicinity of the driving position. At this time, the tape measure portion 728a (see FIG. 24) of the flat cable 728 is elastically deformed in the winding direction inside the accommodating portion 726c of the second connecting member 726, so that the locking portion of the second connecting member 726 is locked. The rotating member 725 is urged toward the standby position via the 726d. In the present embodiment, being urged by a magnetic force means that the members are attracted to each other by the magnetic force, or as a result of an attractive force acting on the member, the dynamic energy of the member temporarily increases (or the dynamic energy decreases). Is reduced). As a result, when the distance between the members is close to the distance affected by the magnetic force, the moving speed of the members is increased (decrease in the moving speed is reduced) as compared with the case where these members are not affected by the magnetic force. (Including the case) and the increase in the acceleration of the member (including the case where the decrease in the acceleration is reduced) can be considered. Further, for example, it should be considered that it is possible to suppress the member from moving in an unintended direction (when moving from the standby position to the drive position in the direction of the standby position, etc.) due to backlash. Can be done.

The upper right third movable accessory 730, the lower left third movable accessory 740, and the lower right third movable accessory 750 have the same configuration and operate in the same manner, although their orientations are different from those of the upper left third movable accessory 720. , The description is omitted.

According to the upper left third movable accessory 720 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following effects are exhibited. According to the upper left third movable accessory 720, the arm member 723 rotates when the motor 722 is driven, and the arm member 723 rotates so that the rotating member 725 is centered on the specific position 725a from the standby position. It rotates to the drive position. For example, the arm member 723 or the like is provided with a magnet 723c that the contact member 726b of the second connecting member 726 contacts at the drive position, and the contact member 726b is made of a ferromagnetic material, so that the second connecting member 726 is in the standby position. In the case of, the abutting member 726b is not urged by keeping a certain distance between the magnet 723c and the abutting member 726b. On the other hand, when the second connecting member 726 rotates to the drive position, the magnet 723c and the contact member 726b come close to each other or come into contact with each other, so that the accessory can be urged by an attractive force (magnetic force).

In this way, by providing the second connecting member 726 for rotating the movable rotating member 725 with the contact member 726b that is urged by the magnetic force at the drive position where the rotation ends, the rotating member 725 Even in a configuration in which an accessory such as the above is driven by itself, the state after operation can be easily stabilized. Therefore, it is possible to easily stabilize the state of the accessory after the operation by the configuration in which the moving accessory can be fixed.

Further, the tape measure portion 728a of the flat cable 728 is elastically deformed in the winding direction inside the accommodating portion 726c of the second connecting member 726, and the elastic force of the flat cable 728 causes the second connecting member via the locking portion 726d. By urging the 726 in the direction of the standby position, it is possible to increase the movable speed of the second connecting member 726, and since the second connecting member 726 is used as the storage position of the flat cable 728, it is saved. It is possible to create space.

Further, in the rotating member 725, a tape measure portion 728a is formed on a flat cable 728 connected to the illumination body 727 attached to the second connecting member 726, and one end of the tape measure portion 728a is formed on the second connecting member 726. The second connecting member 726 is stopped by urging the second connecting member 726 toward the standby position via the locking portion 726d which is locked by the urging force in the winding direction inside the accommodating portion 726c. At that time, it is possible to reduce the fine movement of the rotating member 725 caused by the backlash.

Further, when the second connecting member 726 rotates to the drive position, the magnet 723c and the contact member 726b come close to each other or come into contact with each other to urge the accessory by an attractive force (magnetic force). Even if the position detection sensor for detecting the state of an object is not provided, for example, even if the motor 722 rotates excessively or does not rotate sufficiently, the accessory can be arranged at an appropriate drive position.

(Third movable accessory of variant 2)
Next, a modification 2 of the first embodiment will be described. The modified example 2 is different from the modified example 1 in the configuration of the third movable accessory. In the following description of the modified example 2, the same configurations as those of the modified example 1 are designated by the same reference numerals as necessary, and the description thereof will be simplified or omitted. The third movable accessory of the modified example 2 is different from the third movable accessory of the modified example 1 in that the configuration of the arm member is different, and further, the third movable accessory is provided. Further, the third movable accessory of the second modification is the third movable accessory on the upper left, the third movable accessory on the upper right, the third movable accessory on the lower left, and the third movable accessory on the lower right, similarly to the third movable accessory in the first modification. Although the three movable accessories are provided, although they have different orientations from each other, they have the same configuration and operate in the same manner. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the upper left third movable accessory will be described.

25 to 27 are views for explaining the configuration of the upper left third movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. 25 to 27 are front views of the upper left third movable accessory 820. Further, FIG. 25 shows a state (standby position) before driving the upper left third movable accessory 820, and FIG. 26 shows a driving state (intermediate position) of the upper left third movable accessory 820. FIG. 27. Indicates the state (driving position) of the upper left third movable accessory 820 after driving. In FIGS. 25 to 27, in order to facilitate understanding, the second arm member 832 shows the outer frame by omitting the front side cover, and the first arm member 831 is visible from the front side by the base member 721. The outer shape of the non-existent part is shown by a dotted line, and only the outer shape of the illuminated body 727, which is an example of the decorative member, is shown by a dotted line.

As shown in FIG. 25, the upper left third movable accessory 820 includes a base member 721 as a first member, a motor 722, an arm member 830 as a second member, a first connecting member 724, and a rotating member. 725 and a third connecting member 840 are provided. Since the base member 721, the motor 722, the first connecting member 724, and the rotating member 725 have the same configurations as those of the first modification, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The arm member 830 includes a first arm member 831 as a first arm member and a second arm member 832 as a second arm member. The first arm member 831 is formed in an abbreviated shape, and is rotatably supported by the base member 721 around a predetermined position 723a in the vicinity of the apex of the abbreviated shape. Further, the first arm member 831 extends from the base end toward the predetermined position 723a on the base end side from the predetermined position 723a, and has an engaging groove 723b in which the base rotating portion 721a of the base member 721 is slidably engaged. Be prepared. Further, the first arm member 831 is slidably sandwiched by the second arm member 832 whose tip is opened and slides in a direction protruding from the tip on the tip side from the predetermined position 723a. Further, when the base rotating portion 721a is rotated by the drive of the motor 722, the first arm member 831 rotates at the predetermined position 723a by rotating the base rotating portion 721a while sliding the engaging groove 723b. Rotate to the center. That is, the arm member 830 is rotatably supported by the base member 721 about the predetermined position 723a, and is rotated by the drive of the motor 722.

FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an arm member of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. 28 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA'in FIG. 25, and FIG. 28 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB'in FIG. 27.

As shown in FIG. 28, the first arm member 831 extends in the direction in which the second arm member 832, which will be described later, slides and moves, and the end portion of the rotation shaft 726e of the second connecting member 726 that slides and moves together with the second arm member 832. Has a slide groove 831a that is slidably engaged with. The length of the slide groove 831a is formed to be substantially the same as the slide movable distance of the second arm member 832, and the height thereof is substantially the same as the diameter of the rotating shaft 726e of the second connecting member 726. It is formed.

As shown in FIG. 25, the second arm member 832 is slidably engaged with the first arm member 831 and pivotally supports the second connecting member 726 of the rotating member 725. Further, the second arm member 832 includes a magnet 723c that attracts the contact member 726b of the second connecting member 726, and a fourth connecting member 835 that can mesh with the third connecting member 840 described later.

The fourth connecting member 835 faces the end surface of the third connecting member 840, and a plurality of teeth formed on the end surface of the third connecting member 840 can be meshed with the surface extending in the direction in which the second arm member 832 slides. Teeth are formed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a third connecting member of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The third connecting member 840 is attached to the front surface side of the second gear 724b of the first connecting member 724, and rotates with the rotation of the first connecting member 724. In the third connecting member 840, a plurality of teeth are formed on the end face of the disk shape, and the meshing region 841 that meshes with the fourth connecting member 835 and the teeth are not formed on the end face of the disk shape, and the fourth connecting member 835 is formed. It includes a non-contact area 842 that does not come into contact with.

Next, the operation of the upper left third movable accessory 820 will be described. In the upper left third movable accessory 820, when the motor 722 rotates in a predetermined direction under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) at the standby position where rotation starts, the arm member 830 is predetermined. It rotates around the position 723a.

Then, the first connecting member 724 that meshes with the base tooth portion 721b of the base member 721 also rotates. At this time, the third connecting member 840 attached to the first connecting member 724 also rotates, but since the non-contact region 842 is close to the fourth connecting member 835 of the second arm member 832, the third connecting member 842 is connected. The member 840 and the fourth connecting member 835 do not mesh with each other. Then, the rotating member 725 that meshes with the first connecting member 724 rotates around the arm member 830 and the predetermined position 723a, and also rotates around the specific position 725a and around the predetermined position 723a. Rotate in the opposite direction. In this way, the second connecting member 726 of the rotating member 725 rotates around the specific position 725a from the standby position where the rotation starts to the intermediate position where the rotation ends. It will be in the state shown. The rotation member 725 stops rotating around the specific position 725a when the contact member 726b abuts on the magnet 723c of the second arm member 832 at this intermediate position. The rotating member 725 is driven by a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later to stop the rotation of the rotating member 725 immediately before the contact member 726b abuts on the magnet 723c of the second arm member 832 at an intermediate position. Alternatively, the rotation may be stopped by the contact member 726b contacting the magnet 723c of the second arm member 832 at the intermediate position.

When the upper left third movable accessory 820 is in the state shown in FIG. 26, the meshing region 841 of the third connecting member 840 is close to the fourth connecting member 835 of the second arm member 832, and the third connecting member 840 and the third connecting member 840. The fourth connecting member 835 meshes with the arm member 830, and the arm member 830 rotates around a predetermined position 723a.

Then, the third connecting member 840 rotates while meshing with the fourth connecting member 835 together with the first connecting member 724, and the second arm member 832 is slid and moved in the direction protruding from the tip of the first arm member 831. The state shown in FIG. 27 is obtained. That is, in the second arm member 832, after the rotating member 725 including the illumination body 727 is rotated by the rotation of the second connecting member 726 from the standby position, the third connecting member 840 meshes with the fourth connecting member 835. Then, by rotating the third connecting member 840, the first arm member 831 slides and moves in the extending direction from the tip end side. Further, the illumination body 727 slides in the direction in which the second arm member 832 extends from the tip end side of the first arm member 831 to move with other members (for example, the decorative member of the upper right third movable accessory). Can be contacted.

According to the upper left third movable accessory 820 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following effects are exhibited. According to the upper left third movable accessory 820, after the illumination body 727 is rotated by the rotation of the second connecting member 726 from the standby position, the third connecting member 840 is the fourth connecting member of the second arm member 832. By engaging with the 835, the rotation of the first arm member 831 causes the first connecting member 724 and the third connecting member 840 to rotate, and the second arm member 832 slides and moves in the extending direction with other members. It becomes possible to make contact. In this way, after the effect of rotating the illuminating body 727 is performed, the illuminating body 727 is slidably moved so as to be in contact with other members, so that, for example, the illuminating body 727 can be quickly rotated. It becomes possible to slowly bring it into contact with other members. Therefore, it is possible to avoid damage to the movable accessory due to contact with other members.

In addition, a plurality of movable accessories equipped with such an illuminated body are provided (upper left third movable accessory, upper right third movable accessory, lower left third movable accessory, and lower right third movable accessory), and these are linked. Since the illumination bodies of the plurality of movable accessories are rotated, the illumination bodies can be moved in the extending direction of the second arm members to bring the illumination bodies into contact with each other. As a result, when a plurality of illuminated bodies that do not form one design when rotating move in the extending direction of each second arm member, they come into contact with each other to form one design. Since it is possible to perform the production, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player with respect to the movement of the illuminated body and to improve the production expression by the illuminated body.
Therefore, when the movable accessory is driven and brought into contact with another member, it is possible to improve the effect of the movable accessory while avoiding damage to the movable accessory due to the contact.

Further, when the second arm member 832 slides, the end of the rotating shaft 726e of the second connecting member 726 slides while engaging with the slide groove 831a, so that the slide groove serves as a guide and the second connecting member becomes a guide. The illumination body 727 attached to the member 726 is suppressed from swinging and can be moved smoothly.

(4th movable accessory)
30 and 31 are views for explaining the configuration of the fourth movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. 30 and 31 are rear views of the fourth movable accessory 760. Further, FIG. 30 shows a state (standby position) before driving the fourth movable accessory 760, and FIG. 31 shows a state (driving position) after driving the fourth movable accessory 760.

As shown in FIG. 30, the fourth movable accessory 760 includes a base member 761, a motor 762, a first gear 763, a second gear 764, a relay member 765, an arm member 766, and a decorative portion 767. , Equipped with.

The base member 761 is attached to the rear box 700 (see FIG. 8). The motor 762 is fixed to the front side of the base member 761 and is driven and controlled by a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. The first gear 763 is arranged on the back surface side of the base member 761 and is rotated by the drive of the motor 762. The second gear 764 is arranged on the back surface side of the base member 761 and meshes with the first gear 763. One end of the relay member 765 is rotatably attached to the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the second gear 764, and the other end is rotatably attached to the arm member 766.

The arm member 766 is formed in a substantially dogleg shape, and is rotatably supported on the base member 761 around a predetermined position 766a in the vicinity of the apex of the substantially dogleg shape. Further, the base end side of the arm member 766 is rotatably attached to the other end of the relay member 765 from the predetermined position 766a, and the decorative portion 767 is attached to the tip end side from the predetermined position 723a.

The decorative portion 767 is attached to the tip end side of the arm member 766 and is formed in a predetermined shape (for example, a circular shape). For example, characters and characters are displayed or an LED board is provided, and this LED board is a sub-control circuit. By controlling 200 (see FIG. 33), it is possible to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode. Further, the decorative portion 767 is provided with a motor, and the decorative portion 767 is rotated under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, or a separate member is provided and the separate member is rotated on the front side of the decorative portion 767. You can also.

Next, the operation of the fourth movable accessory 760 will be described. In the state (standby position) shown in FIG. 30, the fourth movable accessory 760 receives the driving force when the first gear 763 is rotated by the drive of the motor 762 under the control of the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33). It is transmitted to the second gear 764 that meshes with the first gear 763. Then, one end of the relay member 765 rotatably attached near the peripheral edge of the second gear 764 rotates, and the arm member 766 attached to the other end of the relay member 765 also rotates around the predetermined position 766a. .. As a result, the decorative portion 767 attached to the tip end side of the arm member 766 also rotates, and is in the state (driving position) shown in FIG. 32.

As a result, it is possible to produce an effect in which the decorative portion 767 rotates and moves in a predetermined direction. Further, the arm member 766 is rotated by the relay member 765 rotatably attached near the peripheral edge of the second gear 764 that rotates by obtaining the driving force. As a result, for example, when the arm member 766 does not have a space for providing a gear that meshes with the second gear 764 that rotates by obtaining a driving force, or there is another member between the arm member 766 and the second gear 764, the second gear The arm member 766 can be rotated even when it cannot be meshed with the gear 764.

FIG. 32 is a front view of the third movable accessory and the fourth movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 32 shows the state (driving) of the upper left third movable accessory 720, the upper right third movable accessory 730, the lower left third movable accessory 740, the lower right third movable accessory 750, and the fourth movable accessory 760 (driving). Position) is shown. The upper left third movable accessory 720, the upper right third movable accessory 730, the lower left third movable accessory 740, the lower right third movable accessory 750, and the fourth movable accessory 760 are sub-controlled from the state shown in FIG. It is driven by the drive control of the circuit 200 (see FIG. 33), and the state shown in FIG. 32 is obtained.

The upper left third movable accessory 720, the upper right third movable accessory 730, the lower left third movable accessory 740, and the lower right third movable accessory 750 were each formed into a donut shape divided into four at the drive position. , The decorative member 727a of the upper left third movable accessory 720, the decorative member 737a of the upper right third movable accessory 730, the decorative member 747a of the lower left third movable accessory 740, and the decorative member 757a of the lower right third movable accessory 750. , In contact with or close to the decorative members adjacent to each other to integrally form a donut-shaped forming body. Further, the fourth movable accessory 760 descends while rotating from above the circular decorative portion 767, and is arranged at the center of the donut-shaped forming body. In this way, by driving a plurality of movable accessories and arranging them in an integral or related manner in the state after driving (driving position), the effectability can be improved.

[Circuit configuration of pachinko machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the configurations of various circuits included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 70 that mainly controls game movements, a sub-control circuit 200 that controls production movements according to the progress of the game, and mainly game balls. It has a payout control circuit 300 that controls payouts.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 71, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 72, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 73.
Further, the main control circuit 70 includes a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, and a serial communication IC (Integrated Circuit) 76. As described above, in the first embodiment, the special symbol lottery process is performed at the time of winning the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, and this process is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as a means (lottery means) for performing a lottery process as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

A main ROM 72, a main RAM 73, a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, a serial communication IC 76, and the like are connected to the main CPU 71. The main ROM 72 stores various programs (see FIGS. 45 to 63) for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables (see FIGS. 37 and 38), and the like.

The main CPU 71 executes various processes according to the program stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 acts as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and the values of various flags and variables required for the main CPU 71 for the various processes are stored.

In the first embodiment, the main RAM 73 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 71, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium may be used as the temporary storage area. ..

The reset clock pulse generation circuit 74 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute the system timer interrupt process described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. Then, the serial communication IC76 transmits a command to the sub-control circuit 200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, various devices that operate in response to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70 are connected to the main control circuit 70.

Specifically, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are connected to the main control circuit 70. Will be done.

Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61 controls the operation of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game based on the output signal. conduct.

Further, the main control circuit 70 is connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, the first special winning device solenoid 54b, the second special winning opening solenoid 53b, and the V winning opening solenoid 57b. Then, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a to bring the pair of blade-shaped members of the ordinary electric accessory 46 into an open state or a closed state.

Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the first prize opening solenoid 54b and the second prize opening solenoid 53b, respectively, to bring the first prize winning device 54 and the second prize winning device 53 into an open state or a closed state. do.

Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the V winning opening solenoid 57b to open or close the V winning opening 57.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various switches and receives output signals from the various switches. Specifically, the main control circuit 70 includes a count switch 53c, 54c, a general winning ball switch 51a, 52a, a passing ball switch 43a, a first starting port winning ball switch 44a, and a second starting port winning ball switch 45a, V. The winning opening winning ball switch 57c, the backup clear switch 121, and the like are connected.

The count switch 54c counts the game balls that have won the first grand prize device 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count switch 53c counts the game balls that have won the second prize winning device 53, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70.

The general winning ball switch 51a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 51, and the general winning ball switch 52a wins the game ball in the general winning opening 52. In this case, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70.

Further, the passing ball switch 43a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the ball passing detector 43. The first starting port winning ball switch 44a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins the first starting port 44.

The second starting port winning ball switch 45a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins the second starting port 45. Further, the backup clear switch 121 outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 when the backup data is cleared according to the operation of the game hall administrator or the like at the time of power failure or the like. ..

Further, the payout control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 70. Here, the main control circuit 70 determines the number of prize balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out via the prize ball case unit 170, which will be described later, on condition that the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied.

The main control circuit 70 that determines the number of prize balls constitutes a payout amount determining means. It should be noted that the predetermined payout condition is that the game ball has won a prize in the various starting openings and various winning openings described above.

Further, the main control circuit 70 transmits information including the number of prize balls determined as described above to the payout control circuit 300 as a prize ball control command. Therefore, the main control circuit 70 constitutes a signal transmission means.

[Payout control circuit]
The payout control circuit 300 includes a payout CPU 301, a ROM 302, and a RAM 303. The ROM 302 stores, for example, various programs (see FIGS. 91 to 98) for controlling the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball case unit 170.

The payout CPU 301 executes various processes according to the program stored in the ROM 302. The RAM 303 acts as a temporary storage area when the payout CPU 301 executes various processes, and the values of various flags and variables required for the payout CPU 301 for the various processes are stored.

In the first embodiment, the RAM 303 is used as the temporary storage area of the payout CPU 301, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium may be used as the temporary storage area.

A prize ball case unit 170 for paying out game balls is connected to the payout control circuit 300. Specifically, the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B, the payout motor 174, and the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B are connected to the payout control circuit 300, respectively.

The first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B detect the game balls supplied in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B, and output a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the payout control circuit. Output to 300.

The payout motor 174 is driven in response to a control signal from the payout CPU 301. The first and second counting switches 181A and 181B detect game balls paid out to the first and second payout passages 180A and 180B by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, respectively, and show the results. A predetermined output signal is output to the payout control circuit 300.

Further, a payout status notification display device 178 and a lower plate full tank switch 179 are connected to the payout control circuit 300. The payout status notification display device 178, which will be described in detail later, is a display device for notifying the type of the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the payout of the game ball, and constitutes a notification means.

As shown in FIG. 111, the payout status notification display device 178 is composed of a 7-segment display, and is provided at a predetermined position on the back surface of, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that only the manager of the hall can see it.

The lower plate full tank switch 179 detects when the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 are full, and outputs the result to the payout control circuit 300. When a signal indicating that the lower plate is full is input from the lower plate full tank switch 179, the payout control circuit 300 notifies the main control circuit 70 of the lower plate through the payout status notification display device 178. Outputs a signal indicating that the tank is full.

As a result, the main control circuit 70 transmits an effect control command to the sub control circuit 200, and the lower plate 22 is in a full state through the speaker 11, the lamp 18, the LED, and the liquid crystal display device 13 by the sub control circuit 200. Is notified.

Further, a launching device 15, an external terminal plate 140, and a card unit 150 for launching a game ball are connected to the payout control circuit 300. Further, a data display 141 is connected to the external terminal plate 140, and a rental operation unit 151 is connected to the card unit 150.

Here, the card unit 150 determines the number of rented balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out via the request case unit 170, which will be described later, on condition that the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied. The card unit 150 that determines the number of balls to be rented constitutes a payout amount determining means. The predetermined payout condition is that the above-mentioned rental operation unit 151 has been operated.

The payout control circuit 300 supplies electric power to the solenoid actuator of the launching device 15 according to the rotation angle when the firing handle 25 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. As a result, the launching device 15 controls to launch the game ball.

The external terminal plate 140 is used for transmitting data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall). The data display 141 is installed, for example, on the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as ancillary equipment of the hall, and has a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of hits.

When operated by the player, the rental operation unit 151 outputs a signal requesting the rental of the game ball to the card unit 150. When the card unit 150 receives a signal requesting the lending of the game ball from the lending operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits a lending ball control signal including information on the determined number of lending balls to the payout control circuit 300. Therefore, the card unit 150 constitutes a signal transmission means.

The payout control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 150, and transmits a predetermined signal to the prize ball case unit 170.

As a result, the prize ball case unit 170 pays out the game ball. As described above, the payout control circuit 300 that receives the prize ball control command and the rental ball control signal constitutes the signal receiving means.

Further, in the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 has first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, and first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B. The first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B and the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B are provided as functions of the payout CPU 301.

The first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B are set from the initial values (“1950 times” in the first embodiment) set in the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process (see S309 and S312 in FIG. 91), which will be described later, respectively. This is a counter in which "1" is subtracted every time a predetermined time ("1 ms" in the first embodiment) elapses while the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B detect the game ball.

In the first embodiment, the counters for countdown are used as the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, but counters for countup may also be used.

Therefore, the payout CPU 301 is conditioned on the condition that the payout of the game ball is started by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, and that the first and second 15 ball collateral switches 172A and 172B detect the game ball. The initial value (“1950 times” in the first embodiment) is set every time a predetermined time (“1 ms” in the first embodiment) elapses, that is, every time the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 93) described later is performed. 1 ”is to be subtracted, that is, updated.

The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a second update means. The value updated by the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B can be set to a value in a narrower range than the value updated by the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B described later. At the same time, it corresponds to the time when the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B are detecting the game ball, and constitutes the second value.

The first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B are predetermined from the initial values (“2000 ms” in the first embodiment) set in the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process (see S309 and S312 in FIG. 91) described later, respectively. It is a timer in which "1" is subtracted every time the time ("1 ms" in the first embodiment) elapses. In the first embodiment, the countdown timer is used as the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B, but a countup timer may also be used.

Therefore, the payout CPU 301 sets the initial value (“2000 ms” in the first embodiment) for a predetermined time (“2000 ms” in the first embodiment) on the condition that the payout of the game ball is started by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B. Every time "1 ms") elapses, that is, every time the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 93) described later is performed, "1" is subtracted, that is, updated.

Here, the initial value (“2000 ms” in the first embodiment) set in the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B described above is the time when it is assumed that the collateral of 15 game balls is completed, that is, The time is set to be sufficient to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (15 in the first embodiment) from the ball tank 161. The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a first update means. The values updated by the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B constitute the first value.

[Sub-control circuit]
The sub control circuit 200 is connected to the serial communication IC 76 of the main control circuit 70. Then, the sub control circuit 200 responds to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70, such as display control in the liquid crystal display device 13, control related to sound generated from the speaker 11, control of the lamp 18 including a decorative lamp, and the like. I do.

That is, the sub-control circuit 200 executes various effects according to the progress of the game based on the command from the main control circuit 70. In the first embodiment, the sub-control circuit 200 cannot supply a signal to the main control circuit 70, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-control circuit 200 can transmit a signal to the main control circuit 70. It may have various configurations.

Further, the sub-control circuit 200 is also connected to the effect button 23 and is also connected to the effect button switch 23a that outputs a signal by operating the effect button 23. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can also perform effect control such as a mini game using the effect button 23, for example.

As shown in FIG. 33, the sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, a voice control circuit 206, and a lamp control circuit 207. The program ROM 202, the work RAM 203, the display control circuit 205, the voice control circuit 206, and the lamp control circuit 207 are connected to the sub CPU 201.

The program ROM 202 stores various programs (see FIGS. 64 to 88) for controlling the effect operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, and various data tables (see FIGS. 39 to 44). Then, the sub CPU 201 executes various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the entire sub control circuit 200 according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

In the first embodiment, the main ROM 72 and the program ROM 202 are applied as the storage means for storing the program, various tables, and the like, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a storage medium that can be read by a computer provided with a control means. For example, storage of a hard disk device, a CDROM, a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, or the like. A medium may be applied.

Moreover, each of the programs may be recorded in a separate storage medium. Further, the program may be recorded in advance on a recording medium, or may be downloaded from the outside or the like after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like.

The work RAM 203 acts as a temporary storage area when the sub CPU 201 executes various processes, and the values of various flags and variables required for the sub CPU 201 for the various processes are stored. In the first embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium.

The display control circuit 205 controls the liquid crystal display device 13 to display an image related to the effect. Although not shown, the display control circuit 205 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP (Video Display Processor)), an image data ROM, a frame buffer, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter, and the like.

The image data ROM stores data for generating various image data. The frame buffer temporarily stores image data. Further, the D / A converter converts image data (digital electric signal) into an image signal (analog electric signal).

The display control circuit 205 performs various processes for displaying an image in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the display control circuit 205 temporarily sets image data such as decorative symbol image data, background image data, and effect image data indicating a decorative symbol (effect identification symbol) based on an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Is stored in the frame buffer.

Then, the display control circuit 205 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 13 at a predetermined timing. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The voice control circuit 206 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying a voice signal (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 11. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM based on the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201.

Then, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the read voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the read voice data to the AMP. Further, the AMP amplifies the voice signal and generates the voice from the speaker 11.

The lamp control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a lamp data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp lighting patterns are stored, and the like. The drive circuit selects one lamp lighting pattern from a plurality of lamp lighting patterns stored in the lamp data ROM based on the lamp lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201.

Then, the selected lamp lighting pattern is read from the lamp data ROM, the read audio data is converted into a predetermined lamp control signal, and the lamp 18 including the decorative lamp and the like is turned on and off.

[Type of game state]
First, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine.

In the first embodiment, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 include "big hit gaming state", "small hit gaming state", and "time saving gaming state".

The "big hit game state" is a game state in which the "big hit game" is performed, and is a game state in which the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 opens and closes. That is, the "big hit game" is a game in which the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 opens and closes, and a plurality of round games are played. The "big hit game" is performed by winning the "big hit" in the lottery performed by entering the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45, there is a 1/200 probability of winning a "big hit" (see FIG. 34 (a)). If you win the "big hit", you will be in the "big hit game state". As shown in FIG. 34 (c), when a "big hit" is won by entering the first starting port 44, 12 special figures (1) -1 to special figures (1) -12 are obtained. It can be divided into any of the special figure types. Further, the special figure type when the "big hit" is won by entering the second starting port 45 is only the special figure (2) -1.

The hit contents of the special figures (1) -1 and the special figures (1) -2 are "time reduction with balls". The "big hit game" in this case has five round games. That is, the shutter 54a is opened and closed five times. The opening time of the shutter 54a is 27.996 seconds (see FIG. 34 (d)). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, the shutter 54a is closed when it is detected that 10 game balls have been inserted into the first large winning device 54 (see FIG. 34 (a)). Fifteen game balls are paid out for each of the game balls that enter the first grand prize device 54.

The expected value of special figure (1) -1 is 1%. That is, when the big hit game is decided, the probability that the hit type is special figure (1) -1 is 1%. The expected value of special figure (1) -2 is 44%. In addition, after shifting from the normal game and performing the "big hit game" of the special figure (1) -1 and the special figure (1) -2, the "time saving game" is performed. Here, the maximum number of times the "time saving game" is performed is 100 times. The details will be described later, but the number of times the "time saving game" is performed corresponds to the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The presence or absence of the "time saving game" after the "big hit game" that has not shifted from the "normal game" will be described later.

In addition, the hit content of special figures (1) -3 to special figures (1) -7 is "time reduction without payout". The "big hit game" in this case has five round games. That is, the shutter 54a is opened and closed five times. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), since the opening time of the shutter 54a is 0.102 seconds and the opening time is short, the game ball is placed in the first big winning device 54 in this "big hit game". The possibility of entering the ball is low. Therefore, in this "big hit game", the possibility that the game ball enters the first big prize device 54 is low, and the game ball is rarely paid out.

The expected value of each of the special figures (1) -3 to (1) -7 is 1%. In addition, after shifting from the normal game and performing the "big hit game" of the special figures (1) -3 to (1) -7, the "short-time game" is performed. Here, the maximum number of times the "time saving game" is performed is 100 times.

In addition, the hit contents of special figures (1) -8 to special figures (1) -12 are "normal without balls". The "big hit game" in this case has five round games. That is, the shutter 54a is opened and closed five times. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), since the opening time of the shutter 54a is 0.102 seconds and the opening time is short, the game ball is placed in the first big winning device 54 in this "big hit game". The possibility of entering the ball is low. Therefore, in this "big hit game", the possibility that the game ball enters the first big prize device 54 is low, and the game ball is rarely paid out.

The expected value of each of the special figures (1) -8 to (1) -11 is 12%, and the expected value of the special figures (1) -12 is 2%. In addition, after shifting from the normal game and performing the "big hit game" of the special figures (1) -8 to (1) -12, the "short-time game" is not performed, and the "normal game state" is displayed. Become.

The content of the hit of the special figure (2) -1 is "there is a ball". The "big hit game" in this case has five round games. That is, the shutter 54a is opened and closed five times. The opening time of the shutter 54a is 27.996 seconds. However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, the shutter 54a is closed when it is detected that 10 game balls have been inserted into the first large winning device 54 (see FIG. 34 (a)). Fifteen game balls are paid out for each of the game balls that enter the first grand prize device 54.

The expected value of special figure (2) -1 is 100%. That is, when the big hit game is determined by entering the second starting port 45, it is always the special figure (2) -1. After the "big hit game" of special figure (2) -1, the "time saving game" is performed. Here, the maximum number of times the "time saving game" is performed is 100 times.

The "small hit game state" is a game state in which the "small hit game" is performed, and is a game state in which the blade member 53a of the second large winning device 53 opens and closes. The "small hit game" is performed by winning the "small hit" by a lottery performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 45.
As described above, even if the ball enters the first starting port 44, the "small hit" is not won.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 45, a "small hit" is won with a probability of 199/200 (see FIG. 34 (a)). If you win the "small hit", you will be in the "small hit game state". As shown in FIG. 34 (c), when the "small hit" is won by entering the second starting port 45, the small hit (2) -1 to the small hit (2) -4-4 It is sorted into one of the special figure types.

The hit contents of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2 are "16R per V". In this case, the "small hit game" performs an opening / closing operation in which the blade member 53a is opened three times. The opening time of the blade member 53a per time is 1.5 seconds for the small hit (2) -1 and 1.2 seconds for the small hit (2) -2 (see FIG. 34 (d)). ). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that four game balls have been inserted into the second special winning device 53, the blade member 53a is closed and does not open (FIG. 34 (a)). reference). Further, when it is detected in the second large winning device 53 that four game balls have been entered, the blade member 53a is closed and does not open even if the blade member 53a is not opened three times. .. Fifteen game balls are paid out for each of the game balls that enter the second large winning device 53.

Further, in the "small hit game" of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 57 of the second large winning device 53, it becomes "V hit". A 16-round "big hit game" will be held. However, in this case, since the opening / closing operation of the blade member 53a that triggered the entry into the V winning opening 57 is the first round, the shutter 54a of the first large winning device 54 after entering the V winning opening 57 Performs an opening and closing operation that opens 15 times. In this way, the game started by entering the V winning opening 57 is also referred to as a "big hit game". In this "big hit game", the opening time of the shutter 54a is 27.996 seconds. However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, the shutter 54a is closed when it is detected that 10 game balls have been inserted into the first large winning device 54. Then, 15 game balls are paid out for each of the game balls that enter the first grand prize device 54.

The expected value of small hit (2) -1 is 16%. That is, when the small hit game is determined, the probability of a small hit (2) -1 is 16%. The expected value of the small hit (2) -2 is 17%. Further, after the "big hit game" of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2 is performed, the "time saving game" is performed. Here, the maximum number of times the "time saving game" is performed is 100 times. In some cases, the "short-time game" may not be performed after the "big hit game" of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2, which will be described later.

Further, the hit contents of the small hit (2) -3 and the small hit (2) -4 are "2R per V". In this case, the "small hit game" performs an opening / closing operation in which the blade member 53a is opened three times. The opening time of the blade member 53a per time is 1.5 seconds for the small hit (2) -3 and 1.2 seconds for the small hit (2) -4 (see FIG. 34 (d)). ). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that four game balls have been inserted into the second special winning device 53, the blade member 53a is closed and does not open (FIG. 34 (a)). reference). Fifteen game balls are paid out for each of the game balls that enter the second large winning device 53.

Further, in the "small hit game" of the small hit (2) -3 and the small hit (2) -4, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 57 of the second large winning device 53, it becomes "V hit". Two rounds of "big hit games" will be held. However, in this case, since the ball entering the V winning opening 57 is the first round, the shutter 54a of the first large winning device 54 is opened and closed once after the ball is entered into the V winning opening 57. In this way, the game started by entering the V winning opening 57 is also referred to as a "big hit game". This "big hit game" has a different number of rounds from the "big hit game" of small hit (2) -1 and small hit (2) -2, but the opening time, the number of payouts, etc. are the same.

The expected value of small hit (2) -3 is 33%. The expected value of small hit (2) -4 is 34%. Further, after the "big hit game" of the small hit (2) -3 and the small hit (2) -4 is performed, the "time saving game" is performed. Here, the maximum number of times the "time saving game" is performed is 100 times.

The "time-saving game state" is a game state in which the "time-saving game" is performed, and is a game state in which the winning probability of a normal symbol is relatively high. That is, the "time saving game state" is a game state in which the ordinary electric accessory 46 provided in the second start port 45 is likely to be opened (a game state in which a second start port winning is likely to occur), and is for the player. It is an advantageous gaming state. In addition, the "time saving game state" ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment), when it becomes "V hit", or when the "big hit" is won. ..
In the "short-time game state", not only the winning probability of the normal symbol is relatively high, but also the lottery time in the normal symbol game may be relatively short. Further, the opening time in the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be relatively long.

As shown in FIG. 34 (b), in the "short-time game state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is high, which is 256/256. In the first embodiment, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed with a high probability of 256/256 in the "time saving game state", but the lottery of the ordinary symbols may not be performed and the winning may always be achieved. In addition, except for the "time saving game state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is low, and 0/256, that is, the normal symbol is not won. In addition, except for the "time saving game state", in the first embodiment, the lottery of the normal symbol is performed with a low probability of 0/256, but the lottery of the normal symbol is not performed, and the lottery may always be lost.

The "normal game state" is a game state in which the "normal game" is performed, and is not a "big hit game state", a "small hit game state", or a "short-time game state".

The transition operation between the various gaming states described above is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as a means for controlling the transition operation between various gaming states.

[Main control state transition]
The transition between the various gaming states described above will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the main control of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts the game, the game is usually performed in the “normal gaming state”. Here, every time a prize is won in the first starting port 44, a lottery process for a special symbol for the first starting port 44 is performed. However, as described above, since the normal symbol is not won in the "normal game state", the normal electric accessory 46 is not opened and the second starting port 45 is not won.

If the "big hit" is won when the first starting port 44 is won, the game shifts to the "big hit game state". At this time, if the hit contents are special figures (1) -8 to special figures (1) -12, the state shifts to the "normal game state" after the "big hit game state" (non-time saving big hit).

In the "normal game state", when the first starting port 44 is won and the "big hit" is won, if the hit content is special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7, "big hit". After "game state", it shifts to "time saving game state" (time saving big hit). Specifically, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery process for a normal symbol is performed. In the "short-time game state", since the lottery of the normal symbol is won with high probability, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, the normal electric accessory 46 is opened. If the game ball wins the second starting port 45 when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in the open state, a lottery process for a special symbol for the second starting port 45 is performed.

In the "time-saving game state", it is preferable for the player to pass the ball passing detector 43 through the ball passing detector 43, so that the player preferably performs "right-handed". Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may perform an effect that encourages the player to "right-hand" by displaying, voice, or the like.

If the "small hit" is won when the second starting port 45 is won, the state shifts to the "small hit game state", and the blade member 53a is opened and closed. When the blade member 53a is in the open state, the second big winning device 53 is won, and when the V winning opening 57 is won, the state shifts to the "big hit game state". The number of round games varies depending on the content of the hit at this time. In the case of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2, the hit content is "16R per V", and the blade member 53a in the second large winning device 53 when the hit content is "V hit". Is open for one round, and 16 rounds of "big hit games" are executed including this round. Further, in the case of the small hit (2) -3 and the small hit (2) -4, the hit content is "2R per V", and the blade in the second large winning device 53 when "per V" is obtained. The open state of the member 53a is defined as one round, and two rounds including this round. In general, the larger the number of rounds, the more game balls are paid out. Therefore, for the player, "V hit" in the "small hit" of "16R per V" is "V". It can be said that it is more advantageous than "V hit" in "small hit" of "2R" in hit.

Details will be described later, but in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, a round of "big hit game" that shifts to a "V hit" when a "small hit" is won by satisfying a predetermined condition. Notify about the number. As a result, the player is paid out in the "big hit game state" that shifts after "V hit" by changing the launch operation of the game ball such as performing so-called "stop hitting" according to this notification content. The number of game balls can be increased.

Here, when a time-saving big hit occurs in the "normal game state", the "time-saving game state" and the "big hit game state" are alternately shifted by a predetermined number of times. In the first embodiment, after the "big hit game state" after the "normal game state", the so-called first hit "big hit game state", the "time saving game state" and the "big hit game state" are alternately alternated three times each by a predetermined number of times. Migrate. In other words, "normal game state"-> "big hit game state"-> "time-saving game state"-> "big hit game state"-> "time-saving game state"-> "big hit game state"-> "time-saving game state"-> "big hit game state"-> It shifts in the order of "normal game state". However, in the transition of these gaming states, for example, when the "small hit" is won in the "short-time gaming state", the transition is made to the "small hit gaming state", but this "small hit gaming state" is omitted. ing. It should be noted that the "big hit game state" other than the "big hit game state" of the first hit is not necessarily triggered by the "V hit". That is, the "big hit game state" by the "big hit" of the special figure (2) -1 shown in FIG. 34 is also included, and for example, there is a possibility of shifting to the "big hit game state" by this "big hit" three times.

As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of a time-saving big hit, in principle, four times of "big hit game" and three times of "time-saving game" are performed (set game). Regardless of the winning content of the "small hit" in the third "short-time game state", after the subsequent "big hit game state", the "normal game state" is set instead of the "short-time game state". .. In addition, regardless of the winning content of the "small hit" in the first and second "time-saving game states", the "time-saving game state" is set after the subsequent "big hit game state".

In the special symbol lottery of the second starting port 45, the "big hit" may be won without winning the "small hit", but in that case, the game shifts to the "big hit game state".

Here, in the "short-time game state", the player is likely to be "right-handed" and is unlikely to win the first starting port 44. However, if the first starting port 44 is won and the "big hit" is won, the number of rounds and the opening time are determined according to the content of the hit, and the "big hit game" is performed. In addition, in the winning of the "big hit" in the first and second "time saving game states", even if the hit contents are special figures (1) -8 to special figures (1) -12, after the "big hit game state" Is in the "time saving game state". In addition, in the third "time saving game state", if the first starting port 44 is won and the "big hit" is won, regardless of the hit content, after the subsequent "big hit game state", the "time saving" It becomes a "normal game state" instead of a "game state".

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the time saving jackpot is achieved in the "normal game state", the set game is performed, but while the "time saving game" is performed 100 times in the "time saving game state", the "V" is performed. If no "hit" is made, the game shifts from the "short-time game state" to the "normal game state". However, in the first embodiment, it can be set by adjusting the opening timing of the movable member 57a of the V winning opening 57 when the game ball enters the second large winning device 53. Therefore, when the player performs a normal firing operation, it is unlikely that the "V hit" is not performed while the "time saving game" is performed 100 times. For example, the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 when entering the second large winning device 53 may be set to about 2/3.
Specifically, the movable member 57a may open and close until the blade member 53a of the second prize-winning device 53 starts to open and closes. Then, by adjusting the timing at which the movable member 57a starts the opening operation, the opening time, and the like, the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 when entering the second large winning device 53 can be adjusted. .. As a result, this probability may be reduced to about 2/3. For example, the time when the movable member 57a is open may be about two-thirds of the time when the blade member 53a is open.

[Sub-control state transition]
The transition between the various gaming states described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a state transition diagram of the sub-control of the pachinko gaming machine.

Here, since the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -1 to (1) -2 triggers a transition to the "big hit game state" in which the payout of the game ball can be expected, the display area 13a is displayed at this time. The displayed decorative pattern may be, for example, three identical numbers arranged side by side. As a result, it can be seen that the player also shifts to an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -2 may be referred to as a "sign-matched big hit".

In addition, since the "big hit" in the special figures (1) -3 to (1) -12 triggers a transition to the "big hit game state" in which the payout of the game ball cannot be expected, it is displayed in the display area 13a at this time. The decorative design to be made may be a series of different numbers. For this reason, the "big hit" in the special figures (1) -3 to (1) -12 may be referred to as a "big hit in which the symbols are not aligned".
The decorative symbol displayed in the display area 13a may be such that three symbols, the right symbol, the middle symbol, and the left symbol, are lined up, and the special symbols (1) -3 to the special symbols (1) -12 may be arranged. In the "big hit" of, the right symbol and the left symbol may be the same symbol, and a special symbol may be displayed for the middle symbol. It is possible to have a plurality of types of medium symbols, which are special symbols, and to have different effects in the "big hit" depending on the displayed medium symbols. Then, the degree of expectation for entering the "short-time game state" may differ depending on the difference in these effects. In this case, the expected degree of time saving rush can be made different by making the selection rate of each of the plurality of types of medium symbols different for each of the special figures (1) -3 to (1) -12. good. For example, the middle symbol is a symbol that draws a fortune, and the fortune that appears may suggest a shift to a time-saving game.

As described above, the first embodiment has a "normal game state", a "big hit game state", and a "time saving game state". As shown in FIG. 36, the "normal game state" and the "big hit game state" can be transferred to each other, and the "big hit game state" and the "time saving game state" can be transferred to each other. There is also a "small hit game state", but this is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 36, the "normal game state" includes a "first high probability state", a "second high probability state", a "third high probability state", and a "fourth high probability state". It has been. The "normal game state" also includes a "normal game state (sub)" that is a state other than the "first high probability state" to the "fourth high probability state". As described above, in the first embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of rounds of the "big hit game" which shifts when the "small hit" is won and the "V hit" is obtained is notified. .. It is necessary to determine whether or not to perform this notification or the notification mode such as the number of notifications. Then, the notification modes determined in each of these "first high probability state" to "fourth high probability state" and "normal gaming state (sub)" are different.

First, each of the "first high probability state" to the "fourth high probability state" will be described.

In the "first high probability state", if the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -1 to (1) -7 is won and the game shifts to the set game, the three "big hits" executed in the set game are executed. In all of the "time saving game states", the number of rounds of the "big hit game" that shifts to the case of "V hit" when the "small hit" is won is notified. That is, when the game ball wins the V winning opening 57, it is notified which of the 16 rounds of the "big hit game" and the 2 rounds of the "big hit game" is executed. When the set game is completed and the game shifts to the "normal game state", the "first high probability state" is set. In addition, when the "big hit" of special figures (1) -8 to (1) -12 is won and the game shifts to the one-shot "big hit game state" instead of the set game, the "big hit game state" Is completed and the state shifts to the "normal game state", the "first high probability state" is maintained.

The "first high-probability state" is defined in the "normal gaming state" other than the "third high-probability state" and the "fourth high-probability state", that is, the "second high-probability state" and the "normal gaming state (sub)". The transition occurs when the number of points accumulated according to the effect in the pachinko game (more specifically, the fluctuation pattern described later) reaches a predetermined number (100 points in the first embodiment). Further, when the state shifts to the "first high probability state", the number of times the "first high probability state" continues is determined by lottery. Then, when the game of the number of continuations determined in the "first high probability state" is digested, the game shifts to the "second high probability state". For example, in the "first high probability state", when the variation display of the special symbol is performed 20 times, the process shifts to the "second high probability state".

The "second high probability state" is a state in which it is easier to shift to the "first high probability state" than the "normal game state (sub)". That is, the "second high-probability state" is a gaming state in which the points that trigger the transition to the "first high-probability state" are more likely to be accumulated than in the "normal gaming state (sub)" (see FIG. 41). Further, when the state shifts to the "second high probability state", the number of times the "second high probability state" continues is determined by lottery (see FIG. 40). Then, when the game of the number of continuations determined in the "second high probability state" is digested, the game shifts to the "normal game state (sub)". For example, in the "second high probability state", when the variation display of the special symbol is performed 20 times, the state shifts to the "normal game state (sub)". In addition, when the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -8 to (1) -12 is won and the game shifts to the one-shot "big hit game state" instead of the set game, the "big hit game state". When is completed and the state shifts to the "normal game state", the "first high probability state" is set.

In "normal gaming state" other than "first high probability state", "third high probability state" and "fourth high probability state", that is, "second high probability state" and "normal gaming state (sub)" When the "big hit" in Fig. (1) -1 is won and the game shifts to the set game, when the "small hit" is won in all of the three "time saving game states" executed in the set game, the "small hit" is won. The number of rounds of the "big hit game" that shifts to the case of "V hit" is notified. In addition, when the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -2 to (1) -7 is won and the game shifts to the set game, the number of times the number of rounds is notified is determined by lottery. This lottery will be described later. When the set game is completed and the game shifts to the "normal game state", the "first high probability state" is set. In addition, when the "big hit" of special figures (1) -8 to (1) -12 is won and the game shifts to the one-shot "big hit game state" instead of the set game, the "big hit game state" When is completed and the state shifts to the "normal game state", the "first high probability state" is set.

The "third high probability state" is a gaming state (ceiling state) for activating the so-called ceiling function. The ceiling function grants a privilege advantageous to the player on the condition that the disadvantageous state for the player continues. Specifically, if the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -1 to (1) -7 is won in the "third high probability state" and the game shifts to the set game, the game is executed in the set game. In all three "short-time game states", the number of rounds of the "big hit game" that shifts to the case of "V hit" when the "small hit" is won is notified.
After the end of this set game, the state shifts to the "first high probability state". Furthermore, in the "third high probability state", the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -8 to (1) -12 is won, and the game shifts to the "big hit game state" only once instead of the set game. In that case, when this "big hit game state" ends and shifts to the "normal game state", the "third high probability state" is maintained. The "third high probability state" is maintained until the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -1 to (1) -7 is won and the game shifts to the set game.

As described above, the "third high probability state" is a gaming state for activating the ceiling function.
When the state in which the "big hit" does not occur continuously even if the game ball enters the first starting port 44, the state shifts to the "third high probability state". In the first embodiment, the state in which the game ball does not become a "big hit" even if the game ball enters the first starting port 44 is 111 games, 222 games, 333 games, 444 games, 555 games, 666 games, 777 games, and 888 games. And 999 games are continued, the ceiling lottery is performed by the sub CPU 201 each time, and if the game is won, the game shifts to the "third high probability state". Details of the ceiling lottery will be described later.

In addition, even after shifting to the "third high probability state" which is the ceiling state, the state in which the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -1 to (1) -7 is not won is 111 games, 222 games, If 333 games, 444 games, 555 games, 666 games, 777 games, 888 games, and 999 games continue, the sub CPU 201 may perform a ceiling lottery each time. Then, if a winner is won, the "third high probability state" may be accumulated and stored. That is, when a plurality of "third high probability states" are stored, the "big hit" of special figures (1) -1 to special figures (1) -7 is won, and the game is executed three times in the set game. In all of the "time saving game states" of, when the "small hit" is won, the notification of the number of rounds of the "big hit game" that shifts to the case of "V hit" is stored in the "third high probability state". It suffices to be possible as many times as there are. That is, when the "third high-probability state" is accumulated and stored, the game shifts to the "third high-probability state" again after the set game is completed, as many times as the "third high-probability state" is stored.

In addition, after shifting to the "third high probability state" which is the ceiling state, the number of games that do not win the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -1 to (1) -7 is counted, and the notification is sent. When the game is changed from the "third high probability state" to the "normal game state", when counting the number of games that is the standard of the ceiling lottery again, after the transition to the above "third high probability state" The number of games may be counted by adding the number of games.

The "fourth high-probability state" is for granting a privilege (all-day navigation) that is advantageous to the player throughout the day. Specifically, if the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -1 to (1) -7 is won in the "fourth high probability state" and the game shifts to the set game, the game is executed in the set game. In all three "short-time game states", the number of rounds of the "big hit game" that shifts to the case of "V hit" when the "small hit" is won is notified.

In addition, in the "fourth high probability state", when the set game ends, or when the one-shot "big hit game state" that does not shift to the "time saving game state" ends, the "fourth high probability state" is maintained. Will be done. In this way, when the state shifts to the "fourth high probability state", the "fourth high probability state" is maintained. Then, unless the work RAM 203 is cleared, the "fourth high probability state" is maintained. In this way, in the "fourth high-probability state", notification is given in all three "time-saving game states" executed in the set game, and the "fourth high-probability state" remains until the work RAM 203 is cleared. Since it is maintained, the above notification in the set game continues until the store is closed. Therefore, the above notification in the "fourth high probability state" is called all-day navigation.

The work RAM 203 is cleared by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while pressing the backup switch. The work RAM 203 is not cleared simply by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, due to some error, the work RAM 203 is not cleared even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, and the "fourth high probability state" is maintained. Normally, the work RAM 203 is not cleared during the business hours of the hall.
Here, when the work RAM 203 is cleared, the RAM clear flag is set, and if the first hit after the RAM clear flag is set is the "big hit" in the special figure (1) -12, there is a 1/1 probability. Wins the "4th high probability state" and shifts to the "4th high probability state". In addition, the RAM clear flag is turned off regardless of the first hit after the RAM clear flag is set. If the subsequent hits are the "big hits" in Special Figure (1) -12, there is a 1/10 chance of winning the "fourth high probability state" and shifting to the "fourth high probability state".
As described above, in order to shift to the "fourth high probability state", it is a condition that the work RAM 203 is cleared, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is simply powered off from the power off without clearing the work RAM 203. It may be a condition that it is turned on. That is, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the first hit is the "big hit" of the special figure (1) -12, the "fourth high probability state" is won with a probability of 1/1. It may be possible to shift to the "fourth high probability state". The power ON flag may be set when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. Then, the power ON flag is turned off regardless of the first hit after the power ON flag is set. If the hit after that becomes the "big hit" in Special Figure (1) -12, there is a 1/10 chance of winning the "4th high probability state" and shifting to the "4th high probability state". May be. In this case, the "fourth high probability state" may be maintained until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. At the time of the "big hit" in Special Figure (1) -12, it was decided to win the "fourth high probability state" with a probability of 1/1 or 1/10, but it became the "fourth high probability state". The type of winning and the winning probability can be set as appropriate.

The "normal gaming state (sub)" is a "normal gaming state" other than the "first high probability state" to the "fourth high probability state", and is a "first high probability state" rather than the "second high probability state". It is difficult to shift to. That is, the "normal gaming state (sub)" is a gaming state in which the points that trigger the transition to the "first high probability state" are less likely to be accumulated than in the "second high probability state" (see FIG. 41). In the "normal game state (sub)", one of a plurality of modes having different expectations for the number of times the "second high probability state" continues is further determined.
Here, in the first embodiment, the initial mode, the low mode, and the high mode are set as an example of the plurality of modes.

The initial mode is a mode in which the work RAM 203 is cleared as described above. The low mode and the high mode are modes in which one of them is determined by the mode transition lottery when any "big hit" (that is, the first hit) is made in the "normal game state (sub)". The degree of expectation of the number of continuations of the "second high probability state" increases in the order of high mode, initial mode, and low mode (see FIG. 40). That is, a relatively long number of continuations is determined as the number of continuations of the "second high probability state" in the order of high mode, initial mode, and low mode. In addition, in the case of any "big hit" (that is, the first hit) in the gaming state other than the "normal gaming state (sub)", for example, the "first high probability state" and the "second high probability state". Alternatively, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery may be performed.

Further, the expectation of the number of continuations of the "first high probability state" may be increased in the order of high mode, initial mode, and low mode, and in the initial mode and high mode, the "normal gaming state (normal game state) ( In "sub)", points may be given more easily than in the low mode.

Here, the low mode is determined by paying attention to the low mode that is usually most easily selected and the high mode that shifts when one of the "big hits" (that is, the first hit) is won in the mode transition lottery. When the high mode is determined, the expectation of the number of continuations of the "second high probability state" is higher than in the case where the mode is determined, which is advantageous for the player. Further, in the first embodiment, which of the plurality of high-probability states described above is in the high-probability state is notified by a background image or the like displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. However, in principle, it is not notified which mode is set.
That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the number of times the "second high probability state" continues differs depending on whether the determined mode is the low mode or the high mode, resulting in a result. As a result, the number of games until the transition to the "first high probability state" will change. Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of expectation regarding the awarding of points (as a result, a sense of expectation of transition to the "first high probability state") without deteriorating the interest.
In particular, even if a "big hit" (special figure (1) -8 to 12) that does not shift to the set game is won, if the high mode is selected, the "second high probability state" that shifts thereafter is selected. In ", the degree of expectation that it may be easy to shift to the" first high probability state "can be increased. Therefore, even if a relatively disadvantageous "big hit" (Special Figure (1) -8 to 12) is won, there is a sense of expectation regarding the awarding of points without degrading the interest (as a result, the "first". Expectations for a transition to a "high probability state") can be held.

Here, focusing on the low mode that is usually most easily selected and the initial mode that shifts based on the fact that the work RAM 203 is cleared, the case where the initial mode is determined rather than the case where the low mode is determined. This is more advantageous for the player because the expectation of the number of continuations of the "second high probability state" is high. Further, as described above, the "fourth high probability state", which is an advantageous state in which navigation is performed all day, is to be terminated based on the fact that the work RAM 203 is cleared.
That is, when the hall (game hall) is closed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment in the “fourth high probability state”, the clerk in the hall (game hall) will use the work RAM 203 before the opening time of the next day. Is likely to be cleared. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, in this case, a relatively advantageous initial mode is set by the player. Therefore, when the "fourth high probability state", which is an advantageous state in which navigation is performed all day, has ended (specifically, the "fourth high probability state" was the previous day, but the work RAM 203 is cleared. , Even if it was not the "4th high probability state" on the next day), the expectation for giving points without degrading the interest (as a result, the expectation for the transition to the "1st high probability state") ) Can be embraced.

In the first embodiment, as an example of the condition (initialization condition) for setting the initial mode, it is a condition that the work RAM 203 is cleared, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 simply does not clear the work RAM 203. It may be a condition that the power is turned on from the power off. Further, it may be a condition that the power is turned on after a predetermined time has elapsed since the pachinko gaming machine 1 was turned off. Specifically, the time from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off to when the power is turned on is the first time required for the maintenance work of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, clearing the ball jam) (for example, clearing the ball jam). When a predetermined initialization time (for example, 2 hours) has passed, which is more than 30 minutes) and less than a second time (for example, 11 hours) indicating that the hall (game hall) is closed. , The initialization condition may be satisfied. By adopting such an initialization condition, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been continuously played for a predetermined time, and the initial mode is frequently set. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Next, the transition between the "normal gaming state" and the "big hit gaming state" will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, both when the "design aligned hit" (first jackpot state) is won in the "normal game state" and when the "symbol unmatched hit" (first jackpot state) is won. It shifts to the "big hit game state". In addition, if you win the "matched symbols", you can expect to pay out the game balls. If you win the "big hit game state" of 5 rounds, you cannot expect to pay out the game balls. It shifts to the "big hit game state" (second big hit state) of the round.

Then, from the "normal game state" other than the "fourth high probability state", that is, the "first high probability state" to the "third high probability state" and the "normal game state (sub)", the special figure (1) -1 -If the "big hit" in Special Figure (1) -7, the set game is executed, and after the set game is completed, the state shifts to the "first high probability state".

Also, from the "normal gaming state" other than the "third high probability state" and the "fourth high probability state", that is, the "first high probability state", the "second high probability state" and the "normal gaming state (sub)". , When the "big hit" of special figures (1) -8 to (1) -12 shifts to the "big hit game state", it becomes a single-shot "big hit game state" with no time reduction, and this "big hit game state". After the end, it shifts to the "first high probability state". In addition, when the "third high probability state" is changed to the "big hit game state" by the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -8 to (1) -12, the single-shot "big hit game state" with no time reduction is achieved. , And after the end of this "big hit game state", it shifts to the "third high probability state" again.

When the state shifts from the "fourth high probability state" to the "big hit game state", it shifts to the "fourth high probability state" again after the set game is completed or the single-shot "big hit game state" with no time reduction is completed.

Next, the transition between the "big hit game state" and the "short-time game state" will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, during the set game after the "big hit" by winning the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, or after the "V hit" in the "small hit game state". When the set game is in progress, the game shifts from the "big hit game state" to the "short-time game state".

Further, the transition from the "time saving game state" to the "big hit game state" is when "V hit" is performed in the "time saving game state". At this time, if the 16th round "big hit game" is won, the third big hit state is entered, and if the second round "big hit game" is won, the fourth big hit state is entered. Further, in the "time saving game state", even if the "big hit" is won by entering the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 instead of the "V hit", the "big hit game" is changed from the "time saving game state". Move to "state". In this case, the state shifts to the first big hit state.

[Configuration of data table stored in main ROM]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

[Main fluctuation time determination table]
First, the main fluctuation time determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. 37 and 38 are diagrams showing an example of the main fluctuation time determination tables 1 and 2 of the pachinko gaming machine.

The main fluctuation time determination table 1 is referred to when a loss or a "small hit" is won in a special symbol game. The main variation time determination table 1 defines the relationship between the game state, the reach determination random number range, the effect selection random number range, the variation pattern, the variation pattern command, and the variation time.

In the main fluctuation time determination table 1, the gaming state is classified into a "time saving game state" (with time saving) and a state not "time saving gaming state" (no time saving). Further, the special figure type is divided into five special figure (1) loss and small hit (2) -1 to small hit (2) -4.

The reach determination random number range defines whether or not the selection content is reach when the special figure type is special figure (1) Loss. The range of the reach determination random number that does not determine the reach fluctuation time and the reach fluctuation time that determines the reach fluctuation time is defined. The reach determination random number value is extracted from a reach determination counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first and second start ports 44 and 45 in each game state. The reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter of the first embodiment is set to 0 to 250.

As shown in FIG. 37, for example, when the special figure (1) is lost and the gaming state at that time is not the time-saving gaming state, the reach determination random number range for determining the variation time for reach is 0 to 250. Take the range of. Further, it is determined that the reach occurs when the reach determination random number range is any of 0 to 25, and the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the value of the effect selection random number in the range of 0 to 99. .. By determining the variation pattern, the variation time for reach (20,000 ms, 30,000 ms, 40,000 ms) and the production content (“loss normal reach”, “loss super reach A”, and “loss super reach B”) are determined. It should be noted that each of these reach includes a plurality of types of reach contents, and the subsequent reach contents are determined by the sub-control circuit 200.

When the special figure (1) is lost and the gaming state at that time is the time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation time (50,000 ms) is set to be relatively long, but this is the "time-saving gaming state". This is to make it difficult for the lottery of the first special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player, to be performed.
The lottery for the second special symbol has priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. In addition, in the case of the specification which does not have the hold of the second special symbol, it is not necessary to have this data, so this data is not provided.

Here, if the small hit (2) -1 to the small hit (2) -4 and the game state at that time is not the time-saving game state, after the "time-saving game" is performed 100 times, the second special symbol is displayed. This is due to the pending portion and is unlikely to occur. In this case, it is preferable that when the player hits "V", for example, a revival effect is performed such that the "time saving game" is performed again.

The effect selection random number range defines the range of the effect selection random number corresponding to the reach determination random number range, the fluctuation time, and the effect content. The effect selection random value is extracted from an effect selection counter (not shown) when the game ball wins the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 in each game state. The effect selection random value extracted from the main effect selection counter of the first embodiment is set to 0 to 99.

For example, when the special figure (1) is lost and the gaming state at that time is not the time-saving gaming state, the reach determination random number range for determining the variation time for reach is in the range of 0 to 250. Further, it is determined that the normal variation is performed when the reach determination random number range is any of 26 to 250, and the variation pattern is determined according to the value of the effect selection random number in the range of 0 to 99. NS. By determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time (10000 ms, 2000 ms, 5000 ms) and the effect content (“normal fluctuation A”, “shortening fluctuation A”, “normal fluctuation B”, and “special normal fluctuation”) are determined. Subsequent production contents are determined by the sub-control circuit 200.

Here, in the main fluctuation time determination table 1, when the reach determination random number range is any of 26 to 250 and the effect selection random number range is any of 0 to 49, the start storage number (holding number) described later will be described later. ) Is a predetermined number (three in the first embodiment), "shortening variation A" is determined as the fluctuation pattern, and the number of start storages (holding number) described later is a predetermined number (three in the first embodiment). ), "Normal fluctuation A" is determined as the fluctuation pattern. That is, when the number of start memories (holding number) described later is a predetermined number (three in the first embodiment) and at least not a "big hit", the game progresses more than usual in order to accelerate the progress of the game. A fluctuation pattern associated with a short fluctuation time is to be determined.
In the other reach determination random number range and effect selection random number range, if the number of start storages (holding number) described later is a predetermined number (three in the first embodiment) or more, it is normal (for example, 5000 ms). A variation pattern associated with a variation time shorter than the “normal variation B”) (for example, a “short variation B” of 1000 ms) may be determined.
Further, a main fluctuation time determination table is provided for each start storage number (holding number) (for example, when the start storage number is 0 to 1, 2, 3, or 4), and the current start is started. It may be configured so that the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number of memories. For example, the "shortening variation" may be determined with different determination probabilities depending on which case the starting memory number (holding number) is 2 to 4.
That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the number of starting memories and the lottery result.

The fluctuation pattern is data representing the content of the effect. For example, the fluctuation pattern 02H represents a lost normal reach. The fluctuation pattern command is data indicating winning or losing, the fluctuation time, and the content of the effect, and is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200. When the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200, the parameter for specifying the gaming state is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

The main fluctuation time determination table 2 is referred to when a big hit is won in the special symbol game. The main fluctuation pattern determination table 2 defines the relationship between the game state, the jackpot type, the random number range for effect selection, the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern command, and the fluctuation time.

In the main fluctuation time determination table 2, the game state is the same as in the main fluctuation time determination table 1, "with time reduction" indicates that the game is in the time reduction game state when the jackpot is won, and "without time reduction" indicates that the jackpot is won. It indicates that it is not in a time-saving game state. The special figure type is divided into 13 special figures (1) -1 to special figure (1) -12 and special figure (2) -1.
For example, in the case of the big hit of Special Figure (1) -2 and the game state at that time is not the time-saving game state, the content of the big hit type is the time-saving with a random number (the game ball may be paid out in the big hit game state). (Expected, the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the big hit game state), and the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the value of the effect selection random number in the range of 0 to 99. By determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time (20100ms, 30100ms, 40100ms) and the effect content (“normal reach”, “super reach A”, and “super reach B”) are determined. It should be noted that each of these reach includes a plurality of types of reach contents, and the subsequent reach contents are determined by the sub-control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 38, the special figures (1) -1 and the special figures (1) -2 are reach effects regardless of whether the jackpot is in the time-saving game state or not in the time-saving game state when the jackpot is won. However, in the case of special figures (1) -3 to special figures (1) -12, a no-ball production is performed.
Special figures (1) -1 and special figures (1) -2 are "big hits with matching symbols", while special figures (1) -3 to (1) -12 are "big hits without matching symbols". However, if it is a big hit of special figure (1) -3, "no time reduction", and the random number range for effect selection is any of 0 to 49, the advance notice effect (variation pattern 45H) is used as the effect content. ) Is determined. In this advance notice effect, for example, when the symbol (identification symbol, decorative symbol) starts to fluctuate, the fact that the lottery result is a "big hit" is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, so that the symbol (identification symbol, decoration) is displayed. It is announced that the transition to the "big hit game state" will occur before the fluctuation of the symbol) stops. In addition, even in the case of a "big hit" other than the special figure (1) -3, this advance notice effect may be determined with a predetermined probability. Further, in this case, the sub CPU 201 may determine whether or not to perform the above-mentioned advance notification effect according to the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 71.

[Data table configuration stored in sub ROM]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the program ROM 72 of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44.

[Ceiling lottery table]
First, the ceiling lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a ceiling lottery table of a pachinko gaming machine.

The ceiling lottery table is used in the above-mentioned ceiling lottery. In the sub-control circuit 200, after the set game is completed, the number of special symbol games (the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol) when the game ball enters the first starting port 44 and becomes a "big hit" is counted. Therefore, when the game shifts to the set game, the count so far is reset and the number of special symbol games is counted again after the set game is completed. Then, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 111 times, 222 times, 333 times, 444 times, 555 times, 666 times, 777 times, 888 times, and 999 times, a ceiling lottery is performed.

Here, the range of random numbers in the ceiling lottery is 0 to 9. First, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 111 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 1. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 20%. When the number of special symbol games counted reaches 222 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 2. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 30%. When the number of special symbol games counted reaches 333 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 3. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 40%. When the number of special symbol games counted reaches 444 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 4. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 50%. When the number of special symbol games counted reaches 555 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 5. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 60%. Further, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 666 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 6. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 70%. When the number of special symbol games counted reaches 777 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 7. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 80%. When the number of special symbol games counted reaches 888 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 8. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 90%. When the number of special symbol games counted reaches 999 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 9. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 100%.

As shown in FIG. 39, the longer the state of not winning the "big hit" continues, the higher the probability of winning the ceiling lottery. Then, when the number of special symbol games that do not win the "big hit" reaches 999 times, the ceiling lottery is always won. If you win the ceiling lottery, you will move to the "third high probability state".

[Mode lottery table and second high probability continuation number table]
The mode lottery table and the second high-probability continuation number table will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40A is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition lottery table of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 40B is a diagram showing an example of a second high probability continuation number table in the initial mode of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 40 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a second high probability continuation number table in the low mode of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 40 (d) is an example of the second high probability continuation number table in the high mode of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows.

The initial mode is a mode that shifts based on the fact that the work RAM 203 is cleared as described above, and when shifting to the “second high probability state” in the initial mode, the second mode shown in FIG. 40 (b). The high-probability continuation number table is referred to, and the number of continuations of the "second high-probability state" is determined. In the second high-probability continuation number table shown in FIG. 40 (b), 10 times are determined as the number of continuations with a probability of 29492/32768, 20 times are determined as the number of continuations with a probability of 2621/32768, and 655/32768. With a probability, 30 times are determined as the number of continuations.

The low mode and the high mode are modes in which one of the "big hits" (that is, the first hit) is determined by the mode transition lottery in the "normal game state (sub)". The mode transition lottery is executed with reference to the mode lottery table shown in FIG. 40 (a). In the mode lottery table shown in FIG. 40 (a), the low mode is determined with a probability of 29492/32768, and the high mode is determined with a probability of 3276/32768. That is, the low mode is usually the mode most likely to be selected.

When shifting to the "second high probability state" in the low mode, the number of continuations of the "second high probability state" is determined with reference to the second high probability continuation number table shown in FIG. 40 (c). In the second high-probability continuation number table shown in FIG. 40 (c), 10 times are determined as the number of continuations with a probability of 32768/32768. Further, when shifting to the "second high probability state" in the high mode, the second high probability continuation number table shown in FIG. 40 (d) is referred to, and the number of continuations of the "second high probability state" is determined. NS. In the second high-probability continuation number table shown in FIG. 40 (d), 20 times are determined as the number of continuations with a probability of 26216/32768, and 30 times are determined as the number of continuations with a probability of 6552/32768.

As described above, the expectation of the number of continuations of the "second high probability state" is higher in the initial mode than in the low mode, and higher in the high mode than in the low mode and the initial mode. The number of continuations and the lottery value shown in FIGS. 40 (b) to 40 (d) are merely examples, and can be changed to arbitrary values. For example, in the second high-probability continuation number table shown in FIG. 40 (c), if the probability is lower than the probability in the second high-probability continuation number table shown in FIGS. 40 (b) and (d), the number of continuations is 20. The lottery value may be specified so that the number of times or 30 times is determined.

[Point addition table]
The point addition table will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of a point addition table of a pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, the "normal gaming state" other than the "first high probability state", the "third high probability state" and the "fourth high probability state", that is, the "second high probability state" and the "normal gaming state (sub). ) ”, Points are accumulated according to the effect, and when 100 points are accumulated, the state shifts to the“ first high probability state ”(FIG. 36). In the "first high probability state", when the special figure (1) -1 and the special figure (1) -2 "big hit" ("design matching big hit") are won, "V hit" in the "time saving game state" is obtained. Notification (navigation) of the number of rounds of the "big hit game" that shifts to the case is performed in all three "time saving game states". In addition, in the "first high probability state", the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -3 and the special figure (1) -7 (among the "big hits where the symbols are not aligned", the "time saving game state" is entered. Even if you win the "big hit"), the notification (navigation) of the number of rounds of the "big hit game" that shifts to the case of "V hit" in the "time saving game state" is performed in all three "time saving game states". It is said. Therefore, it can be said that it is advantageous for the player to shift to the "first high probability state". In the following, the term "navigation" simply refers to the notification of the number of rounds of the "big hit game" that shifts to the case of the above "V hit".

As described above, the "second high probability state" is a game state in which points are easily accumulated, and different point addition tables are used in the "second high probability state" and in other games. FIG. 41 (a) is a table used during the “second high probability state”. As shown in FIG. 41 (a), the fluctuation pattern commands sent from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 are "83H00H", "83H01H", "83H02H", "83H03H", "83H04H", and "83H43H". , "83H44H" and "83H45H", the value of the added points varies depending on the lottery, but some points are added. That is, in the "second high probability state", points are always added if there is a loss. The point determination random number range is 0 to 9, and the points to be added differ depending on the acquired random number value.

Here, the production content corresponding to "83H00H" is "normal fluctuation A", the production content corresponding to "83H01H" is "normal fluctuation B", and the production content corresponding to "83H02H" is "loss normal reach". The production content corresponding to "83H03H" is "Loss Super Reach A", the production content corresponding to "83H04H" is "Loss Super Reach B", and the production content corresponding to "83H43H" is "shortened". The effect content corresponding to "variation A" and "83H44H" is "special normal variation", and the effect content corresponding to "83H45H" is "advance notice effect" (see FIG. 37). In these effects, the point addition effect may be performed so that the player can recognize that the points are added. In addition, in "Loss Super Reach B", navigation can be acquired with a probability of 1/10.

Further, FIG. 41 (b) is a table normally used during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 41 (b), the variation pattern commands correspond to "83H00H", "83H01H", "83H02H", "83H03H", "83H04H", "83H43H", "83H44H" and "83H45H". If is done, the value of the points to be added will be decided by lottery, but the points may not be added. The point determination random number range is 0 to 9 as in the “second high probability state”. As can be seen from FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), points are more likely to be accumulated in the "second high probability state" than in the normal state.

The tables shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b) are merely examples, and the types of fluctuation patterns to be drawn, the range of point determination random values, and the points to be added are limited to these. It's not a thing. For example, even in a fluctuation pattern other than the fluctuation patterns defined in the tables shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the range of the point determination random value and the points to be added are defined, and a lottery regarding the granting of points is performed. It may be that.

As an example of this, the case where the variation pattern command is "83H17H" (per super reach A) will be described.

For example, in the "second high probability state", when the fluctuation pattern command is "83H17H" (per super reach A), if the point determination random number value is in the range of 0 to 2, "10" is added as an addition point. If the point determination random value is in the range of 3 to 6, "20" is determined as an addition point, and if the point determination random value is in the range of 7 to 9, "30" is determined as an addition point. The table shown in FIG. 41 (a) can be specified.
Further, for example, in the normal case, when the fluctuation pattern command is "83H17H" (per super reach A), if the point determination random number value is in the range of 0 to 2, "1" is determined as an addition point. If the point determination random number value is in the range of 3 to 6, "5" is determined as an addition point, and if the point determination random number value is in the range of 7 to 9, "10" is determined as an addition point. The table shown in 41 (b) can be specified.

Further, as will be described later, in the lottery relating to the awarding of points using the tables shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the symbols (identification symbols, decorative symbols) in the game in which the variation pattern (effect content) is determined are determined. ) Is performed until the variable display is stopped, and the lottery result is notified to the player by, for example, a point addition effect. However, the lottery time for awarding points and the notification time of the lottery result are not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.
For example, if the lottery result (result of the winning judgment) is lost, the variation display of the symbol (identification symbol, decorative symbol) in the next game of the game in which the variation pattern (effect content) is determined starts at these times. It may be any time until it is done. In particular, the notification of the lottery result regarding the awarding of points is performed before the variation display of the symbols (identification symbol, decorative symbol) in the game in which the variation pattern (effect content) is determined is stopped, and the variation pattern (effect content). ) Is performed from the stop of the variable display of the symbol (identification symbol, decorative symbol) in the determined game to the start of the variable display of the symbol (identification symbol, decorative symbol) in the next game. By doing so, it may be possible to further enhance the interest in granting points.
That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, after the variation display of the symbol (identification symbol, decorative symbol) in the game in which the variation pattern (effect content) is determined starts, the symbol (identification symbol) in the next game is started. , Decorative symbols) It is possible to perform a lottery regarding the awarding of points and the notification of the lottery result at any time until the variable display starts.

Here, as can be seen from FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), in the point addition table, the fluctuation pattern "83H00H" ("normal fluctuation A" as the effect content) and the variation pattern "83H43H" (as the effect content). Although the fluctuation time is different from that of "shortening fluctuation A") (see FIG. 37), the addition points determined are the same.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "83H00H" (directing content) is used as the variation pattern (directing content) determined when the lottery result (winning determination result) is lost. The expectation that points will be given will be the same depending on whether "normal fluctuation A") is determined and "83H43H" ("shortening fluctuation A" as the production content) is determined. ing. Therefore, the player who wants to award points does not need to take a long interval for firing the game ball, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of the game machine from being reduced and the game field from suffering an unexpected loss. can.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (directing content) determined when the lottery result (winning determination result) is a hit is "83H45H" ("advance notice directing" as the directing content. ), It is configured so that points can be given. Therefore, for example, when the points are less than 100 points, an effect indicating that the lottery result is a "big hit" is executed at the initial stage of the variable display of the symbols (identification symbol, decorative symbol) such as the advance notice effect. Even in this case, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation for point awarding by the time the variable display of the next symbol (identification symbol, decorative symbol) starts, so that the interest in awarding points can be further improved.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), in the point addition table, the fluctuation pattern "83H01H" ("normal fluctuation B" as the effect content) and the variation pattern "83H44H" (the effect content "" "Special normal fluctuation") is determined when the lottery result (result of winning judgment) is lost, and although the fluctuation time is the same (see FIG. 37), the added points determined are different. There is. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern "83H44H" ("special normal fluctuation B" as the production content) has a higher expectation for giving points than the fluctuation pattern "83H01H" ("normal fluctuation B" as the production content). There is.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the lottery result (result of the hit determination) is lost, "83H01H"("normal variation B" as the effect content) is used as the variation pattern (effect content). There are cases where it is determined and cases where "83H44H"("special normal variation" as the effect content) is determined, and these variation patterns (effect content) have the same variation time (see FIG. 37). , The degree of expectation that points are given is different (see FIG. 41). Therefore, for example, even when a production with a low degree of expectation is executed with respect to the "big hit", it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation with respect to the awarding of points, so that the game is not bored. You can improve your interest.
Basically, "83H01H"("normal fluctuation B" as the production content) is determined as the fluctuation pattern (effect content), and "83H44H"("special normal fluctuation" as the production content) is determined. In some cases, a common effect can be executed except for the effect related to the notification of the lottery result regarding the granting of points (for example, the point addition effect).

[Time saving navigation lottery table without balls]
A time-saving navigation lottery table without balls will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving navigation lottery table for pachinko gaming machines without balls.

As described above, when the winning content is "time reduction without payout", a time reduction navigation lottery without payout is performed, and the number of navigations is determined according to this lottery. When the hit content is "time reduction without payout", the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. As shown in FIG. 42, the range of random values is 0 to 9. In the special figure (1) -3, one navigation is given when the acquired random number value is "9", and no navigation is given when the acquired random number value is other than that. In the special figure (1) -4, one navigation is given when the acquired random number value is "7 to 9", and no navigation is given for other random value values. In special figure (1) -5, two navigations are given when the acquired random number value is "7-9", one navigation is given when the acquired random number value is "2-6", and other disturbances. Navi is not given by the numerical value. In the special figure (1) -6, two navigations are given when the acquired random number value is "5-9", and one navigation is given when the acquired random number value is "0-4". In the special figure (1) -7, when the acquired random number value is "9", three navigations are given, and when the acquired random number value is "0-8", two navigations are given.
If navigation is given, the navigation acquisition effect is executed. Further, the number of times of the given navigation is updated (for example, added) in the work RAM 203 and stored.

[Big hit navigation lottery table]
The jackpot navigation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a pachinko gaming machine jackpot navigation lottery table.

In the "normal game state", the "first high probability state", "third high probability state" and "fourth high probability state" are decided to shift to the set game by winning the "shortening time with balls". If this is the case, navigation is performed for all three "time saving game states" (see S1129 in FIG. 75, S1164 in FIG. 77, and S1174 in FIG. 78). Further, in the special figure (1) -1, navigation is performed for all three "time saving game states" regardless of the game state. However, in the "normal game state" other than the above game state, when the special figure (1) -2 is won, the number of navigations during the set game is drawn by the sub-control circuit 200. The jackpot navigation lottery table is used for this lottery.

The number of winning navigation systems in the jackpot navigation lottery and their winning probabilities differ depending on the selected character. The character is selected by the player from characters 1 to 3. It is selected by, for example, operating the effect button 23 from winning the "big hit" to the start of the one-round game. If the character is not selected before the first round game is started, the default character is selected.

The character is a character image displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. There are a plurality of types of character images (three types in the first embodiment), and the player can select one of the characters, and can enjoy the effect according to the selected character.

In the jackpot navigation lottery, the range of random numbers is 0-9. As shown in FIG. 43, when character 1 is selected, it is a "stable type" and three navigations cannot be obtained, but one or two navigations can be obtained and no navigation can be obtained. There is no case. In addition, when character 2 is selected, it is a "normal type" and navigation may not be obtained, but navigation can be obtained on average for each of 1 to 3 characters. In addition, when character 3 is selected, it is a "one-shot reversal type", and when obtaining navigation, there are always three, but it is not possible to obtain navigation with a probability of 1/2 or more. The player may select a character from these according to his / her preference.
However, for each character, the number of navigation systems and their winning rate are set so that no matter which character is selected, there will be no substantial advantage or disadvantage. In the first embodiment, the number of characters is three, but any number other than this may be used. By increasing the number of characters, it is highly possible that the player's range of character selection will be expanded and the interest in the game will be improved.

[Navigation lottery table at the end of set game]
The navigation lottery table at the end of the set game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of a navigation lottery table at the end of a set game of a pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, during the set game, three "time saving game states" are included. That is, it is possible to execute the navigation up to three times. However, if you win the "big hit" by the special design game instead of the "big hit" by "V hit", you cannot navigate. In such a case, even the player cannot make the situation more advantageous by his / her own operation. Therefore, in the first embodiment, as a remedy in such a case, navigation is given by lottery according to the number of "big hits" by the special symbol game during the set game.

In the sub-control circuit 200, when the set game is completed, a navigation lottery at the end of the set game is performed according to the number of "big hits" by the special symbol game in the set game.

In the navigation lottery at the end of the set game, the range of the random number value is 0 to 9. As shown in FIG. 44, a lottery is performed for each of 0 times, 1 time, 2 times, and 3 times for the number of "big hits" by the special symbol game, and the number of navigations to be given is determined. The greater the number of "big hits" in the special design game, the greater the number of navigations given. In the first embodiment, the number of "big hits" by the special symbol game during the set game is used as a reference, but for example, the number of "big hits" by the special symbol game over the continuous set game is used as a reference. The number may be drawn by lottery. That is, the number of navigations is based on the number of "big hits" by the lottery performed by the game ball entering the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 during a plurality of consecutive set games. May be drawn.

In addition, instead of the number of "big hits" by the special symbol game during the set game, for example, the number of navigations to be given may be drawn based on the total number of rounds in all "big hit game states". .. The number of navigations to be given may be drawn according to the game state during the set game. For example, the number of navigations given based on the type and order of the "big hit game" in the set game may be drawn. For example, the lottery rate of the number of navigations to be given may be different between the case of per 2R, per 2R, and per 16R and the case of per 2R, per 16R, and per 16R. ..

In addition, during a set game, a maximum of three "V hits" are possible, but if all the results are per 2R, the number of game balls paid out is small, which is not a very preferable result for the player. No. Therefore, in such a case, the number of navigations for the next and subsequent set games may be added (see S1210 in FIG. 80). The number to be added may be, for example, once.
Further, the number of navigations may be added in the same manner when the number of hits is not three times per 2R during one set game but three times per twoRs in succession over different set games. Further, in the case of different set games, the number of consecutive 2Rs may not be set to 3, but if the number of consecutive 2Rs is more than 3 times, the navigation may be added. Further, when the number of 2Rs per 2R is a certain number or more in a plurality of continuous set games, the navigation may be added. In this way, some relief measures may be given to the game balls for which the number of payouts is small in the set game.

Although the number of the granted navigations has been described, the number of the granted navigations may be displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 as an effect in, for example, the "big hit game state".

[Explanation of operation of main control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 63, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 will be described.

[Main control main processing]
First, the main control main process controlled by the main CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. 45 and 46 are flowcharts showing an example of the main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine.

In S11, the watchdog timer disable setting process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of disabling the watchdog timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S12.

In S12, the input / output port setting process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs an input / output port setting process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S13.

In S13, a process of determining whether or not the power failure detection state is performed is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HI (high level). If the power failure detection signal is HI, it is determined that it is in the power failure detection state and processing is transferred to S13. If the power failure detection signal is not HI, it is determined that it is not in the power failure detection state and processing is performed in S14. If the power failure detection signal is HI, it is determined that the power failure detection state is reached, the process is transferred to S13 again, and this is repeated until it is determined that the power failure detection signal is not in the power failure detection state.

In S14, the sub-control reception reception wait processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of waiting until the sub-control circuit 200 receives a signal.
When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S15.

In S15, the RAM write permission processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S16.

In S16, a process of determining whether or not the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 33) is on is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S24 when it determines that the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 33) is on, and shifts to S17 when it determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not on. Move the process.

In S17, a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag is performed. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that there is a power failure detection flag, the process is transferred to S18, and if it is not determined that there is a power failure detection flag, the process is transferred to S24.

In S18, the process of calculating the work damage check value is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of checking the damage in the work area and calculating the work damage check value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S19.

In S19, a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value is performed. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the process is transferred to S20, and if it is not determined that the work damage check value is a normal value, the process is performed in S24. Transfer.

In S20, a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S21.

In S21, the initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S22.

In S22, a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power failure to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S23.

In S23, the initial setting process of the CPU peripheral device is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs initial settings for devices around the main CPU 71. When this process is completed, it returns to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter returned from the stack area.

In S24, a process of setting 8000H in the stack pointer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the stack pointer to 8000H. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S25.

In S25, the process of acquiring the initial value of the random number related to the jackpot determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of acquiring the initial value of the random number related to the jackpot determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S26.

In S26, the entire work area clearing process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the entire work area. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S27 (FIG. 46).

In S27, a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to the jackpot determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to the jackpot determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S28.

In S28, the initial setting process of the work area at the time of initializing the RAM is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 initially sets the work area at the time of initialization of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S29.

In S29, a process of transmitting a command at the time of RAM initialization is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 73 to the sub-control circuit 200. Further, in the sub-control circuit 200, initialization is executed based on the received command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S30.

In S30, the initial setting process of the CPU peripheral device is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs initial settings for devices around the main CPU 71. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S31.

In S31, interrupt prohibition processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S32.

In S32, the initial value random number update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S33.

In S33, the interrupt permission process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S34.

In S34, the random number update process for production is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 71 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 73, and if the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process is transferred to S36 and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If it is not the above, the process is transferred to S31.

In S36, a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In S37, the timer update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 measures the opening time of the waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 70 and the sub control circuit 200, the first special winning device 54, and the second special winning device 53. The process of updating various timers such as the winning device open time timer is executed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S38.

In S38, a special symbol control process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 71 extracts a hit determination random value and a hit symbol determination random value according to the detection signals from the first start port winning ball switch 44a and the second start port winning ball switch 45a, and stores them in the main ROM 72. With reference to the winning determination table, it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery (big hit or small hit) has been won, and the determination result is stored in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S39.

In S39, the normal symbol control process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 71 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts a random number value according to the detection signal from the passing ball switch 43a, refers to the ordinary symbol winning table stored in the main ROM 72, and determines whether or not the ordinary symbol lottery has been won. A process of making a determination and storing the result of the determination in the main RAM 73 is performed. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the normal electric accessory 46 is opened, and the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 45. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S40.

In S40, the symbol display device control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 73 in S38 and S39 and the result of the normal symbol control process. A process of storing a control signal for driving in the main RAM 73 is performed. The main CPU 71 transmits the control signal to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 fluctuates and stops the special symbol based on the received control signal. The normal symbol display device 62 fluctuates and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S41.

In S41, game information data generation processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 generates data related to the game information signal to be transmitted to the stand computer or the hall computer, and performs a process of storing the data in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S42.

In S42, the symbol reserved number data generation process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 includes a first start port winning ball switch 44a, a second starting port winning ball switch 45a, and a passing ball switch detected in the switch input process (FIG. 60, S235) in the timer interrupt process described later. Display about hold for special symbol and normal symbol based on the detection signal from 43a and the update result of the hold quantity data stored in the main RAM 73 which is updated according to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. The process of storing the control signal for storing the control signal in the main RAM 73 is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S43.

In S43, port output processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 73 from each port in the above steps and the like. Specifically, it supplies an LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED, a solenoid power supply for driving the first prize-winning port solenoid 54b, the second prize-winning port solenoid 53b, and the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S44.

In S44, command control processing related to the winning opening is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of controlling a winning opening-related command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S45.

In S45, the payout process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the general winning openings 51 and 52, the first starting opening 44, the second starting opening 45, the first large winning device 54, and the second large winning device 53. When the check is performed and a prize is won, the payout request command corresponding to each is transmitted to the payout control circuit 300. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S31.

[Special symbol control processing]
The subroutine (special symbol control process) executed in S38 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. In FIG. 47, the numerical values (00H to 10H) described in the vicinity of S52 to S62 indicate the control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area functioning as the control state flags in the main RAM 73. There is. The main CPU 71 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73, and the special symbol game progresses.

First, in S51, the process of loading the control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 reads out the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S52.

In S52 to S62, which will be described later, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in S52 to S62 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 71 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the process in each step is terminated without being executed, and other subroutines are executed. Of course, the system timer interrupt process is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

In S52, the special symbol memory check process is executed. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S53.

In S53, the special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, when the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management and a predetermined variation time has elapsed in the previous special symbol variation. (When the fluctuation of the special symbol stops fluctuating), the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management is set in the control state flag, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S54 after the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S54.

In S54, the special symbol display time management process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 71 hits (big hit) when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time elapses after confirmation. Or small hit) or not. When the main CPU 71 is a small hit, the value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management is set in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the small hit start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the process of S55 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the small hit start interval has elapsed.

Further, in the case of a big hit, the main CPU 71 sets a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the big hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the process of S58 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval has elapsed.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S62.

In S55, the small hit start interval management process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, when the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management and the time corresponding to the small hit start interval has elapsed, , The data for opening the second special winning device 53 read from the main ROM 72 is stored in the main RAM 73. Then, in the process of S43 of FIG. 45, the main CPU 71 reads out the data for opening the second special winning device 53 stored in the main RAM 73, and sends a signal to open the second special winning device 53. It is supplied to the two major winning opening solenoids 53b. In this way, the main CPU 71 and the like control the opening and closing of the second special winning device 53. That is, the "small hit game state" is executed.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (04H) indicating that the small hit is in progress in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 1.5 seconds or 1.2 seconds) of the second large winning device 53 to the second. Set in the big prize device open time timer. In addition, it is set to execute the process of S56. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S56.

In S56, the small hit medium processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 71 sets the large winning opening opening process (07H) or the small hit end post-processing (05H) in the control state flag depending on the conditions. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S57.

In S57, the post-processing after the end of the small hit is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, after the blade member 53a is closed, it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may enter the V winning opening 57 in the second large winning device 53. .. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the special symbol game end process (10H) in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S58.

In S58, the jackpot start interval management process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 71 is main when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management and the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval has elapsed. The data for opening the first prize-winning device 54 read from the ROM 72 is stored in the main RAM 73. Then, in the process of S43 of FIG. 46, the main CPU 71 reads out the data for opening the first special winning device 54 stored in the main RAM 73, and sends a signal to open the first special winning device 54. It is supplied to the 1st prize opening solenoid 54b. In this way, the main CPU 71 and the like control the opening and closing of the first prize-winning device 54. That is, the "big hit game state" is executed.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening opening process in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.996 seconds or 0.102 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. set. That is, it is set to execute the process of S59. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S59.

In S59, the large winning opening opening process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating that the large winning opening is open, the large winning opening winning counter is “10” or more. It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the opening upper limit time has passed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the first grand prize device 54. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 71 sets a value (09H) indicating the winning end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, and sets a value (08H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management when it is not the final round. Set to the control status flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S60.

In S60, the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has elapsed. In addition, the memory is updated so that the number of times the large winning opening opening counter is increased by "1". The main CPU 71 sets a value (07H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag.
The main CPU 71 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.996 seconds or 0.102 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, the main CPU 71 is set to execute the process of S59. When it is finished, the process is transferred to S59.

In S61, the hit end interval process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 71 has a special symbol game when the control state flag is a value (09H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. A value (10H) indicating the end is set in the control state flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S62. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S62.

In S62, the special symbol game end process is executed. The details of this process will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check when the control state flag is a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. .. That is, it is set to execute the process of S52. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

As described above, by setting the control state flag, the special symbol game is executed. Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “10H”, so that S52 shown in FIG. , S53, S54, S62 will be executed at a predetermined timing.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of "00H", "01H", "02H", and "06H" when the hit determination result is a big hit in the case where it is not in the big hit or small hit gaming state. As a result, the processes of S52, S53, S54, and S58 shown in FIG. 47 are executed at predetermined timings, and the control to the jackpot game state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit game state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of "07H" and "08H" to determine the processes of S59 and S60 shown in FIG. 47. It will be executed at the timing of, and the big hit game will be executed. When the end condition of the big hit game is satisfied, the processes of S59, S61, and S62 shown in FIG. 47 are executed at a predetermined timing by setting "07H", "09H", and "10H" in this order. , The jackpot game will end.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of "00H", "01H", "02H", and "03H" when the result of the hit determination is a small hit in the case where it is not in the big hit or small hit game state. By doing so, the processes of S52, S53, S54, and S55 shown in FIG. 47 are executed at predetermined timings, and the control to the small hit game state is executed. Further, when the control to the small hit game state is executed, the main CPU 71 executes the process of S56 shown in FIG. 47 at a predetermined timing by setting the control state flag to “04H”. The jackpot game will be executed. When the end condition of the small hit game is satisfied, the processing of S57 and S62 shown in FIG. 47 is executed at a predetermined timing by setting "05H" and "10H" in this order, and the small hit game is performed. It will end.

By the way, in the special symbol control process, as described above, the process is branched according to the status. Further, although not described in detail, the normal symbol control process also branches the process according to the status.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
The subroutine (special symbol memory check process) executed in S52 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG. 48.

First, as shown in FIG. 48, in S71, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag has a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S72. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 does not determine that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 71 terminates this subroutine.

In S72, a process of determining the presence / absence of start memory is performed. Here, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol is stored as the start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 73, and is held for four special symbol games. Information is stored as a start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). Similarly, for the special symbol game of the second special symbol, when the special symbol game of the second special symbol is held four times, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is the main. The information of the four special symbol games stored and held as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the RAM 73 is the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage. It is stored in the area (4) as a start memory. Therefore, it is possible to hold up to 8 times.

In the process of determining the presence / absence of the start memory of S72, when the main CPU 71 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). ) Or when it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S73. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that there is a start memory, the process is transferred to S74.

In S73, a demo display process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 73. Further, the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area in which the random value for hit determination is stored) becomes 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If so, set the value that allows execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the demo display command data when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command data stored in this way is supplied as a demo display command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200. As a result, in the sub-control circuit 200, the demo display is controlled to be displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S74, a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is the earliest hold is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the earliest hold is the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol from the data in the first special symbol start storage area and the data in the second special symbol start storage area. Determine. If it is determined that the earliest hold is not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol, the process is transferred to S75. If it is determined that the earliest hold is the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol, the process is transferred to S76.

In S75, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S77.

In S76, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S77.

In S77, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S78.

In S78, the special symbol storage transfer process is executed. In this process, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 71 displays each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When the special symbol that shifts (stores) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) and is displayed in a variable manner is the second special symbol, the second special symbol Shift (store) each of the data from the symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3). Execute the process to be performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S79. Further, in S78, the main CPU 71 sets a hold subtraction command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The hold subtraction command is supplied to the sub-control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes that the start memory has been subtracted.

In S79, the hit determination process is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 refers to the hit determination table stored in the main ROM 72, is extracted at the time of starting winning, and is first in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Refer to the hit judgment random value of the special symbol start storage area set in and the hit judgment table. Then, when the hit determination random value and the hit determination value match, the main CPU 71 determines that the hit is a big hit or a small hit. That is, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to set the "big hit game state" and whether or not to set the "small hit game state". If it is not a "big hit" or a "small hit", it is determined to be a loss. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines a big hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and determines a small hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, and is neither a big hit nor a small hit. In the case of a loss, that is, in the case of a loss, a process of determining the loss symbol is performed. The details of the special symbol determination process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 selects the main fluctuation time determination table for determining the special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of S80 and the result of the hit determination determined in the process of S79. do. Specifically, if the jackpot is won, the main fluctuation time determination table 2 of FIG. 38 is selected, and otherwise, the main fluctuation time determination table 1 of FIG. 37 is selected. When determining the special symbol variation pattern, the data in the special symbol start storage area (start storage number (holding number)) is referred to, and the starting storage number (holding number) is a predetermined number (three in the first embodiment). In the above case, a fluctuation pattern (for example, "shortening fluctuation A" shown in FIG. 37) associated with a fluctuation time shorter than normal (for example, "normal fluctuation A" shown in FIG. 37) may be determined. be. Further, the main CPU 71 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination random number counter, the effect selection random number value extracted from the effect selection random number counter, and the selected main fluctuation time determination table. It is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 61 based on the data showing such a variation pattern.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol display device 61 is subjected to variable display in the variable pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 as a fluctuation pattern command by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 executes the effect display according to the received fluctuation pattern command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S82.

In S82, the special symbol fluctuation time setting process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the waiting time timer, and executes the process of clearing the storage area used for the variation display this time. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S83.

In S83, the special symbol change frequency monitoring process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 executes a process of updating and storing the number of times (rotational speed) of the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, the main CPU 71 stores and updates the rotation speed counter so as to increase by "1" when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the rotation speed (value of the rotation speed counter) of the special symbol updated and stored by this process is supplied to the sub-control circuit 200 by the special symbol effect start command described later. The value of the rotation speed counter is initialized (cleared to 0) based on the above-mentioned work RAM 203 being cleared. However, the condition for initializing the value of the rotation speed counter (initialization condition) is not limited to this. For example, it may be a condition that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is simply turned on from the power off without clearing the work RAM 203. Further, it may be a condition that the power is turned on after a predetermined time has elapsed since the pachinko gaming machine 1 was turned off. Specifically, the time from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off to when the power is turned on is the first time required for the maintenance work of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, clearing the ball jam) (for example, clearing the ball jam). When a predetermined initialization time (for example, 2 hours) has passed, which is more than 30 minutes) and less than a second time (for example, 11 hours) indicating that the hall (game hall) is closed. , The initialization condition may be satisfied. By adopting such an initialization condition, it may be possible to more accurately count the number of rotations played by a specific player. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S84.

In S84, a process of setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 73 is performed. The special symbol effect start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 starts the effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S85.

Then, in S85, the main CPU 71 executes a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display this time. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Special symbol determination process]
The subroutine (special symbol determination process) executed in S80 of FIG. 48 will be described with reference to FIG. 49.

First, in S91, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit as a result of the hit determination (S79). If it is determined that it is a big hit, the process is transferred to S92. If it is not determined to be a big hit, the process is moved to S97.

In S92, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation state number is (01H). If it is determined that the fluctuation state number is (01H), the process is transferred to S93. If it is not determined that the fluctuation state number is (01H), the process is transferred to S95.

In S93, a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determination random value and the hit determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S94.

In S94, the data set of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the command set of the jackpot symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61.
The special symbol display device 61 fluctuates the first special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies the command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the jackpot stop display mode by the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S95, a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determination random value and the hit determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S96.

In S96, the data set of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and the command set of the jackpot symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61.
The special symbol display device 61 variablely displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies the command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol to the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the jackpot stop display mode by the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S97, when the main CPU 71 determines that the hit is a small hit as a result of the hit determination (S79), the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S98. If it is not determined to be a small hit, the process is transferred to S100.

In S98, a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol according to the random number value extracted from the small hit symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S99. In the first embodiment, only the second special symbol wins the "small hit".

In S99, the data set of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the command set of the small hit symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61.
Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command for the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies the command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. .. As a result, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the small hit stop display mode. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S100, the data set of the lost symbol and the command set of the lost symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 fluctuates the special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the lost symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies the command of the lost symbol from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the loss stop display mode. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
The subroutine (special symbol fluctuation time management process) executed in S53 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in S101, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management, and determines that the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management. If so, the process is transferred to S102, and if it is not determined that the value (01H) indicates the special symbol fluctuation time management, this subroutine is terminated.

In S102, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0", and if it is determined that the waiting time timer is "0", the process is transferred to S103. If it is not determined that the waiting time timer is "0", this subroutine is terminated.

In S103, a process of setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S104.

In S104, a symbol stop command is set. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) symbol stop command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. Then, the symbol stop command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S105.

In S105, after confirmation, a process of setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of storing the waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 73. The waiting time may be about 100 ms. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Special symbol display time management process]
The subroutine (special symbol display time management process) executed in S54 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

First, in S111, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process is shifted to S112. If it is not determined that the control status flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, this subroutine is terminated.

In S112, when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. judge. When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S113. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine is terminated.

In S113, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit.
If it is a big hit, the process is transferred to S119. If it is not a big hit, the process is transferred to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit.
If it is a small hit, the process is transferred to S115. If it is not a small hit, the process is transferred to S124.

In S115, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S116.

In S116, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the small hit in the predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The waiting time may be, for example, 5000 ms. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S117.

In S117, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. This special symbol effect stop command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S118.

In S118, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a small hit start command corresponding to the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this process, the small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the big hit or the small hit start. .. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S119, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S120.

In S120, the main CPU 71 performs a process of turning off (clearing) the time saving flag of the main RAM 73. In the "big hit game state", the "time saving game" is not performed. On the other hand, the counter for the number of consecutive time reductions is not cleared. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S121.

In S121, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the jackpot start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The waiting time may be, for example, 5000 ms. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. This special symbol effect stop command is determined with reference to the open pattern table shown in FIG. 34 (d), and is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, thereby supplying the sub control circuit 200. The sub CPU 201 of the above recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a jackpot start command corresponding to a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this process, the jackpot start command is supplied to the sub-control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the jackpot start. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S124, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (10H) indicating a special symbol game end process in a predetermined area that becomes a control state flag in the main RAM 73.
When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. This special symbol effect stop command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Small hit start interval management process]
The subroutine (small hit start interval management process) executed in S55 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG. 52.
In the following description, the "large winning opening opening number counter" in S133, S134, S144, and S145 is the "large winning opening opening number counter" used at the time of a small hit, and S151, S173, S174, S178, S187, The "large winning opening opening counter" in S203 is a "large winning opening opening counter" used at the time of a big hit.

First, in S131, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process, the process is shifted to S132. If it is not determined that the control status flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process, this subroutine is terminated.

In S132, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit start interval management process is "0", that is, whether or not the small hit start interval time has been exhausted. When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S133. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine is terminated.

In S133, a process is performed in which the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number counter regarding the opening number of the second large winning device 53 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In the first embodiment, this upper limit is limited to 3 (see FIG. 34 (d)). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S134.

In S134, the main CPU 71 adds 1 to the large winning opening opening number counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S135.

In S135, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting an opening / closing pattern for each opening number of times according to the type of the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 according to the opening pattern table shown in FIG. 34 (d). In the first embodiment, the opening time for each opening number is set in the same way. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S136.

In S136, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening display command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 with respect to the second large winning device 53. The large winning opening opening display command data is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 as a large winning opening opening display command under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S137.

In S137, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a small hit medium process to the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S138.

In S138, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the large winning opening winning counter regarding the number of winnings of the second large winning device 53. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S139.

In S139, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer in the predetermined area of the main RAM 73 with respect to the opening time of the second special winning device 53. The waiting time may be, for example, 1200 ms or 1500 ms. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S140.

In S140, the main CPU 71 sets a movable member operating flag indicating whether or not the movable member 57a is activated and is in the open state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 with respect to the operation of the movable member 57a of the V winning opening 57. Perform processing. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Small hit processing]
The subroutine (small hit middle processing) executed in S56 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG. 53.

First, in S141, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a small hit medium process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hit medium processing, the processing is shifted to S142. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating small hit middle processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In S142, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening counter is 4 or more for the second large winning device 53. Here, there is a possibility that four game balls enter and the large winning opening counter counts four or more before the second large winning device 53 is opened four times. That is, as in the case of one round in the case of a big hit, each time the second big winning device 53 is opened once, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening counted by the big winning counter is determined. Differently, for one small hit, the total number of game balls entering the large winning opening counted by the large winning counter is determined regardless of the number of times the second large winning device 53 is opened. When the large winning opening counter is 4 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S148. If the large winning opening counter is not 4 or more, the process is transferred to S143.

In S143, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit middle processing is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer becomes 0 and the opening time or closing time of the second large winning device 53 has ended. When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S144. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S147.

In S144, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the large winning opening opening number upper limit value set in S133. That is, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening counter has reached the number of times of opening the second large winning device 53 set in S133 three times. When the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S148. If the large winning opening opening counter is not equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening count, the process is transferred to S145.

In S145, if this time is closed, the main CPU 71 adds 1 to the large winning opening opening count counter. That is, when the large winning opening opening counter is not equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number, the "small hit game state" is continued, and the closed second large winning device 53 is later opened and again. In order to determine the number of times the second large prize opening device 53 of the large winning opening opening number counter is opened, 1 is added to the large winning opening opening number counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S146.

In S146, the main CPU 71 sets the next open / close mode data and open / close timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. That is, the opening / closing mode data of the second special winning device 53 that is in the open state or the closed state and the opening / closing timer are set here again. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S147.

In S147, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag related to winning the V winning opening 57. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S150. If there is no V winning flag, this subroutine is terminated.

In S148, when the main CPU 71 determines in S142 that the large winning counter is 4 or more for the second large winning device 53, or in S144, the large winning opening opening count counter is set in S133. When it is determined that the number of times of opening is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit middle processing is cleared. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S149.

In S149, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S150. If there is no V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S156.

In S150, the main CPU 71 sets the large winning opening opening process (07H) to the control state flag. That is, in S149, when the main CPU 71 determines that the V winning flag is present, the preparation for the "big hit game" starting from "V hit" is started. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S151.

In S151, a process of setting the large winning opening opening number counter to 2 is performed. As described above, in the "big hit game" that starts from "V hit", the opening of the second big winning device that is entered into the V winning opening 57 is the first round, and then the "big hit game". This is a process that occurs when the opening of the second prize-winning device is the second round. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S152.
In S152, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number counter regarding the first large winning device 54 of the main RAM 73. In this case, the upper limit of the large winning opening opening counter is set to "2" or "16" depending on the content of the small hit that triggered the V hit. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S153.

In S153, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a timer value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 as a start interval time per V. The time may be the same as the interval between rounds, for example, 5000 ms. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S154.

In S154, the main CPU 71 performs a process of turning off the V winning flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S155.

In S155, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a start command per V in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S156, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating post-small hit processing in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S157.

In S157, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a timer value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 as a residual ball monitoring time at the end of a small hit. This time may be, for example, 5000 ms. This process is necessary for confirming that there is no game ball that may enter the V winning opening 57 in the second large winning device 53 after the blade member 53a is closed. be. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Post-processing after small hit]
The subroutine (processing after the end of the small hit) executed in S57 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG. 54.

First, in S161, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating post-small hit processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the processing after the end of the small hit, the processing is shifted to S162. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating post-small hit processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In S162, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the timer for the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the residual monitoring time at the end of the small hit has been exhausted. When the value of the timer is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S164. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. The determination of whether or not there is a V winning flag is performed at this timing, and even if a fraudulent act such as intentionally setting the V winning flag is performed at a timing other than these, the determination of the V winning flag is performed. Not done. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S150 in FIG. 53. If there is no V winning flag, this subroutine is terminated.

In S164, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a small hit command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (10H) indicating a special symbol game end process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Big hit start interval management process]
The subroutine (big hit start interval management process) executed in S58 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the jackpot start interval management process, in S171, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, the process is shifted to S172. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, this subroutine is terminated.

In S172, when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the jackpot start interval management process is “0”. do. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S173, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 71 ends this subroutine.

In S173, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number counter regarding the first large winning device 54 of the main RAM 73. In the first embodiment, since all the "big hit games" by the special symbol are 5 rounds, the upper limit value of the big winning opening opening counter is set to "5". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S174.

In S174, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S175.

In S175, the main CPU 60 refers to the open pattern table of FIG. 34 (d) and performs a process of setting an opening / closing pattern for each round according to the type of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In the first embodiment, the opening / closing pattern is set to be different depending on the type of the jackpot symbol, and as this opening / closing pattern, two patterns of the big winning opening opening time of 27.996 seconds or 0.102 seconds are set. However, the opening and closing patterns according to each round are set in the same way. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S176.

In S176, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) the display command data during the opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a large winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Large winning opening opening process]
The subroutine (large winning opening opening process) executed in S59 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG. 56.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the large winning opening opening process, in S181, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening opening process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, the process is shifted to S182. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, this subroutine is terminated.

In S182, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, it shifts the process to S185, and when it does not determine that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. The process is transferred to S183.

In S183, the large winning opening opening / closing process is performed according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of opening and closing the first large winning device 54 according to the opening / closing pattern for each round set in S175. Specifically, a process of closing and opening the first prize-winning device 54 after waiting for a time is performed according to the opening / closing pattern for each round. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S184.

In S184, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer as the large winning opening opening time timer is “0”. When the main CPU 71 determines that the waiting time timer in the predetermined area functioning as the large winning opening opening time timer in the main RAM 73 is “0”, the process is transferred to S185 and the waiting time timer is “0”. If it is not determined, this subroutine is terminated. That is, when it is determined that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, or when it is determined that the large winning opening opening time timer is "0", the process is transferred to S185 and the large winning opening winning counter If it is not determined that is "10" or more, and if it is not determined that the large winning opening opening time timer is "0", this subroutine is terminated.

In S186, a process of setting the large winning opening closing data is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 based on the data read from the main ROM 72 in order to close the big winning opening. The variable stored in this way closes the first special winning opening solenoid 54b by the process of S43 in FIG. 46. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S187.

In S187, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number. In this process, the main CPU 71 compares the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 73 with the large winning opening opening number upper limit value or more, and the large winning opening opening number counter is the large winning opening opening number upper limit value. It is determined whether or not it is the above. If it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is open is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the process is transferred to S191, and if it is not determined that the number is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of opening of the large winning opening, the process is transferred to S188.

In S188, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer in the main RAM 73 as the interval time between rounds and the remaining ball monitoring time. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S189.

In S189, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (08H) indicating a large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S190.

In S190, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the inter-round display command data in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S191, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as the jackpot end interval time and the remaining time monitoring time in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (09H) indicating the jackpot end interval process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the interval end display command data per special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Large winning opening reopening waiting time management process]
The subroutine (large winning opening reopening waiting time management process) executed in S60 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG. 57.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process, in S201, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (08H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process. Perform the judgment process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (08H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the process is shifted to S202. If it is not determined that the control status flag is a value (08H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process, this subroutine is terminated.

In S202, when the control state flag is a value (08H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process, whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval time between rounds is "0". Is determined. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 moves to the processing of S203, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 71 ends this subroutine.

In S203, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S204.

In S204, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) the display command data during the opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this case, the display command data during the opening of the large winning opening is the data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The large winning opening opening display command data is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a large winning opening opening display command. This large winning opening opening display command includes an instruction to perform the round counter +1 to the sub CPU 201. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a large winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S206.

In S206, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a large winning opening opening time in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Big hit end interval processing]
The subroutine (big hit end interval processing) executed in S61 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG. 58.

First, in S211 the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (09H) indicating the jackpot end interval process.
When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (09H) indicating the jackpot end interval processing, the processing is shifted to S212. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (09H) indicating the jackpot end interval processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In S212, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the hit end interval is "0" when the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (09H) indicating the jackpot end interval processing. do. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0" after the jackpot end interval time is exhausted. Further, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S213 when the value of the waiting time timer is "0", and ends this subroutine when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0".

In S213, the main CPU 71 sets a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game of the main RAM 73 in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving is won. The main CPU 71 shifts the process to S215 when the time reduction is won. If the time reduction is not won, the process is transferred to S219.

In S215, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time reduction continuous counter is 0. When the time saving continuous counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S216. If the time reduction continuous counter is not 0, the process is transferred to S217. The time-saving continuous counter is provided to count the number of "time-saving game states" during the set game. When the time saving continuous counter is 0, for example, it means that it is a "big hit" from the "normal game state", that is, a so-called "first hit", and the "time saving game" has not yet been performed in the set game, and thereafter. , Indicates that the first "time saving game" will be performed.

In S216, the main CPU 71 sets the "time saving game state" and sets the time saving continuous counter to 1. In addition, 0 is set in the time reduction counter. The time reduction counter is for counting the number of "time reduction games", and a maximum of 100 "time reduction games" can be performed in the "time reduction game state". When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S217, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time reduction continuous counter is 4. That is, the "big hit" including the "first hit" is performed four times, and it is determined whether or not it is the third "time saving game state" during the set game. When the time saving continuous counter is 4, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S219. If the time reduction continuous counter is not 4, the process is transferred to S218.

In S218, the main CPU 71 sets the "time saving game state" and adds 1 to the time saving continuous counter. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S219, the main CPU 71 sets the "normal game state". When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Special symbol game end processing]
The subroutine (special symbol game end processing) executed in S62 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG. 59.

First, in S221, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (10H) indicating a special symbol game end process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the processing is transferred to S222. If it is not determined that the control state flag is not a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In S222, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S223. If there is no V winning flag, the process is transferred to S224.

In S223, the V winning flag is turned off. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time reduction counter is 1 or more.
When the time reduction counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S225.
If the time reduction counter is not 1 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S228. Since 0 is set in the time reduction counter in S216 after the "big hit" from the "normal game state", in S224, the time reduction counter counts the number 0 of the "time reduction game", so S228. Move the process to.

In S225, the main CPU 71 adds 1 to the time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time reduction counter is 100 or more. When the main CPU 71 determines that the time reduction counter is 100 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S227. When it is determined that the time reduction counter is not 100 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S228. In S226, for example, if it is determined that the time reduction counter is 100 or more and the "time reduction game" does not reach "V hit" during 100 times, the process is transferred to S227.

In S227, the time reduction counter and the time reduction continuous counter are cleared, and the time reduction flag is turned off (cleared). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S228.

In S228, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check in the main RAM 73 as a control state flag. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[System timer interrupt processing]
The main CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the system timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. The system timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG. 60.

In S231, register save processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S232.

In S232, the timer is updated. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S233.

In S233, a process of setting clear data in the watchdog output data is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the clear data in the watchdog output data. Further, the main CPU 71 transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 75 (see FIG. 33). The initial reset circuit 75 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 msec) determined by the capacity of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 75 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 75 is cleared, the initial reset circuit 75 to the main CPU 71 A system reset signal is output to. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 75, the main CPU 71 is in the system reset state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S234.

In S234, random number update processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating a random number. For example, the main CPU 71 updates random numbers such as a big hit determination random number counter, a reach determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect selection random number counter. If the update timing of the counter value is undefined, the random number counter for jackpot judgment and the random number counter for reach judgment will be unfair. Therefore, in order to secure this, at a fixed timing every 2 msec. I am trying to update.
When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S235.

In S235, the switch input process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an input to the switch. For example, the main CPU 71 includes a count switch 54c and a count switch 53c provided in the first special winning device 54 and the second special winning device 53, general winning ball switches 51a and 52a provided in the general winning openings 51 and 52, and the like. , The passing ball switch 43a provided in the ball passage detector 43, the first starting port winning ball switch 44a and the second starting port winning ball switch 45a provided in the first starting port 44 and the second starting port 45, and the like. By receiving the detection signal from the V winning opening winning ball switch 57c provided in the V winning opening 57, it is determined whether or not each switch has detected the game ball. When the main CPU 71 determines that it has been detected, the main CPU 71 updates the large prize opening prize ball counter, the general winning opening prize ball counter, the starting opening prize ball counter, the V prize ball counter, and the like according to the detection. The details of the switch input process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S236.

In S236, the movable member control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 controls the movable member 57a. The details of this control will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S237.

In S237, register return processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of returning the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Switch input processing]
The switch input process of S235 shown in FIG. 60 will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

In S241, a prize ball-related switch check process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 has received inputs from the count switches 54c and 53c, the general winning ball switches 51a and 52a, the first starting port winning ball switch 44a, and the second starting port winning ball switch 45a, in other words, the game ball. Is detected or not. Then, when the main CPU 71 determines that the count switches 54c and 53c have been input, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening prize ball counter, and the general winning ball switches 51a and 52a are input. When it is determined, the process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening winning ball counter is performed, and when it is determined that the first starting opening winning ball switch 44a and the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a have been input, The process of adding 1 to the value of the starting opening prize ball counter is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S242.

In S242, a special symbol-related switch check process is performed. The special symbol-related switch check process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S243.

In S243, the normal symbol-related switch check process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input of the passing ball switch 43a, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected, and if it is determined that there is an input, the number of reserved balls is an upper limit (for example,). It is determined whether or not the number is 4), and if it is determined that the upper limit is satisfied, this subroutine is terminated.
If it is not determined to be the upper limit, the hit judgment random number value is extracted from the hit judgment random number counter of the normal symbol game, and the hit symbol determination random number value is further extracted from the hit symbol determination random number counter, and the main RAM 73 Performs processing to store in the normal symbol storage area. When this process is completed, when this process is completed, the process is transferred to S244.

In S244, the V switch check process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input of the V winning opening winning ball switch 57c, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected, and if it is determined that there is an input, the V winning flag is set. Perform the process of turning it on. When this process is completed, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is on only at the time of "small hit", and at other times, even if the V winning flag is turned on. , Cleared in the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 58). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S245.

In S245, the abnormality-related switch check process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the abnormality-related switch, for example, whether or not it is detected that the open / close switch of the glass door 11 is opened and the glass door 11 is opened.
Further, for example, it is determined whether or not the signal from the count switch 54c is detected in a state where the signal that the first grand prize device 54 is operating is not transmitted. When an abnormality is detected, processing for notifying the abnormality is performed, and when no abnormality is detected, this subroutine is terminated as it is.

[Special symbol related switch check processing]
The special symbol-related switch check process of S242 shown in FIG. 61 will be described with reference to FIG. 62.

In S251, a process of determining whether or not a start winning prize for the first starting port 44 is detected is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input of the first start port winning ball switch 44a. If it is determined that the input of the first starting port winning ball switch 44a has been input, the process is transferred to S252, and if it is not determined that the input of the first starting port winning ball switch 44a has been input, the processing is transferred to S257.

In S252, a process of determining whether or not the start memory of the first special symbol is 4 or more is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the start memory of the first special symbol, that is, the number of reserved symbols is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of pending items is 4 or more, this subroutine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of pending items is not 4 or more, the process is transferred to S253.

In S253, a process of adding 1 to the start memory of the first special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S254. Further, in S253, the main CPU 71 sets the hold addition command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The hold addition command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes that the first start port has been won and the start memory has been added. Will be.

In S254, various random value acquisition processes are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts the jackpot determination random number value of the special symbol game from the jackpot determination random number counter (so-called special symbol lottery), and further extracts the reach determination random number value from the reach determination random number counter. , The process of extracting the effect selection random number value from the effect selection random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 73 is performed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is the first special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) -The first special symbol start storage area (4) is stored in order. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S255.

In S255, the winning effect determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S256.

In S256, the main CPU 71 sets the first start opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The first start opening winning command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 200 determines that the first starting opening has been won and whether the lottery result is correct or not. Become aware. The data of the first start opening winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, changing the display mode of the holding ball to be displayed, when it is determined in the process of S255 that the winning effect is to be produced. .. This enables a so-called "look-ahead effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory information before the variable execution. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S257, a process of determining whether or not a start winning prize for the second starting port 45 is detected is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input of the second start opening winning ball switch 45a. If it is determined that the input of the second start opening winning ball switch 45a has been input, the process is transferred to S258, and if it is not determined that the input of the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a has been input, this subroutine is terminated.

In S258, a process of determining whether or not the start memory of the second special symbol is 4 or more is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the start memory of the second special symbol, that is, the number of reserved symbols is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of pending items is 4 or more, this subroutine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of pending items is not 4 or more, the process is moved to S259.

In S259, a process of adding 1 to the start memory of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S260. Further, in S259, the main CPU 71 sets the hold addition command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The hold addition command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes that the second start opening has been won and the start memory has been added. Will be.

In S260, various random value acquisition processes are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts the jackpot determination random number of the special symbol game from the jackpot determination random number counter (so-called special symbol lottery), and further extracts the reach determination random number value from the reach determination random number counter. , The process of extracting the effect selection random number value from the effect selection random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 73 is performed. In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is the second special symbol start storage area (0). The judgment result based on the big hit judgment random number stored in is derived and displayed by the special symbol, and the various random number values acquired by winning the start prize during the fluctuation of the special symbol are the second special symbol start storage area (1) to. It is sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (4). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S261.

In S261, the winning effect determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect. When it is determined that the winning effect is to be produced, the winning effect command data for executing the winning effect, for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved ball to be displayed is stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The winning effect command data is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 as a winning effect command under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the content of the winning effect. This enables a so-called "look-ahead effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory information before the variable execution. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 71 sets the second start opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The second start opening winning command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 200 determines that the second starting opening has been won and whether the lottery result is correct or not. Become aware. The data of the second start opening winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, changing the display mode of the holding ball to be displayed, when it is determined in the process of S261 that the winning effect is to be produced. .. This enables a so-called "look-ahead effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory information before the variable execution. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, various commands set in the main RAM 73 of the main control circuit 70 are supplied to the sub control circuit 200 in each process of the main control circuit 70.

[Movable member control process]
The movable member control process of S236 shown in FIG. 60 will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

First, in S271, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a small hit medium process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hit medium processing, the processing is shifted to S272. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hit medium processing, the processing is shifted to S274.

In S272, a process of determining whether or not there is a moving flag indicating that the movable member 57a is operating is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 terminates this subroutine when it is determined that there is a moving flag, and shifts the process to S273 when it is determined that there is no moving flag.

In S273, the movable member 57a is started to operate, and a process of turning on the moving flag is performed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S274, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating post-small hit processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the processing after the end of the small hit, the processing is shifted to S275. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating post-small hit processing, the processing is transferred to S277.

In S275, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 0. When the main CPU 71 determines that the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S276. If it is determined that the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is not 0, this subroutine is terminated. In the first embodiment, the residual ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 5000 msec, and the "V winning" is effective until 5000 msec elapses, so that the movable member can also move.

In S276, the main CPU 71 stops the operation of the movable member 57a and turns off the moving flag. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. In the first embodiment, when the remaining ball monitoring time of 5000 msec at the end of the small hit elapses, the moving flag is turned off and the "small hit game state" ends.

In S277, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating a large winning opening opening process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, the process is shifted to S278. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, this subroutine is terminated.

In S278, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a moving flag. In this process, the main CPU 71 terminates this subroutine when it is determined that there is no moving flag, and shifts the process to S279 when it is determined that there is a moving flag. If the "small hit" is "V winning", the moving flag is on, so the process is moved to S279, and if it is just a "big hit", this subroutine is terminated.

In S279, the main CPU 71 stops the operation of the movable member 57a and performs a process of turning off the moving flag. That is, in the "big hit game", the movable member 57a does not need to operate. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 88, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described.

[Sub-control main processing]
The sub-control main process will be described with reference to FIG. 64. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands from the main control circuit 70 and performs various processes such as display processing. Among these processes, the control process according to the present invention will be described below.

In S1011, the initialization process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of initializing and setting according to the power-on. For example, turn on the power ON flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1012. This initialization process can also be performed according to the on / off operation of the power supply.

In S1012, random number update processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the random numbers stored in the work RAM 203. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1013.

In S1013, command analysis processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 70 and stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 210. This process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1014.

In S1014, the effect control process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect control of the mini game using the effect button 23 and the like. Further, the look-ahead hold effect control or the like related to the hold ball may be executed by the so-called look-ahead effect described above. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1014.

In S1015, display control processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying on the liquid crystal display device 13 to the display control circuit 205.
In the display control circuit 205, the VDP (not shown) has various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and effect image data based on the data for displaying the effect image under the control of the sub CPU 201. Is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1016.

In S1016, control processing such as sound and lamp is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 executes a voice control process for controlling the sound generated from the speaker 11 and a lamp control process for controlling the light emission of various lamps (not shown). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to the random number update process (S1012) again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even in the state in which the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 64 is being executed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the timer interrupt process may be executed. The timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG. 65.

In S1021, a process of saving the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1022.

In S1022, the timer update process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the timer stored in the work RAM 210. Specifically, a process of updating a timer such as a round effect is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1023.

In S1023, the effect button switch input detection process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of detecting the presence / absence of input of the effect button switch 23a by operating the effect button 23. For example, the operation of the effect button 23 for selecting a character during the jackpot game is detected. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1024. Although this effect button switch input detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process, other interrupts may be used. The navigation lottery pattern may be changed depending on the selected character. For example, the average number of navigation provided may be changed depending on the character selected.

In S1024, a process of restoring the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of returning the value saved in S1021 to each register. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even in the state in which the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 64 is being executed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the command interrupt process may be executed. The command interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG. 66.

In S1031, a process of saving the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1032.

In S1032, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing the received command in the buffer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1033.

In S1033, the process of restoring the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of returning the value saved in S1031 to each register. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Command analysis processing]
The subroutine (command analysis process) executed in S1013 of FIG. 64 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68.

In S1035, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is stored in a predetermined buffer, and if it determines that there is a receive command, the process is transferred to S1036 and the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a receive command. If not, the process is transferred to S1059.

In S1036, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a command at the time of initialization (initialization command). In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that it is an initialization command, it transfers the process to S1037, and if it does not determine that it is an initialization command, it transfers the process to S1038.

In S1037, the sub CPU 201 performs the initialization command reception processing. The initialization command includes data indicating that the main RAM 73 and the like have been initialized by the control of the main CPU 71. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1059.

In S1038, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is the first start opening winning command. In this process, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1039 when it determines that it is the first start opening winning command, and shifts the process to S1040 when it does not determine that it is the first starting opening winning command. When the received command is the second start opening winning command, the same processing may be performed.

In S1039, the sub CPU 201 performs a process at the time of receiving the first start opening winning command. The first start opening winning command includes data regarding the fact that there was a first starting opening winning, whether or not the lottery result was successful, whether or not the winning effect was executed, and the fluctuation pattern. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1059.

In S1040, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a special symbol effect start command. In this process, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1041 when it determines that it is a special symbol effect start command, and shifts the process to S1042 when it does not determine that it is a special symbol effect start command.

In S1041, the sub CPU 201 performs processing at the time of receiving the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol production start command includes data related to the game state, fluctuation pattern, special symbol, number of remaining time reductions, so-called navigation lottery, and the like. The details of this process will be described later.
When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1059.

In S1042, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a symbol stop command. If it is determined that it is a symbol stop command, the process is transferred to S1043, and if it is not determined that it is a symbol effect stop command, the process is transferred to S1044.

In S1043, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when a symbol stop command is received. For example, processing such as stopping the decorative symbol in synchronization with the stop of the special symbol under the control of the main control circuit 70 is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1059.

In S1044, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a jackpot start command. If it is determined that it is a jackpot start command, the process is transferred to S1045, and if it is not determined that it is a jackpot start command, the process is transferred to S1046.

In S1045, the sub CPU 201 performs a process at the time of receiving the jackpot start command. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1059.

In S1045, for example, in response to a jackpot start command, a mini-game or the like accompanied by an operation of the effect button 23 by the player is executed before the "big hit game" is started. Details will be described later.

In S1046, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a small hit start command. If it is determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process is transferred to S1047, and if it is not determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process is transferred to S1048.

In S1047, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when a small hit start command is received. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1059.

In S1048, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a start command per V. If it is determined that the command is a start command per V, the process is transferred to S1049, and if it is not determined that the command is a start command per V, the process is transferred to S1050.

In S1049, the sub CPU 201 performs a process at the time of receiving the start command per V. In S1049, for example, a navigation subtraction process is performed by executing the navigation. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1059.

In S1050, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a small hit end command. If it is determined that it is a small hit end command, the process is transferred to S1051, and if it is not determined that it is a small hit end command, the process is transferred to S1052.

In S1051, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when a small hit end command is received. In S1051, for example, when the navigation effect is executed, the effect is performed according to whether or not the result is "per V". The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1059.

In S1052, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a large winning opening opening display command. If it is determined that the command is for opening the large winning opening, the process is transferred to S1053, and if it is not determined that the command is for displaying the opening of the large winning opening, the processing is transferred to S1054.

In S1053, the sub CPU 201 performs a process at the time of receiving the display command during the opening of the large winning opening. In S1053, for example, a process of displaying the result of the mini game displayed in S1045 is performed. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1059.

In S1054, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is an inter-round display command. If it is determined that the command is an inter-round display command, the process is transferred to S1055, and if it is not determined that the command is an inter-round display command, the process is transferred to S1056.

In S1055, the sub CPU 201 performs inter-round display command reception processing. The inter-round display command includes data related to inter-round effects and the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1059.

In S1056, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a special symbol per interval end display command. If it is determined that the command is the interval end display command per special symbol, the process is transferred to S1057, and if it is not determined that the command is the interval end display command per special symbol, the process is transferred to S1058.

In S1057, the sub CPU 201 performs processing at the time of receiving the special symbol per interval end display command. In S1057, when the "time saving game state" in the set game reaches a predetermined number of times, a process such as performing a so-called navigation lottery is performed. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1059.

In S1058, the sub CPU 201 performs processing at the time of receiving other commands. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1059.

In S1059, the sub CPU 201 performs a penalty check process. In S1059, for example, regarding the navigation lottery and the transition lottery of each high probability state, it is determined based on various factors that the unintended lottery may have been executed due to the intervention of fraudulent acts or the occurrence of a defect. do. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Processing when initialization command is received]
The subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the initialization command) executed in S1037 of FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG. 69.

In S1401, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of initializing the gaming state. Specifically, if the gaming state is the "first high probability state", the first high probability state flag is turned off, the number of games during the first high probability is cleared, and the gaming state is changed to the "normal gaming state (sub). ) ”. If the gaming state is the "second high probability state", the second high probability state flag is turned off, the number of games during the second high probability is cleared, and the gaming state is changed to the "normal gaming state (sub)". Migrate. If the gaming state is the "third high probability state", the third high probability state flag is turned off and the gaming state is shifted to the "normal gaming state (sub)". If the gaming state is the "fourth high probability state", the fourth high probability state flag is turned off and the gaming state is shifted to the "normal gaming state (sub)". In addition, the values of various counters such as the value of the game count counter indicating the number of games used in the ceiling lottery and the value of the point counter that cumulatively stores the added points are cleared. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1402.

In S1402, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting an initial mode as a mode. The initial mode set in this process will continue until the first "big hit" in the "normal game state". When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Processing when receiving the 1st start opening winning command]
The subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the first start opening winning command) executed in S1039 of FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

In S1405, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the winning effect. That is, the sub CPU 201 changes the display mode of the holding ball in which the determination result of the winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 62 and S255) of the main CPU 71 is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, so-called “look-ahead effect”. It is determined whether or not the winning effect related to "" is executed. However, the sub CPU 201 may decide whether or not to execute such a winning effect based on the data related to the fluctuation pattern or the like transmitted from the main CPU 71. In this process, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1406 when it determines that the winning effect is to be executed, and ends this subroutine when it determines that the winning effect is not executed.

In S1406, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery result is lost. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern commands are "83H00H" to "83H06H", "83H43H", and "83H44H". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is lost, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1408, and when it does not determine that the lottery result is lost, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1407.

In S1407, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a hit look-ahead effect pattern according to a fluctuation pattern or the like. That is, when the lottery result is a hit, the sub CPU 201 determines the hit look-ahead effect pattern based on the fluctuation pattern, the number of start memories, and the like. It should be noted that one hit look-ahead effect pattern may be determined by lottery from a plurality of hit look-ahead effect patterns. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

For example, in the sub CPU 201, when the variation pattern command is "83H17H" (effect content "hit super reach A") and the start memory number is "2", the sub CPU 201 is the first based on the determined hit look-ahead effect pattern. In the game in which the start winning to the 1 start port 44 is detected, the corresponding reserved ball is changed to green after 2 games, and the corresponding reserved ball is changed from green to red after 1 game in the next game.
Further, for example, when the variation pattern command is "83H17H" (effect content "hit super reach A") and the start memory number is "4", the sub CPU 201 is based on the determined hit look-ahead effect pattern. , In the game in which the start winning to the first starting port 44 is detected, the corresponding reserved ball is changed to blue after 4 games, and in the next game, the corresponding reserved ball is changed from blue to yellow after 3 games, and then In the game, the corresponding reserved ball is changed from yellow to green after two games, and in the next game, the corresponding reserved ball is changed from green to red after one game. In this way, it is decided in advance that the game of several games ahead has a high expectation of a big hit.

In S1408, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is "special normal fluctuation". That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is "83H44H". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the fluctuation pattern is a special normal fluctuation, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1409, and when it does not determine that the fluctuation pattern is the special normal fluctuation, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1410.

In S1409, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a special loss look-ahead effect pattern. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. Here, the special loss look-ahead effect pattern is an effect pattern for executing a look-ahead effect having a higher degree of expectation than the normal loss look-ahead effect pattern described later. As described above, the fluctuation pattern "special normal fluctuation" is a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation of giving points even if the lottery result is lost (see FIG. 41). Therefore, by determining the special loss look-ahead effect pattern, the display of the holding ball displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is displayed not only when the lottery result is a hit but also when points are given. The expectation is to be notified depending on the mode.

For example, the sub CPU 201 responds after two games in a game in which a start winning prize to the first start port 44 is detected based on the determined special loss look-ahead effect pattern when the start memory number is “2”. The holding ball is changed to green, and in the next game, the corresponding holding ball is changed from green to red after one game.
Further, for example, in the game in which the start winning prize to the first start port 44 is detected based on the determined special loss look-ahead effect pattern when the start memory number is "4", the sub CPU 201 is used after 4 games. The corresponding holding ball is changed to blue, the corresponding holding ball is changed from blue to yellow after 3 games in the next game, the corresponding holding ball is changed from yellow to green after 2 games in the next game, and the next game In, the corresponding holding ball is changed from green to red after one game. In this way, it is determined in advance that the game several games ahead has a high expectation of big hits or points.

In S1410, the sub CPU 201 normally performs a process of determining a loss look-ahead effect pattern. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. Here, the normal loss look-ahead effect pattern is an effect pattern for executing a look-ahead effect having a lower expectation (for example, a relatively small change in the holding ball) than the above-mentioned special loss look-ahead effect pattern. ..

For example, in the sub CPU 201, when the variation pattern command is "83H01H" (effect content "normal variation B") and the start memory number is "2", the sub CPU 201 is the first based on the determined normal loss look-ahead effect pattern. In the game in which the start winning to the start port 44 is detected, the corresponding reserved ball is changed to blue after two games, and the corresponding reserved ball is maintained in blue after one game in the next game.
Further, for example, in the sub CPU 201, when the fluctuation pattern command is "83H01H" (effect content "normal fluctuation B") and the start storage number is "4", the start winning prize to the first start port 44 is detected. In the previous game, the corresponding reserved ball is changed to blue after 4 games, in the next game, the corresponding reserved ball is maintained in blue after 3 games, and in the next game, the corresponding reserved ball is changed from blue to yellow. In the next game, the corresponding reserved ball remains yellow after one game.

In the first embodiment, the special loss look-ahead effect pattern may be configured in the same manner as the hit look-ahead effect pattern, or at least a part thereof may be configured to be different. For example, the sub CPU 201 responds after four games in a game in which a start winning prize to the first start port 44 is detected based on the determined special loss look-ahead effect pattern when the start memory number is “4”. The holding ball is changed to blue, the corresponding holding ball is changed from blue to yellow after 3 games in the next game, the corresponding holding ball is changed from yellow to green after 2 games in the next game, and the corresponding holding ball is changed from yellow to green in the next game. After one game, the corresponding reserved ball is changed from green to the letter "P" suggesting the awarding of points. By performing such a "look-ahead effect", until the middle of the change of the reserved ball, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of a big hit and point award, and to recognize that it is a notification about the point award at a certain point. Can be done.

Further, the special loss look-ahead effect pattern may be determined according to the number of points to be added. For example, when the fluctuation pattern command is "83H44H", when a plurality of addition points can be determined, and when there are many addition points, a special loss look-ahead effect pattern in which the reserved ball changes to red is determined and added. When the number of points is small, a special loss look-ahead effect pattern in which the reserved ball changes only to yellow may be determined.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, not only when the lottery result (result of winning determination) is a hit, but also when the lottery result (result of winning determination) is lost. When the fluctuation pattern is "83H44H" (“special normal fluctuation” as the effect content), which is highly expected to give points, the look-ahead effect with high expectation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the look-ahead effect, and even if the look-ahead effect is executed when the actual lottery result is lost, it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the awarding of points. Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of expectation regarding the awarding of points without deteriorating the interest.

Further, in the first embodiment, a plurality of types of changing modes are provided as changing modes for changing the display mode of the holding ball, and the changing modes have a predetermined probability according to the type of the determined look-ahead effect pattern. It may be decided by.
For example, as described above, the "color change mode" (first change mode) in which the "color" which is the first element of the display mode of the reserved sphere is changed, and the second display mode of the hold sphere. A "shape change mode" (second change mode) that changes the element "form" (for example, a mode in which the display mode of a holding ball, which is normally circular, is changed to the above-mentioned letter "P", or In addition, a "combination change mode" that changes both the "treasure box" and "character" shapes) and the first element "color" and the second element "form" (first) 3 change mode) and a "non-change mode" (fourth change mode) that does not change the display mode of the reserved ball, and a hit look-ahead effect pattern or a normal loss look-ahead effect pattern is determined. In the case, the first to fourth change modes and the stage of the change (for example, in the case of the "color change mode", how many colors are changed) can be determined, and the special loss look-ahead effect pattern is determined. In some cases, it may be possible to determine the second change mode and the stage of the change (for example, in the case of the "shape change mode", in what game the shape is changed or to what shape). ..

In this case, if the lottery result is a win and no points are given, the second change mode is determined with a predetermined probability as the win look-ahead effect pattern. In this second change mode, for example, After changing the display mode of the reserved ball to a "treasure box", the "treasure box" may be opened and a notification suggesting that the lottery result is a hit (notification of the degree of expectation regarding the hit) may be performed. Further, when the lottery result is a win and points are also given, the third change mode is determined with high probability as the pre-reading effect pattern for winning, and in this third change mode, for example, While gradually changing the display mode of the holding ball from blue to red and changing the display mode of the holding ball to the letter "P" at a predetermined stage, the "color" and "form" of the letter are gradually changed. By changing to (for example, increasing the size of the character step by step), not only the notification suggesting that the lottery result is a hit (notification of the degree of expectation regarding the win) but also points will be given. It suffices that the suggestion notification (notification of the degree of expectation regarding the awarding of points) is performed.

Further, in this case, the lottery result is lost and the fluctuation pattern "special normal fluctuation" is not determined, but when points are given, the second change mode is high as the normal loss look-ahead effect pattern. In this second change mode, for example, after changing the display mode of the reserved ball to a "treasure box", the notification suggesting that the "treasure box" is opened and points are given. (Notification of the degree of expectation regarding the awarding of points) may be performed.
Alternatively, as described above, it is suggested that points are given by gradually changing the "color" and "form" of the character while changing the display mode of the holding ball to the character "P". Notification (notification of the degree of expectation regarding point award) may be performed.

Further, in this case, if the lottery result is lost and the fluctuation pattern "special normal fluctuation" is determined, the second change mode is always determined as the special loss look-ahead effect pattern. In the second change mode, the notification suggesting that the above-mentioned points are given (notification of the degree of expectation regarding the point giving) may be performed.

In this way, even if the lottery result is lost, when the pre-reading effect according to the second change mode is executed, it is suggested that the awarding of points, which is a desirable game result for the player, is determined. Can be done. Further, even if the lottery result is a hit, the pre-reading effect according to the second change mode may be executed. Therefore, even if the pre-reading effect according to the second change mode is executed, the lottery result is lost. It is not certain that it is. That is, when the pre-reading effect according to the second change mode is executed, it can be suggested that the "big hit", which is a more desirable game result for the player, may have been determined. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect according to the second change mode is executed, the player is very interested in the changed content of the pre-reading effect, so that the interest in the pre-reading effect can be improved.

Further, when the pre-reading effect according to the third change mode is executed, it can be suggested that the point awarding, which is a desired game result for the player, has been determined, and further, the desired game result for the player. It can also be suggested that the "big hit" may have been decided. Here, the status of giving points in a game in which the lottery result is a win affects the content of the game in the future (for example, when the current point is 90, if 10 points or more are added, it will be 100 points or more. Therefore, a predetermined privilege (for example, all navigation) is given, but if less than 10 points are added, the predetermined privilege (for example, all navigation) is not given) (FIGS. 72 to 74 and FIGS. (Refer to 76) Therefore, the player performs the effect from the execution of the look-ahead effect according to the third variation mode to the execution of the effect in the game corresponding to the reserved ball that is the target of the look-ahead effect. Since you will be very interested in the content, you can improve the interest in the production.

[Processing when receiving a special symbol production start command]
The subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the special symbol effect start command) executed in S1041 of FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

In S1061, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time saving gaming state". The "normal game state" is a "normal game state (sub) other than the" first high probability state "," second high probability state "," third high probability state ", and" fourth high probability state ". ) ”. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time saving gaming state", the process is transferred to S1062. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time saving gaming state", the process is transferred to S1063.

In S1062, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect during the "normal game state" or the "time saving game state". The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1063, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is the "first high probability state". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the "first high probability state", the process is transferred to S1064. That is, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the first high probability state flag is turned on, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1064. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the "first high probability state", the process is transferred to S1065.

In S1064, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect during the first high probability state. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1065, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is the "second high probability state". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the "second high probability state", the process is transferred to S1066. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the "second high probability state", the process is transferred to S1067.

In S1066, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect during the second high probability state. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1067, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is the "third high probability state". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the "third high probability state", the process is transferred to S1068. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the "third high probability state", the process is transferred to S1069.

In S1068, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect during the third high probability state. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1069, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect during the fourth high probability state. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Normal game state (sub) medium / time saving effect determination process]
The subroutine (normal game state (sub) middle / time saving effect determination process) executed in S1062 of FIG. 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. The "normal game state" is a "normal game state (sub) other than the" first high probability state "," second high probability state "," third high probability state ", and" fourth high probability state ". ) ”.

In S1071, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, when the fluctuation pattern commands are "83H00H" to "83H06H", "83H43H", and "83H44H", it is a loss. Of these, the fluctuation pattern commands "83H02H" to "83H04H" are lost reach. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is lost, the process is transferred to S1072. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is lost, the process is transferred to S1084.

In S1072, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the stop symbol and the effect content based on the variation pattern command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1073.

In S1073, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the point addition effect is executed as described above using FIG. 41. If it is determined that the sub CPU 201 executes the point addition effect, the process is transferred to S1074. If it is not determined that the sub CPU 201 executes the point addition effect, the process is transferred to S1077.

In S1074, the sub CPU 201 adds points to a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1075.

In S1075, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the accumulated points are 100 points or more. The sub CPU 201 confirms and determines the points accumulated in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the points are 100 points or more, the process is transferred to S1076. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the points are 100 points or more, the process is transferred to S1077.

In S1076, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability flag and clears the accumulated points. Therefore, when the next game is performed, the state shifts to the "first high probability state". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1077.

In S1077, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the navigation acquisition effect. If it is determined that the sub CPU 201 executes the navigation acquisition effect, the process is transferred to S1078. If it is not determined that the sub CPU 201 executes the navigation acquisition effect, the process is transferred to S1079. Here, as described above, when the loss super reach B of the navigation acquisition effect content shown in FIG. 37 is selected, a lottery is performed in which the navigation is given with a probability of 1/10 in the "first high probability state". Therefore, when the loss super reach B is selected and it is determined that the navigation is to be given, it is determined in S1077 that the sub CPU 201 executes the navigation acquisition effect.

In S1078, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of navigation times (pieces) stored in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203 to set the navigation acquisition effect. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1079.

In S1079, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the game count counter. The game count counter counts the number of times (the number of special symbol games) that the variable display of the special symbol is executed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1080.

In S1080, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of special symbol games counted as the reference for executing the ceiling lottery is the number of games for which a predetermined ceiling lottery is performed as shown in FIG. 39. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of special symbol games is the number of times the ceiling lottery is performed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1081. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of special symbol games is the number of times the ceiling lottery is performed, the subroutine is terminated.

In S1081, the sub CPU 201 executes the ceiling lottery process. Specifically, the ceiling lottery is executed based on the ceiling lottery table shown in FIG. 39. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1082.

In S1082, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling lottery executed in S1081 has been won. If it is determined that the sub CPU 201 has won the ceiling lottery, the process is transferred to S1083. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the ceiling lottery has been won, the subroutine is terminated.

In S1083, the sub CPU 201 sets the third high probability state flag and clears the number of special symbol games counted as the reference for executing the ceiling lottery. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1084, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is a "small hit".
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, when the fluctuation pattern command is "83H07H" to "83H14H", it is a "small hit". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a "small hit", the process is transferred to S1085. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a "small hit", the process is transferred to S1094.

In S1085, it is determined whether or not the sub CPU 201 is in the time saving (“time saving game state”). When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is in the "time saving game state", the process is transferred to S1087. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is in the "time saving game state", the process is transferred to S1086.

In S1086, the sub CPU 201 sets a special effect. In this case, since the player has won the "small hit" even though he / she is not in the "short-time game state", the so-called revival effect described above may be performed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1087, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the navigation suppression flag is off and the number of stored navigations is 1 or more. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the navigation suppression flag is off and the number of stored navigations is 1 or more, the process is transferred to S1089. If the navigation suppression flag is off and the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of stored navigations is 1 or more, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1088.

Here, the navigation suppression flag is a flag that is set when there is a possibility that the player is performing a so-called "capture strike". Specifically, as described above, the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 when entering the second large winning device 53 is about 2/3. Further, in the first embodiment, the nails are arranged so that the winning rate to the second large winning device 53 is about 1/3 if it is a normal right-handed hit, and the probability of "per V" is about. It is 1 / 4.5. Therefore, it can be said that the degree of expectation of "per V" while the "time saving game" is performed 50 times is 99.9%. Some skilled players perform a "capture strike" in which the launch handle 25 is operated so that the second large winning device 53 does not win the game ball and the second starting port 45 wins the game ball. There is. By this "capture hit", it is possible to obtain a prize ball for winning the ball passage detector 43 and increase the number of game balls on hand. In order to suppress such a strategy, the navigation suppression flag is set when the 50th or later "short-time game" is performed. If the navigation suppression flag is set, the navigation may be suppressed by preventing the navigation from being executed or by subtracting the number of navigations even when the navigation is given. In addition, instead of navigating, it may be possible to perform an effect that encourages the user to stop the "capture strike".

In S1088, the sub CPU 201 sets the corresponding effect when there is no navigation system. As an effect corresponding to the case where there is no navigation, for example, a common effect different from the navigation may be stored in the program ROM 202. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1089, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving game is 50 times. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the time saving game is 50 times, the process is transferred to S1090.
If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the time saving game is 50 times, the process is transferred to S1091. Here, since it is extremely unlikely that the "capture strike" as described above is not performed and the "time saving game" elapses 50 times, the above determination is made in S1089. In addition, even if you are not an expert, you won the special figure type small hit (2) -3 or small hit (2) -4 in succession while the navigation is given, so "V hit" 50 times or more. In this case, in order to avoid ending the "time saving game state" without "hit V", if you have not "hit V" more than 50 times, suppress the navigation. There is. At this time, it is determined whether the navigation is granted, and the number of winnings of the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2 during that period is confirmed. For example, the number of winnings is 10 or less. In that case, it may be determined that the "V hit" was not obtained even though the shot was fired according to the navigation instead of the capture strike, and the penalty at the time of the capture strike judgment may not be given. Here, as a penalty, for example, all the accumulated navigation times may be deleted. It should be noted that this determination criterion may be arbitrarily designed. On the contrary, if the number of winnings of the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2 is more than 10 times, it is judged that the capture is being performed and a penalty is given. good.

In S1090, the sub CPU 201 sets the navigation suppression flag, and sets the corresponding effect when there is no navigation. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1091, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is small hit (2) -1 or small hit (2) -2. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is small hit (2) -1 or small hit (2) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1092. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is small hit (2) -1 or small hit (2) -2, the process is transferred to S1093.

In S1092, the sub CPU 201 sets the launch navigation effect. The launch navigation effect is an effect that encourages the player to launch a game ball. The content of this effect will be described later (see FIG. 89). In addition, when this launch navigation effect is performed, if it is "per V", the number of counted navigations will be subtracted. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1093, the sub CPU 201 sets the launch suppression navigation effect. The launch suppression navigation effect is an effect that causes the player to suppress the launch of the game ball. The content of this effect will also be described later (see FIG. 90). When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1094, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (2) -1. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (2) -1, the process shifts to S1095. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is the special figure (2) -1, the process is transferred to S1096.

In S1095, the sub CPU 201 sets the effect depending on whether or not it is in the "time saving game state". For example, if it is not in the "short-time game state", a so-called revival effect may be set. In addition, if it is in the "short-time game state", a special effect other than the revival effect may be set.
When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1096, it is determined whether or not the sub CPU 201 is in the time saving (“time saving game state”). Specifically, when the sub CPU 201 determines that it is in the "time saving game state", the process is transferred to S1097. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is in the "time saving game state", the process is transferred to S1098.

In S1097, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect whose special figure type corresponds to the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -12. In this effect, as shown in FIG. 38, the fluctuation pattern commands correspond to "83H29H" to "83H40H". Since this effect is related to a big hit during a short time, it may be an effect that shows that it is irregular. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1098, the sub CPU 201 performs a mode transition lottery process. Specifically, a lottery for setting the low mode or the high mode is executed based on the mode lottery table shown in FIG. 40 (a). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1099.

In S1099, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -1. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is "83H15H". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -1, the process is transferred to S1100. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -1, the process is transferred to S1101.

In S1100, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is "777", adds 3 to the number of navigations, and sets the premier reach effect. In the first embodiment, 3 is added to the number of navigations, but for example, all navigation flags may be set. In the set game, it is also possible to turn off the navigation flag until the "short-time game" reaches a predetermined number of times so that the number of times of navigation does not increase more than necessary. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1101, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is the special figure (1) -2. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is "83H16H" to "83H18H". That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "time reduction with balls". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1102. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1103.

In S1102, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach content and the decorative pattern by lottery in response to the variation pattern command, and sets the effect. With reference to the jackpot navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 43, the jackpot navigation lottery is performed according to the character selected by the player. The timing of this navigation lottery will be described later. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1103, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern commands are "83H19H" to "83H23H" and "83H45H". That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "time reduction without payout". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the process is transferred to S1104. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the process is transferred to S1110.

In S1104, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the determined effect content is the "advance notice effect". That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is the special figure (1) -3 and the variation pattern command is "83H45H". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the determined effect content is the "advance notice effect", the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1105. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the determined effect content is the "advance notice effect", the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1109.

In S1105, the sub CPU 201 adds points to a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1106. As described above with reference to FIG. 41, when the fluctuation pattern command is "83H45H", points are always added. However, even when the fluctuation pattern command is "83H45H", points may not be added. In this case, it may be determined separately whether or not the sub CPU 201 executes the point addition.

In S1106, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the accumulated points are 100 points or more. The sub CPU 201 confirms and determines the points accumulated in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the points are 100 points or more, the process is transferred to S1107. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the points are 100 points or more, the process is transferred to S1108.

In S1107, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, determines a decorative pattern by lottery, and performs a process of setting a premier advance notice effect. Here, in the premier advance notice effect, for example, an effect indicating that the lottery result is a "big hit" is executed (advance notice) at the initial stage of the variable display of the symbol (identification symbol, decorative symbol), and the symbol (advance notice) is executed. An effect suggesting how many points will be added from the current points during the fluctuation of the identification symbol (identification symbol, decorative symbol) was executed, and the number of points reached 100 points or more by the end of the variation display of the symbol (identification symbol, decorative symbol). This is a series of effects in which the effect of notifying that all the navigations described later is performed in the set game after the end of the "big hit game state" is executed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1108, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a normal advance notification effect according to the number of points. Here, in the normal advance notice effect, for example, an effect indicating that the lottery result is a "big hit" is executed (advance notice) at the initial stage of the variable display of the symbol (identification symbol, decorative symbol), and the symbol (advance notice) is executed. During the fluctuation of the identification symbol (identification symbol, decorative symbol), an effect suggesting how many points will be added from the current points is executed, and the number of points does not reach 100 points or more by the end of the variation display of the symbol (identification symbol, decorative symbol). This is a series of effects in which the effect of notifying the fact is executed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the accumulated points are less than a specific number (for example, 100 points), the lottery result becomes a specific "big hit". Therefore, when a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, advance notice effect) is determined, it is determined whether or not to award more points in the game, and the number of points including the awarded points is a specific number or more. If the number of points exceeds a specific number, the player is given a predetermined privilege (for example, all navigation). Therefore, even if the lottery result is a "big hit" when the number of points is less than a specific number, there is a sense of expectation regarding the awarding of points without degrading the interest (as a result, the shift to all navigation awarding). (Expectation) can be embraced.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, advance notice effect) is determined, a series of series such as the above-mentioned premier advance notice effect or normal advance notice effect. It is supposed to be directed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in giving points depending on the content of the effect when the lottery result is a "big hit".

In S1109, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach content and the decorative pattern by lottery in response to the variation pattern command, and sets the effect. For example, an effect for notifying that the player is in a "short-time game state" is set at any timing. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1110, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -11. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is "83H24H" to "83H27H". That is, it is determined whether or not it is a "normal without payout" jackpot. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -8 to the special figure (1) -11, the process shifts to S1111. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -8 to the special figure (1) -11, that is, when it determines that the special figure (1) -12, the sub CPU 201 is set to S1112. Move the process.

In S1111, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach content and the decorative pattern by lottery in response to the variation pattern command, and sets the effect. Further, the first high probability state flag is set. For example, it is set to display the effect content that notifies the transition from the "normal game state" to the "first high probability state". When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1112, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a RAM clear flag. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the RAM clear flag is present, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1115. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the RAM clear flag is present, the process is transferred to S1113. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the RAM clear flag is present, the lottery is performed with a probability of 1/2, and the process is transferred to S1115 only when the sub CPU 201 is won, and the process is transferred to S1113 when the sub CPU 201 is not won. It may be that. This makes the transition to the "fourth high probability state" more difficult. Further, when the processing of S1112 is performed, the RAM clear flag may be turned off.
When the power ON flag is used as a condition for transition to the "fourth high probability state" instead of the RAM clear flag as described above, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the power ON flag is present in S1112. It should be decided.

In S1113, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery process (fourth high probability state transition lottery) for shifting to the above-mentioned "fourth high probability state". For example, this winning probability may be 1/10. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1114.

In S1114, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery for shifting to the "fourth high probability state" has been won. If the sub CPU 201 determines that it has won, the process is transferred to S1115. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it has won, the process is transferred to S1116.

In S1115, the sub CPU 201 sets the fourth high-probability state flag, and sets an effect indicating that the lottery for shifting to the "fourth high-probability state" has been won. For example, an image that gives an "all-day navigation ticket" may be displayed. The fourth high-probability state transition lottery may not be performed. That is, the transition to the "fourth high probability state" may be made only when the special figure (1) -12 is won with the RAM clear flag set. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1116, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect indicating that the lottery for shifting to the "fourth high probability state" has not been won. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In addition, as described above, even in the case of a "big hit" other than the special figure (1) -3, if the advance notice effect is determined, the special feature is in the processing of S1099, S1101 and S1110. When it is determined that the figure type is a "big hit" other than the special figure (1) -3, the processes S1104 to S1109 may be performed. Further, when the sub CPU 201 is configured to determine whether or not to perform the above-mentioned advance notification effect according to the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 71, in the processing of S1099, S1101, S1103 and S1110, When it is determined that the special figure type is any "big hit" of special figure (1) -12, it is further decided by lottery whether or not to perform the advance notice effect, and it is decided to perform the advance notice effect. In that case, the processing of S1105 to S1109 may be performed.

As an example of this, a case where the "big hit" of the special figure (1) -2 is determined as the special figure type and the fluctuation pattern command is "83H17H" (hit super reach A) will be described.

For example, when the sub CPU 201 determines in S1101 that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether the variation pattern command is "83H16H" to "83H18H". It is determined whether or not to perform the notification effect (in this example, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern command is "83H17H" (winning super reach A), the advance notification effect is determined with a predetermined probability, and the advance notification effect is not determined. Is the process of S1102). Then, when the sub CPU 201 decides to perform the advance notification effect, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of S1105 to 1109.

In this way, as a result of the lottery, not only when the "big hit with no symbols" in the special figure (1) -3 is decided, but also when the "big hit with the same symbols" in the special figure (1) -2 is decided. By making it possible to execute the advance notice effect, for example, it is announced that the "big hit" has occurred at the initial stage of the variable display of the symbol (identification symbol, decorative symbol) (for example, at the start of the variable display). Even in this case, it will not be clear whether the "big hit with no symbols" has been decided or the "big hit with no symbols" has been decided until the advance notice production is completed. Further, as described above, during the advance notice production, it affects the future game content (for example, when the current point is 90, if 10 points or more are added, it becomes 100 points or more and is predetermined. (For example, all navigation) will be granted, but if less than 10 points are added, the prescribed privilege (for example, all navigation) will not be granted). There is. Therefore, even when the advance notification effect is performed when the variation pattern associated with the relatively long variation time is determined, the player pays close attention to the effect content, so that the variation time simply ends. It is possible to deter acts that lead to a decline in the interest of the game, such as just waiting for the game to be played or leaving the seat.

[Production determination process in the first high probability state]
The subroutine (first high-probability state effect determination process) executed in S1064 of FIG. 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

In S1121, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is at the time of transition to the "first high probability state". That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the first high probability state flag has been set in the previous game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is the transition time of the "first high probability state", the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1122. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is the transition time of the "first high probability state", the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1123.

In S1122, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the number of continuations of the "first high probability state" by lottery. For example, the sub CPU 201 determines the number of continuations of the "first high probability state" this time from the range of 10 to 50 times by lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1123. The number of continuations of the "first high probability state" may be determined according to the mode (initial mode, low mode, or high mode). In this case, for example, in the low mode, a relatively short continuation number may be easily determined, and in the initial mode and the high mode, a relatively long continuation number may be easily determined. In addition, the lottery for the number of continuations of the "first high probability state" is performed when it is determined to shift to the "first high probability state" (that is, when the first high probability state flag is set). ) May be used.

In S1123, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is lost, the process is transferred to S1124.
If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is lost, the process is transferred to S1128.

In S1124, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the stop symbol and the effect content based on the variation pattern command. In the "first high probability state", unlike the "normal game state" and the "second high probability state", points are not added. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1125.

In S1125, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of games in the first high probability medium game. The number of games played during the first high probability, which is the number of games in the "first high probability state", is stored in the work RAM 203. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1126.

In S1126, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of first high-probability medium games has reached the number of continuations of the "first high-probability state" (see S1122). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of first high-probability medium games has reached the number of continuations of the "first high-probability state", the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1127. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of consecutive games in the first high probability medium game has reached the number of continuations in the "first high probability state", the subroutine terminates this subroutine. In the first embodiment, when the game in the "first high probability state" reaches the determined number of continuations, it is set to shift to the "second high probability state", but the present invention is not limited to this. .. When the game in the "first high probability state" reaches the determined number of continuations, a fall lottery may be performed in which the "first high probability state" falls to the "normal game state".

In S1127, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability state end effect and sets the second high probability state flag. As a result, after the "first high probability state" is completed, the "second high probability state" is established. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1128, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "time reduction with balls". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2, the process is transferred to S1129. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2, the process is transferred to S1130. Here, the special figure (2) does not change. In addition, when it is determined that it is the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2, it becomes the "big hit game state" and then shifts to the "time saving game state", but the time saving in the "time saving game state". When the game is played a predetermined number of times (100 times), the state shifts to the "normal game state".

In S1129, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is "777" corresponding to the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2, adds 3 to the number of navigations, and 3 in the set game. The production is set as all navigation in which the navigation production is performed at all times. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1130, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "time reduction without payout". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the process is transferred to S1131. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the process is transferred to S1132.

In S1131, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of navigations and sets a special effect as all the navigations described above. At this time, since it is a big hit without a ball, an effect that does not suggest that it is a "big hit" is performed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1132, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high-probability state continuation effect and clears the number of first high-probability medium games. That is, when the special figure type is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12, that is, when it is a big hit of "normal without payout", it becomes the "first high probability state" again. Further, as the effect in this case, the content suggesting that the "first high probability state" is continued is displayed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. When the number of games in the first high probability medium is cleared in S1132, the number of continuations of the "first high probability state" may be redetermined by the lottery again, or the already determined "first high school" may be determined again. The number of continuations of the "probability state" may be used.

[Production determination process during the second high probability state]
The subroutine (second high-probability state effect determination process) executed in S1066 of FIG. 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 76.

In S1141, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the transition to the "second high probability state" has occurred. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the second high probability state flag has been set in the previous game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the transition to the "second high probability state" is in progress, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1142. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is the transition time of the "second high probability state", the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1143.

In S1142, the sub CPU 201 determines the number of continuations of the "second high probability state" by lottery according to the current mode (initial mode, low mode, or high mode) (see FIGS. 40 (b) to 40 (d)). Perform processing. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1143. The lottery for the number of continuations of the "second high probability state" is performed when it is determined to shift to the "second high probability state" (that is, when the second high probability state flag is set). ) May be used.

In S1143, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is lost, the process is transferred to S1144.
If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is lost, the process is transferred to S1151.

In S1144, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the stop symbol and the effect content based on the variation pattern command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1145.

In S1145, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding points. For the addition of the points, the points corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern are added with reference to the point addition table shown in FIG. 41 (a). Further, in the "second high probability state", if the lottery result determined in S1141 is lost, points are always added. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1146.

In S1146, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the accumulated points are 100 points or more. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the points are 100 points or more, the process is transferred to S1147. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the points are 100 points or more, the process is transferred to S1148.

In S1147, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability state flag and turns off the second high probability state flag. In addition, clear the points. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. Here, although the points are cleared in the first embodiment, the points are not limited to this, and for example, "-100" may be added without clearing the points to leave points of "0" or more. It is possible.

In S1148, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of second high-probability medium games. The number of games played during the second high probability, which is the number of games in the "second high probability state", is stored in the work RAM 203. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1149.

In S1149, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of second high-probability medium games has reached the number of continuations of the "second high-probability state" (see S1142). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of second high-probability medium games has reached the number of continuations of the "second high-probability state", the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1150. If the sub-CPU 201 does not determine that the number of second high-probability medium games has reached the number of continuations of the "second high-probability state", the subroutine ends this subroutine.

In S1150, the sub CPU 201 sets the second high-probability state end effect and turns off the second high-probability state flag. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. As a result, after the end of the "second high probability state", the state shifts to the "normal game state (sub)".

In S1151, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit with a short time. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7, the process is transferred to S1152. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7, that is, when special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12. The process is transferred to S1158. In the case of the special figure (1) -12, the process may be transferred to S1113 of FIG. 74.

In S1152, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the determined effect content is the "advance notice effect". That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is the special figure (1) -3 and the variation pattern command is "83H45H". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the determined effect content is the "advance notice effect", the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1153. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the determined effect content is the "advance notice effect", the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1157.

In S1153, the sub CPU 201 adds points to a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1154.

In S1154, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the accumulated points are 100 points or more. The sub CPU 201 confirms and determines the points accumulated in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the points are 100 points or more, the process is transferred to S1155. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the points are 100 points or more, the process is transferred to S1156.

In S1155, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, determines a decorative pattern by lottery, and performs a process of setting the above-mentioned premier advance notice effect. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1156, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the above-mentioned normal advance notification effect according to the number of points. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1157, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the stop symbol and the effect content based on the variation pattern command. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1158, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability state entry effect and sets the first high probability state flag. Specifically, the effect may be such that the transition to the first high probability state can be recognized. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Production determination process during the third high probability state]
The subroutine (third high-probability state effect determination process) executed in S1068 of FIG. 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 77.

In S1161, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is lost, the process is transferred to S1162.
If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is lost, the process is transferred to S1163.

In S1162, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the stop symbol and the effect content based on the variation pattern command. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1163, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "time reduction with balls". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2, the process shifts to S1164. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2, the process shifts to S1166. The special figure (2) does not change.

In S1164, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is "777", adds 3 to the number of navigations, and sets the effect. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1165.

In S1165, the sub CPU 201 turns off the third high probability state flag. End this subroutine. In this way, when a big hit with "time saving" is achieved, all the times in the set game are navigated in the game. On the other hand, the ceiling condition will end.

In S1166, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "time reduction without payout". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the process is transferred to S1167. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the special figure type is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1). It is determined that it is -12, and the process is transferred to S1169.

In S1167, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of navigations and sets a special effect. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1168.

In S1168, the sub CPU 201 turns off the third high probability state flag. End this subroutine. Again, if a big hit has a "time saving", the ceiling state will end while the navigation will be performed in all the time saving games in the set game. The ceiling state may be terminated only when the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2.

In S1169, the sub CPU 201 sets the third high probability state continuation effect. Here, it is in a state where it is determined that it is a big hit without "time saving", and the ceiling state does not end. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Production determination process during the 4th high probability state]
The subroutine (fourth high-probability state effect determination process) executed in S1069 of FIG. 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 78.

In S1171, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is lost, the process is transferred to S1172.
If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is lost, the process is transferred to S1173.

In S1172, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the stop symbol and the effect content based on the variation pattern command. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. The "fourth high probability state" is cleared by performing initialization processing such as RAM clearing and power off. Other than that, it will not be cleared.

In S1173, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "time reduction with balls". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2, the process shifts to S1174. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2, the process is transferred to S1175.
Here, the special figure (2) does not change.

In S1174, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is "777", adds 3 to the number of navigations, and sets the effect. That is, a big hit with "time saving" becomes so-called all navigation, and this state does not end. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1175, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of "time reduction without payout". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the process is transferred to S1176. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -3 to the special figure (1) -7, the process shifts to S1177.

In S1176, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of navigations and sets a special effect. Again, all navigation states do not end. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1177, the sub CPU 201 sets the fourth high probability state continuation effect. In this way, in the case of a big hit without "time reduction", the "fourth high probability state" does not end. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Processing when receiving jackpot start command]
The subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the jackpot start command) executed in S1045 of FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG. 79.

In S1181, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is a hit in the "normal gaming state" or the "second high probability state". Here, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for all navigation. Here, the "normal game state" is a "normal game state" other than the "first high probability state", the "second high probability state", the "third high probability state", and the "fourth high probability state" as described above. Refers to the "normal game state (sub)". When the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is a hit in the "normal gaming state" or the "second high probability state", the process is transferred to S1182. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is a hit in the "normal gaming state" or the "second high probability state", the process is transferred to S1190 as a hit in all navigation.

In S1182, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hit is a hit to which a time reduction is given. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the time reduction is given, the process is transferred to S1183. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the time reduction is given, the process is transferred to S1189.

In S1183, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring a random number value for the navigation lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1184.

In S1184, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hit is a hit of "with a ball". That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hit is a hit of "with a ball", the process is transferred to S1185. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the hit is a "ball out" hit, the process is transferred to S1186.

In S1185, the sub CPU 201 sets the effect corresponding to the character selected by the player using the effect button 23. If the character is not selected, the effect corresponding to the initially set character is set. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1186, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of executing a navigation lottery for acquiring a random number value by using a time-saving navigation lottery table without a ball as shown in FIG. 41. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1187.

In S1187, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding the number of navigations based on the result of the navigation lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1188.

In S1188, the sub CPU 201 sets the effect based on the number of remaining navigations. For example, it may be a production that draws an Omikuji with the remaining number of navigations written on it. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1189, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect indicating that it is a hit without shortening the time. For example, it may be a notification effect that draws a fortune telling that the content suggesting the transition to the "first high probability state" is written. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1190, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit during the time saving.
Here, the big hit during the time reduction includes a 5-round big hit according to the special figure (1) and the special figure (2), or a "V hit" from the small hit according to the special figure (2). Since the V-hit start command described later is transmitted, the big hit start command is not transmitted. Even in the case of hitting V, the jackpot start command may be transmitted instead of the V hit start command. In that case, it is desirable to include data indicating how the jackpot was made in the jackpot start command so that the history of the jackpot can be specified on the sub-board. Therefore, when the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a 5-round jackpot according to the special figure (1) and the special figure (2), the process is transferred to S1191. If the sub CPU 201 is a big hit in the "normal game state" and does not determine that it is a big hit in a short time, the process is transferred to S1192.

In S1191, the sub CPU 201 sets the time saving, medium and big hit effect. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1192, the sub CPU 201 sets a jackpot effect indicating that all navigation has been confirmed. Here, as described above, the all navigation means to execute the navigation in all the "time saving game states" during the set game. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Processing when receiving start command per V]
The subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the start command per V) executed in S1049 of FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG. 80.

In S1201, the sub CPU 201 sets the effect at the time of hitting V. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect to be performed when the game ball wins the V winning opening 57 and becomes "V hit". For example, a fanfare image may be displayed.

In S1202, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the navigation has been executed. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the navigation has been executed, the process is transferred to S1203. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the navigation has been executed, the process is transferred to S1207.

In S1203, the sub CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of navigations. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1204.

In S1204, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type has won a V prize with a small hit (2) -1 or a small hit (2) -2 as an opportunity. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is a small hit (2) -1 or a small hit (2) -2 as a trigger to win a V prize, that is, when it is determined that the special figure type is "V hit", processing is performed in S1205. To move. Further, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type has won a V prize triggered by a small hit (2) -1 or a small hit (2) -2, that is, if it does not determine that it is a "V hit", S1206 Move the process to.

In S1205, the sub CPU 201 sets the winning success effect. Specifically, the success effect is an effect performed when the 16R "big hit" is won by performing the launch operation according to the navigation. For example, the effect as shown in FIG. 89, which will be described later, may be performed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1206, the sub CPU 201 sets the avoidance failure effect. Specifically, the avoidance failure effect is an effect performed when a 2R "big hit" is won by performing a launch operation that does not follow the navigation. For example, the effect as shown in FIG. 90, which will be described later, may be performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1207.

In S1207, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type has won a V prize with a small hit (2) -3 or a small hit (2) -4 as an opportunity. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is a small hit (2) -3 or a small hit (2) -4 as a trigger to win a V prize, that is, if it is determined to be a "V hit", it is processed in S1208. To move. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type has won a V prize triggered by a small hit (2) -3 or a small hit (2) -4, that is, if it does not determine that it is a "V hit", the present invention is used. End the subroutine.

In S1208, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of times per 2R. The number of times per 2R is the number of times a player has won a "big hit game" in two rounds. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1209.

In S1209, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of hits per 2R is 3 out of the 3 hits excluding the so-called first hit in the hit during the set game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of times per 2R is 3, the process is transferred to S1210. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of times per 2R is 3, this subroutine ends.

In S1210, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of navigations and clears the number of times per 2R. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. In the first embodiment, it is possible to set the winning failure effect in S1205 and set the avoidance success effect in S1206. Of course, it is also possible to additionally set these effects.

[Processing when receiving small hit end command]
The subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the small hit end command) executed in S1051 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 81.

In S1221, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the launch navigation effect has been executed. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the launch navigation effect has been executed, the process is transferred to S1222. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the launch navigation effect has been executed, the process is transferred to S1223.

In S1222, the sub CPU 201 sets a winning failure effect. The winning failure effect is an effect that is executed when the launch navigation effect is executed but the "V hit" is not performed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1223, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the launch suppression navigation effect has been executed. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the launch suppression navigation effect has been executed, the process is transferred to S1224. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the launch suppression navigation effect has been executed, the process is transferred to S1225.

In S1224, the sub CPU 201 sets the avoidance success effect. The avoidance success effect is an effect that is executed when the launch suppression navigation effect is executed and the "V hit" is not performed. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1225, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of notifying the result when the V winning opening 57 has been won. For example, if the player has won the V winning opening 57 and has won the "big hit game" in the second round, a notification indicating that it is good for the player may be given. In addition, for example, if the player has won the V winning opening 57 and has won the "big hit game" in the 16th round, a notification indicating that it was disappointing for the player will be given. Just do it. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. It is also possible to set the winning success effect in S1222 and set the avoidance failure effect in S1224, and it is also possible to additionally set these effects.

Therefore, when the launch navigation effect or the launch suppression effect set as advantageous information for the player is displayed, the result display is "winning success effect" or "winning failure" depending on whether or not "V hit" is performed. Of the "effect", "avoidance success effect", and "avoidance failure effect", the corresponding effect is displayed.

[Processing when receiving a display command while the winning opening is open]
The subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the display command during opening of the large winning opening) executed in S1053 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 82.

In S1231, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is the special figure (1) -2. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1232. Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1239.

In S1232, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit in the "normal game state" or the "second high probability state". Here, the "normal game state" is a "normal game state (sub) other than the" first high probability state "," second high probability state "," third high probability state ", and" fourth high probability state ". ) ”. When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a big hit in the "normal game state" or the "second high probability state", the process is transferred to S1233. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is a big hit in the "normal game state" or the "second high probability state", the process is transferred to S1239.

In S1233, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the first round of the "big hit game" is being executed. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the first round of the "big hit game" is being executed, the process is transferred to S1234. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the first round of the "big hit game" has been executed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1236.

In S1234, the sub CPU 201 uses the jackpot navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 43 to perform a jackpot navigation lottery based on the selected character and navigation lottery random numbers. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1235.

In S1235, the sub CPU 201 sets the effect based on the lottery result.
When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. Here, for example, when the navigation is to be added in the navigation lottery, an effect such that the selected character wins in a battle game or the like is set. It is not always necessary to perform such an effect in the first round, and it is possible to set it to be performed in any round.

In S1236, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the round is to notify the lottery result. If it is determined that the sub CPU 201 is a round for notifying the lottery result, the process is transferred to S1237. In the first embodiment, the round for notifying the lottery result is 5 rounds, but the round is not limited to 5 rounds and may be another round. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the round is for notifying the lottery result, the process is transferred to S1238.

In S1237, the sub CPU 201 sets the lottery result notification effect. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1238, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect according to the set effect. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1239, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect according to the set effect as in S1238. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Processing when receiving the interval end command per special symbol]
The subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the interval end command per special symbol) executed in S1057 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 83.

In S1241, it is determined whether or not the sub CPU 201 is a "big hit" that was won during the time saving. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the "big hit" is won during the time reduction, the process is transferred to S1242. Further, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is a "big hit" that was won during the time reduction, the process is transferred to S1249.

In S1242, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the last "time saving game state" during the set game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is the last "time saving game state" during the set game, the process is transferred to S1243. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is the last "time saving game state" during the set game, the process is transferred to S1246.

In S1243, the sub CPU 201 uses the navigation lottery table at the end of the set game shown in FIG. 44 to perform a navigation lottery according to the number of "big hits" by the special symbol game during the set game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1244.

In S1244, the sub CPU 201 sets the effect based on the lottery result.
When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1245. In S1245, the sub CPU 201 sets the game state to be shifted after the set game is completed. Specifically, when the gaming states before the transition to the set game are the "first high probability state" to the "third high probability state" and the "normal gaming state (sub)", the "first high probability state""State" is set. If the game state before shifting to the set game is the "fourth high probability state", the "fourth high probability state" is set.
In addition, even after shifting to the "third high probability state" which is the ceiling state, when a predetermined number of games continue in a state where the "big hit" of the special figures (1) -1 to (1) -7 is not won. Is a ceiling lottery each time, and if you win this ceiling lottery, in a configuration where you can accumulate and store the "third high probability state", if you have accumulated the "third high probability state" , After the set game is completed, the game shifts to the "third high probability state" again (the "third high probability state" is set).

In S1246, the sub CPU 201 confirms the number of navigations stored in the work RAM 203 and determines whether or not there is a remaining number. When the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a remaining number, the process is transferred to S1247. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that there is a remaining number, the process is transferred to S1248.

In S1247, the sub CPU 201 sets the next navigation effect. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1248, the sub CPU 201 sets the next non-navigation effect. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1249, the sub CPU 201 sets the effect according to the transition destination of the game state and the presence / absence of the navigation according to the determination that the jackpot is not the winning jackpot during the "time saving game state". When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Penalty check processing]
The subroutine (penalty check process) executed in S1059 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 84.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the sub control circuit 200 shifts to the "first high probability state" by giving a privilege to the player based on various commands from the main control circuit 70 (for example, by adding points). , All navigation will be given if it becomes a specific "big hit"). Therefore, if the connection line between the main control circuit 70 and the sub control circuit 200 is illegally accessed, or if a problem occurs in the connection line, an unintended profit will be given to the player. ..

For example, if only the special symbol production start command is supplied to the sub-control circuit 200 even though the game ball has not passed through each start port, the number of games used for the ceiling lottery is added, and the unintended ceiling lottery is performed. Will be executed. Further, if only a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, "special normal fluctuation" of "83H44H") determined when the lottery result is lost is supplied to the sub-control circuit 200, points are added and the unintended "" The transition to the "first high probability state" will be executed.
Further, for example, if a big hit of special figure (1) -12 is obtained as a special figure type after the initialization command is supplied, the process shifts to the "fourth high probability state", so that the lottery result If the lottery result is a hit and the special symbol production start command indicating the special symbol (1) -12 is supplied to the sub-control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 200 is not intended. The transition to the "probabilistic state" will be executed. Further, after the initialization command is supplied, if a big hit other than the special figure (1) -12 is obtained as the special figure type, a special symbol effect start command indicating that fact is supplied to the sub-control circuit 200. If this is blocked and a special symbol production start command indicating that fact is supplied to the sub-control circuit 200 when the special symbol (1) -12 becomes a big hit as the special symbol type, this is assumed. Even in this case, the unintended transition to the "fourth high probability state" will be executed.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, by performing each of the processes of FIGS. 84 and 85 to 88 described later, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned unintended profit from being given to the player.

In the first embodiment, as a privilege given to the player, points are given, the transition to the "first high probability state" based on the grant of the points, and the transition to the "first high probability state". The explanation is given as an example of giving all navigation, but it is not limited to this. For example, a privilege of displaying the game history may be given based on the points given, or a so-called "probability change game state" in which the probability of becoming a "big hit" is higher than usual is provided. In the case where the game is not in the above-mentioned "time saving game state" (that is, when the probability change is hidden), the privilege of notifying the fact may be given.

Further, for example, predetermined code information (for example, a two-dimensional code) including information indicating a game history, a degree of achievement of a task, etc. in a manner in which the pachinko game machine 1 can be read by a player's portable terminal (not shown). A bar code, etc.) can be displayed, and by reading this predetermined code information, it is possible to access an external information device (not shown, for example, a server) from a mobile terminal, and by accessing the external information device, a game is played. Information such as history and achievement of tasks can be accumulated, and specific information (for example, password) including information for restoring such information can be transmitted from this external information device to a mobile terminal. , In the pachinko game machine 1, when the transmitted specific information is input, the information such as the game history and the achievement level of the task is restored, for example, the game history and the task. If it is configured to increase the number of new production modes and selectable characters according to the degree of achievement, etc., and if it is decided by awarding points whether or not to update the game history or achieve the task, this Granting such points can also grant benefits to the player.

In S1421, the sub CPU 201 performs the fluctuation time monitoring process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 monitors the consistency between the fluctuation time of the symbol and the supplied command.
The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1422.

In S1422, the sub CPU 201 performs sequence monitoring processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 monitors the order of the supplied commands. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1423.

In S1423, the sub CPU 201 performs a hold quantity monitoring process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 monitors the consistency between the number of times the game ball has passed through each start port and the number of times the symbol changes, based on the supplied command. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1424.

In S1424, the sub CPU 201 performs the rotation speed monitoring process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the number of fluctuations (rotational speed) of the symbol monitored by the main control circuit 70 and the number of fluctuations (rotational speed) of the symbol monitored by the sub-control circuit 200 based on the supplied command. Monitor the integrity of. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1425.

In S1425, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the penalty flag is on. As will be described later, the penalty flag is turned on when the penalty counter becomes "4" based on the monitoring results in S1421 to S1424, and when the penalty flag is on, fraudulent activity intervenes. It is recognized that there is a high possibility that an unintended lottery will be executed due to the fact that the lottery has been done or a defect has occurred. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the penalty flag is on, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1428, and when it does not determine that the penalty flag is on, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1426.

In S1426, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the penalty counter is "4". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the penalty counter is "4", it shifts the process to S1427, and if it does not determine that the penalty counter is "4", it terminates this subroutine. In the first embodiment, the penalty flag is turned on when the penalty counter is "4", but this value can be set arbitrarily. For example, in S1426, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the penalty counter is "1", and if it determines that the penalty counter is "1", the process is transferred to S1427 and the penalty counter is "1". If it is not determined to exist, this subroutine may be terminated.

In S1427, the sub CPU 201 turns on the penalty flag and performs a process of clearing the penalty counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1428.

In S1428, in this game, the sub CPU 201 is a point addition lottery (see S1074 in FIG. 72, S1105 in FIG. 74, S1145 and S1153 in FIG. 76), and a lottery for transition to the "first high probability state" (without lottery). (Including the case of transitioning to the 4th high probability state), the transition lottery to the "third high probability state" (including the case of transitioning without lottery), or the transition lottery to the "fourth high probability state" (transition without lottery) (Including the case) is determined whether or not it has been performed. When it is determined that these lottery has been performed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1429, and when it is not determined that these lottery has been performed, the subroutine ends this subroutine.

In S1429, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of invalidating the lottery result. For example, when points are added as a result of the point addition lottery, the sub CPU 201 invalidates the added points (set to 0). Further, for example, when the first high probability state flag is set, the first high probability state flag is cleared. Further, for example, when the third high probability state flag is set, the third high probability state flag is cleared. Further, for example, when the fourth high probability state flag is set, the fourth high probability state flag is cleared. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1430.

In S1428 and S1429, the lottery result once drawn is invalidated, but the mode of granting the penalty is not limited to this. For example, in each of the above-mentioned lottery, it may be determined whether or not the penalty flag is on, and if the penalty flag is on, the lottery itself may not be performed.

Further, in S1429, not only the lottery result is invalidated, but also the value of various counters such as the value of the game number counter indicating the number of games used in the ceiling lottery and the value of the point counter that cumulatively stores the added points. You may clear all or part of.

In S1430, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of turning off the penalty flag.
When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. In the first embodiment, the penalty flag is turned off when the lottery shown in S1428 is performed once, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the penalty flag may be held until a predetermined number of lottery (for example, three times) is performed. Further, for example, the penalty flag may be held until a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 times) are played.

[Fluctuating time monitoring process]
The subroutine (variation time monitoring process) executed in S1421 of FIG. 84 will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

In S1441, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the fluctuation time monitoring timer is not set. This fluctuation time monitoring timer is a timer that is set when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, and a value synchronized with the fluctuation time of the special symbol in this game is set. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the fluctuation time monitoring timer is not set, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1442, and when it does not determine that the fluctuation time monitoring timer is not set, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1444.

In S1442, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol effect start command has been received. Since the special symbol effect start command is a command transmitted at the start of the change of the special symbol, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the start of the change of the special symbol by this process. If it is determined that the special symbol effect start command has been received, the process is transferred to S1443, and if it is not determined that the special symbol effect start command has been received, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1443, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a fluctuation time monitoring timer according to the fluctuation time. For example, when the information about the fluctuation time included in the special symbol effect start command is "5000 ms", the sub CPU 201 sets the value corresponding to this "5000 ms" as the value of the fluctuation time monitoring timer. The fluctuation time monitoring timer is updated (subtracted) in S1022 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 65. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1444.

In S1444, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the symbol stop command has been received. Since the symbol stop command is a command transmitted at the end of the change of the special symbol, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the end of the change of the special symbol by this process. If it is determined that the symbol stop command has been received, the process is transferred to S1445, and if it is not determined that the symbol stop command has been received, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1445, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the fluctuation time monitoring timer is “0”. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the time from receiving the special symbol effect start command to receiving the symbol stop command coincides with the fluctuation time. In this process, it may be determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time monitoring timer is within a certain threshold value (for example, 10 to -10). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the fluctuation time monitoring timer is "0", the subroutine terminates this subroutine, and when it does not determine that the fluctuation time monitoring timer is "0", the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1446.

In S1446, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding "1" to the penalty counter. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. That is, as a result of monitoring the consistency between the fluctuation time of the symbol and the supplied command, the sub CPU 201 may execute an unintended lottery due to the intervention of fraudulent activity or the occurrence of a defect. Is determined.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the sub-control circuit 200 that controls the awarding of points is illegal by monitoring the consistency between the fluctuation time of the symbol and the supplied command. It is possible to prevent an unintended lottery (for example, a lottery relating to the awarding of points) from being executed due to the intervention of an act or the occurrence of a defect.

[Sequence monitoring process]
The subroutine (sequence monitoring process) executed in S1422 of FIG. 84 will be described with reference to FIG. 86.

In S1451, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hold subtraction command has been received. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hold subtraction command has been received, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1452, and when it does not determine that the hold subtraction command has been received, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1455.

In S1452, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the sequence monitoring counter is "0". The sequence monitoring counter is a counter that monitors the order of received commands.
When the sequence monitoring counter is "0", it means that it is the first command among the commands monitored by this sequence monitoring process. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the sequence monitoring counter is "0", the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1453, and when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the sequence monitoring counter is "0", the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1454.

In S1453, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding "1" to the sequence monitoring counter. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1454, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding "1" to the penalty counter. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. That is, as a result of monitoring the order of the supplied hold subtraction commands, the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a possibility that an unintended lottery may be executed due to the intervention of fraudulent activity or the occurrence of a defect.

In S1455, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol effect start command has been received. Here, the above-mentioned hold subtraction command is a command that is transmitted before the start of the change of the special symbol and when the start memory is subtracted, and the special symbol effect start command is transmitted at the start of the change of the special symbol. If the sub CPU 201 receives commands in the order of the hold subtraction command and the special symbol effect start command, the sub CPU 201 can recognize that the symbol variation in the game is based on the start memory. .. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special symbol effect start command has been received, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1456, and when it does not determine that the special symbol effect start command has been received, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1459.

In S1456, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the sequence monitoring counter is "1". When the sequence monitoring counter is "1", it means that it is the second command among the commands monitored by this sequence monitoring process. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the sequence monitoring counter is "1", the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1457, and when it does not determine that the sequence monitoring counter is "1", the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1458.

In S1457, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding "1" to the sequence monitoring counter. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1458, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding "1" to the penalty counter. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. That is, as a result of monitoring the order of the supplied special symbol production start commands, the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a possibility that an unintended lottery may be executed due to the intervention of fraudulent acts or the occurrence of a defect. ..

In S1459, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the symbol stop command has been received. Here, since the above-mentioned special symbol effect start command is a command transmitted at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol and the symbol stop command is a command transmitted at the end of fluctuation of the special symbol, the sub CPU 201 is set to the special symbol. If the command is received in the order of the effect start command and the symbol stop command, it can be recognized that the symbol variation start and end in the game have been performed normally. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the symbol stop command has been received, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1460, and when it does not determine that the symbol stop command has been received, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1465.

In S1460, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the sequence monitoring counter is "2". The fact that the sequence monitoring counter is "2" means that it is the third command among the commands monitored by this sequence monitoring process. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the sequence monitoring counter is "2", the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1461, and when it does not determine that the sequence monitoring counter is "2", the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1464.

In S1461, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. Here, if the lottery result is lost, this game will end when the change of the special symbol ends. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current game is finished. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is lost, the process is transferred to S1462, and if the lottery result is not determined to be lost, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1463.

In S1462, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the sequence monitoring counter. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1463, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding "1" to the sequence monitoring counter. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1464, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding "1" to the penalty counter. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. That is, as a result of monitoring the order of the supplied symbol stop commands, the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a possibility that an unintended lottery may be executed due to the intervention of fraudulent acts or the occurrence of a defect.

In S1465, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot start command has been received. Here, since the above-mentioned symbol stop command is a command transmitted at the end of the special symbol variation and the jackpot start command is a command transmitted at the start of the "big hit game state", the sub CPU 201 stops the symbol. If the command is received in the order of the command and the jackpot start command, it can be recognized that the end of the fluctuation of the symbol in the game and the transition to the "big hit game state" have been performed normally. The same processing may be performed when the small hit start command is received and when the V hit start command is received. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the jackpot start command has been received, the process shifts to S1466, and when it does not determine that the jackpot start command has been received, the subroutine ends this subroutine.

In S1466, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the sequence monitoring counter is "3". The fact that the sequence monitoring counter is "3" means that it is the fourth command among the commands monitored by this sequence monitoring process. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the sequence monitoring counter is "3", the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1467, and when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the sequence monitoring counter is "3", the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1468.

In S1467, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the sequence monitoring counter. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1468, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding "1" to the penalty counter. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. That is, as a result of monitoring the order of the supplied jackpot start commands, the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a possibility that an unintended lottery may be executed due to the intervention of fraudulent activity or the occurrence of a defect.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the sub-control circuit 200 that controls the awarding of points monitors the order of the supplied commands, thereby intervening fraudulent acts. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent an unintended lottery (for example, a lottery relating to the awarding of points) from being executed due to a defect.

[Holding quantity monitoring process]
The subroutine (holding quantity monitoring process) executed in S1423 of FIG. 84 will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

In S1471, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hold addition command has been received. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hold addition command has been received, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1472, and when it does not determine that the hold addition command has been received, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1473.

In S1472, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding "1" to the hold quantity monitoring counter. The hold quantity monitoring counter is a counter that monitors that the start memory has been added. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1473, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol effect start command has been received. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special symbol effect start command has been received, the process shifts to S1474, and when it does not determine that the special symbol effect start command has been received, the subroutine ends this subroutine.

In S1474, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting "1" from the hold quantity monitoring counter. Here, the above-mentioned hold addition command is a command that is transmitted before the start of the change of the special symbol and when the start memory is added, and the special symbol effect start command is transmitted at the start of the change of the special symbol. Command. Therefore, by adding "1" to the hold quantity monitoring counter in S1472 and subtracting "1" from the hold quantity monitoring counter in S1474, does the sub CPU 201 make the fluctuation of the symbol in the game based on the start memory? It can be determined whether or not. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1475.

In S1475, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hold quantity monitoring counter is "0" or more. Here, the fact that the hold quantity monitoring counter is less than "0" means that the number of fluctuations is at least larger than the number of start storages, and thus it is a state that cannot normally occur. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hold quantity monitoring counter is "0" or more, it terminates this subroutine, and when it does not determine that the hold quantity monitoring counter is "0" or more, it processes in S1476. Transfer.

In S1476, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding "1" to the penalty counter. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. That is, as a result of monitoring the consistency between the number of times the game ball has passed through each start port and the number of times the symbol fluctuates based on the supplied command, the sub CPU 201 has caused a problem due to the intervention of fraudulent activity. It is determined that there is a possibility that an unintended lottery will be executed.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the number of times and the symbol that the game ball has passed through each starting port by the sub-control circuit 200 that controls the awarding of points based on the supplied command. By monitoring the consistency with the number of fluctuations, it is possible to prevent unintended lottery (for example, lottery related to the awarding of points) from being executed due to the intervention of fraudulent activity or the occurrence of a defect. can.

[Rotation speed monitoring process]
The subroutine (rotation speed monitoring process) executed in S1424 of FIG. 84 will be described with reference to FIG. 88.

In S1481, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the initialization condition for the rotation speed monitoring is satisfied. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the rotation speed monitoring initialization condition is satisfied, the process shifts to S1482, and when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the rotation speed monitoring initialization condition is satisfied, the sub CPU 201 moves to S1483. Move the process. In the first embodiment, the initialization command is received (that is, the work RAM 203 is cleared in the main control circuit 70) as the initialization condition for the rotation speed monitoring.

However, the initialization condition of the rotation speed monitoring is not limited to this, and may be a condition that the command at the time of power recovery is received (that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is simply turned on from the power off). .. Further, it may be a condition that the command at the time of power recovery is received (that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on) after a predetermined time has elapsed after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. Specifically, the time from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off to when the power is turned on is the first time required for the maintenance work of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, clearing the ball jam) (for example, clearing the ball jam). When a predetermined initialization time (for example, 2 hours) has passed, which is more than 30 minutes) and less than a second time (for example, 11 hours) indicating that the hall (game hall) is closed. , The initialization condition of the rotation speed monitoring may be satisfied. By adopting such an initialization condition, it may be possible to more accurately count the number of rotations played by a specific player.

In S1482, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the rotation speed monitoring counter. The rotation speed monitoring counter is a counter that monitors the number of fluctuations (rotation speed) of the symbol on the sub-control circuit 200 side. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1483.

In S1483, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol effect start command has been received. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special symbol effect start command has been received, the process shifts to S1484, and when it does not determine that the special symbol effect start command has been received, the subroutine ends this subroutine.

In S1484, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding "1" to the rotation speed monitoring counter. That is, the sub CPU 201 updates the number of fluctuations (rotation speed) of the symbol based on the reception of the special symbol effect start command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1485.

In S1485, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current rotation speed and the value of the rotation speed monitoring counter match. That is, the sub CPU 201 contains information (information stored in the rotation speed counter) regarding the number of fluctuations of the symbol updated / monitored in S83 of the special symbol memory check process shown in FIG. 48, which is included in the special symbol effect start command. It is determined whether or not the information matches the information stored in the rotation speed monitoring counter. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the current rotation speed and the value of the rotation speed monitoring counter match, it terminates this subroutine, and when it does not determine that the current rotation speed matches the value of the rotation speed monitoring counter. Moves to the process of S1486.

In S1486, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the rotation speed monitoring counter is "1". That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is the first game after the condition for initializing the rotation speed is satisfied. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the rotation speed monitoring counter is "1", the processing is transferred to S1487, and when the rotation speed monitoring counter is not determined to be "1", the processing is transferred to S1488.

In S1487, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the rotation speed monitoring counter to the current rotation speed. As a result, for example, even if the condition for initializing the rotation speed monitored by the main control circuit 70 and the condition for initializing the rotation speed monitoring counter monitored by the sub control circuit 200 are different, it is possible. It is possible to prevent it from being determined that fraudulent activity is frequently intervened or that a problem has occurred. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In S1488, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding "1" to the penalty counter. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated. That is, the sub CPU 201 matches the number of fluctuations (rotational speed) of the symbol monitored by the main control circuit 70 with the number of fluctuations (rotational speed) of the symbol monitored by the sub-control circuit 200 based on the supplied command. As a result of monitoring the sex, it is determined that there is a possibility that an unintended lottery may be executed due to the intervention of fraudulent activity or the occurrence of a defect. When this process is completed, the process of S1487 may be further performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent it from being determined that fraudulent activity is frequently intervened or a defect has occurred.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the sub-control circuit 200 that controls the awarding of points is the number of rotations of the symbol monitored by the main control circuit 70 based on the supplied command. By monitoring the consistency between (rotation speed) and the number of fluctuations (rotation speed) of the symbol monitored by the sub-control circuit 200, an unintended lottery due to the intervention of fraudulent activity or the occurrence of a defect ( For example, it is possible to prevent the lottery regarding the granting of points) from being executed.

[Production display example]
An example of the navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an effect per 16R of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment (see S1221 in FIG. 81). Further, FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an effect per 2R of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment (see S1223 in FIG. 81).

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment navigates when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the set game. As described above, the navigation system is a "big hit" when a "small hit" is won in the "short-time game state" and a "V hit" is obtained in the open state of the second big winning device 53 due to this small hit. It is a notification that suggests the number of rounds of "game".

In the "short-time game state", after the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 45 and the "small hit" is determined, the navigation is executed during the fluctuation time. That is, the navigation is executed from a few seconds before the fluctuation stops. The navigation may be displayed as an image in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. First, referring to FIG. 89, an example of navigation when it is decided when a "small hit" is won that a 16-round "big hit game" is performed when a "V hit" is obtained. Will be described. The special figure type at this time is a small hit (2) -1 or a small hit (2) -2.

When the "small hit" is won, the launch navigation effect is executed before the blade member 53a of the second large winning device 53 operates. For example, as shown in FIG. 89A, an image is displayed in the display area 13a. Specifically, the sight of the rifle and the bird are visible through the sight, and an image is displayed as if the bird was aimed at the rifle. Then, the characters "hit!" Are also displayed in the display area 13a. As a result, the player can recognize that 16 rounds of "big hit game" will be performed in the case of "V hit".

The player recognizes this image and continues firing without stopping the firing of the game ball. At this time, if the game ball wins the V winning opening 57, the success effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), an image is displayed in which a bird is hit by a rifle bullet. And the characters "Hit !!" are also displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that a 16-round "big hit game" will be started.

In addition, if the launch navigation effect is executed and the game ball does not win the V winning opening 57 in the "small hit game" even though the player continues to launch the game ball, the failure effect is generated. Will be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), an image is displayed in which the bird moves away from the sight and escapes. And the character of "missing" is also displayed.

Next, referring to FIG. 90, when it is decided when the "small hit" is won, the two rounds of the "big hit game" will be performed when the "V hit" is obtained. An example will be described. The special figure type at this time is a small hit (2) -3 or a small hit (2) -4.

When the "small hit" is won, the launch suppression navigation effect is executed before the blade member 53a of the second large winning device 53 operates. For example, as shown in FIG. 90A, an image is displayed in the display area 13a. Specifically, the sight of the rifle and the bomb are visible through the sight, and an image is displayed as if the bomb was aimed at the rifle. Then, the characters "Don't hit!" Are also displayed in the display area 13a. As a result, the player can recognize that the "big hit game" of two rounds is performed when the "V hit" is reached.

The player recognizes this image and stops the launch of the game ball. However, if the game ball cannot be stopped successfully, the game ball may win the V winning opening 57. If the game ball wins in the V winning opening 57, the avoidance failure effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), an image in which a rifle bullet hits a bomb and explodes is displayed.
And the word "Failure!" Is also displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that a two-round "big hit game" is started.

Further, when the launch suppression navigation effect is executed and the player can prevent the game ball from winning the V winning opening 57 by stopping the launch of the game ball, the avoidance success effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), an image is displayed in which the bomb disengages from the sight and disappears. And the word "danger avoidance" is also displayed.

In addition, during a set game, a player may win a "big hit" in five rounds by entering the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45. Even in such a case, the effect of the image may be executed in the display area 13a. In such a case, although not shown, for example, in the display area 13a, a rifle sight and a bird can be seen through the sight, and an image of the bird hitting a tree and falling can be seen. It should be displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that the "big hit game" of 5 rounds is performed instead of the "V hit".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a configuration in which the player is advantageous or disadvantageous according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game in this way, and by satisfying a predetermined condition, the number of rounds can be increased. Suggestive notification (navigation) can be performed. As a result, the player can play the game in an advantageous situation by recognizing the notification.
When navigation is not provided, for example, it is preferable that "?" Is displayed through the sight so that it is not possible to know which round of "big hit game" is caused by "V hit". In addition, when "?" Is displayed through the sight and "V hit" is displayed, if 16 rounds of "big hit game" is to be started, a bird is displayed and 2 rounds are displayed. When the "big hit game" of is started, the result may be left to the player by displaying the explosion.

[Various notification processing by payout control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 98, the contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300 will be described.

[Power-on process]
First, the power-on process by the payout CPU 301 will be described with reference to FIG. 91.
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the power-on process in the first embodiment. The power-on process is a process started when the power is turned on. When the power-on process is started, the payout CPU 301 first sets the stack pointer, the interrupt mode, and the interrupt vector.

First, the payout CPU 301 performs the input / output port setting process (S301). Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the power failure detection state (S302). In this process, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is at the H level (high level).

In S302, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection signal is at the H level (when the determination in S302 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection signal is in the power failure detection state, and performs the process of S302.

On the other hand, in S302, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection signal is not at the H level (NO in S302), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power failure detection state is not present, and performs write permission processing of the RAM 303. Do (S303).

In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs various initial setting processes such as, for example, an initialization process of a work area of the RAM 303, in addition to a write permission process of the RAM 303.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 33) is on (S304).

In S304, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is ON (when the determination in S304 is YES), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S310 described later.

On the other hand, in S304, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not on (NO in S304), the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not there is a power failure detection flag (S305). In this process, the payout CPU 301 confirms the power failure detection flag.

In S305, when the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no power interruption detection flag (when the determination in S305 is NO), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S310 described later. On the other hand, in S305, when the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a power failure detection flag (when the determination in S305 is YES), the payout CPU 301 calculates the work damage check value (S306). In this process, the payout CPU 301 checks the damage of the work area in the RAM 303 and calculates the work damage check value.

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 executes an error detection process such as a parity check or a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check), and uses the checksum obtained as the execution result as the work damage check value.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the work damage check value is normal (S307). In S307, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the work damage check value is not normal (when the determination in S305 is NO), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S310 described later.

On the other hand, in S307, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the work damage check value is normal (when the determination in S307 is YES), the payout CPU 301 performs the initial processing at the time of power recovery (S308).

That is, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not on, the power failure detection flag is present, and the work damage check value is normal, the payout CPU 301 is in the state before the power is turned off. It is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be restored, and the initial setting process at the time of power recovery is performed based on the data stored in the RAM 303.

Next, the payout CPU 301 performs the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process (S309). In this process, the payout CPU 301 makes initial settings for determining whether 15 game balls are secured in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B, respectively.

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, respectively. In the first embodiment, assuming that the falling time of one game ball is 130 ms, the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B have 1950 times corresponding to the falling time of 15 game balls of 1950 ms (= 130 ms × 15). The initial value of.

Further, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B, respectively. In the first embodiment, based on the falling time of 15 game balls 1950 ms (1950 times), 2000 ms is set as the time when the collateral of 15 game balls is assumed to be completed, and the first and second collateral ball timers 306A, The initial value of 306B is used.

After the processing of S309, the payout CPU 301 returns the value of the program counter to the address before the power failure. Specifically, the payout CPU 301 ends the power-on process and continues to process the program that was being executed when the power-on process was executed.

If S304 is a YES determination, S305 is a NO determination, or S307 is a NO determination, the payout CPU 301 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be returned to the state before the power was turned off, and the power is supplied. Is executed when is input.

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303 (S310) and performs initial processing when the power is turned on (S311). In this process, the payout CPU 301 resets the cause of stopping the overpayment and the payout motor abnormality. At this time, the number of retries for the specified number of overpayments (10), which will be described later, is also initialized.

Further, when a stop factor occurs due to the ball running out, the display by the payout state notification display device 178, which will be described later, is turned off for 2 seconds so as not to be affected by the accumulation state of the secured balls in the ball supply passage 171.

Specifically, the payout status notification display device 178 is used until the determination of ball out is completed when a predetermined initialization operation is performed when the drive of the payout motor 174 is stopped due to the above-mentioned stop factor. The result of the determination is not displayed for a second.

Thereby, for example, the ball out is determined after a predetermined initialization operation, and when it is determined to be normal, the payout status notification display device 178 can prevent the notification. As a result, unnecessary notification can be eliminated. The predetermined initialization operation referred to here is, for example, that the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpaid items, or the work area of the error information portion is performed without turning on the power again. The work area including one, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

Next, the payout CPU 301 performs the above-mentioned collateral ball monitoring initial setting process (S312) and executes the main process (S313).

When the power is turned on, the used register, interrupt state, and stack pointer are saved, and the excitation data of the payout motor 174 is forcibly set to 0 and switched to a low current.

If the power is cut off during the payout operation, it can be assumed that the origin (the number of steps is a multiple of 4) is not the origin. Therefore, by forcibly setting the excitation data to 0, the game ball can freely fall during the power cut. To prevent. Alternatively, the game ball is forcibly dropped at the time of power failure.

When the game ball is forcibly dropped at the time of power interruption, the power interruption process may be waited for or interrupted for a time required for the game ball to fall, and the execution period may be extended.

Further, instead of the case where the game ball is forcibly dropped, the game ball may be controlled to fall freely. In this case, in order to take a sufficient time to detect the free-falling game ball, the power interruption process may be waited for or interrupted, or the execution period may be extended.

[Main processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the main process performed in S313 during the power-on process (see FIG. 91) will be described. Note that FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process in the first embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the system timer of the payout CPU 301 is 4 or less (S321). In S321, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the system timer is not 4 or less (when the determination in S321 is NO), the payout CPU 301 returns the process to S321.

On the other hand, in S321, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the system timer is 4 or less (when the determination in S321 is YES), the payout CPU 301 subtracts "4" from the system timer (S322). In this process, the payout CPU 301 initializes the system timer.

That is, if the system timer is a timer that counts every 1 ms, the payout CPU 301 executes the processes after S323, which will be described later, every 4 ms by executing S321 and S322.

Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all the timers used in the main process (S323). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes the ball lending control process (S324). In this process, the payout CPU 301 manages the game ball, creates a command to be transmitted to the card unit 150, and receives the ball lending command transmitted from the card unit 150 when the lending operation unit 151 is operated. When this happens, the number of game balls to be rented is managed.

Next, the payout CPU 301 executes the prize ball control process (S325). In this process, the payout CPU 301 pays when the game ball wins the first start opening 44, the second start opening 45, the general winning openings 51, 52, the first big winning device 54, and the second big winning device 53. Manage the game balls to be put out.

Next, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout state notification display device 178 so that the payout control circuit 300 displays that an error has occurred, provided that an error has occurred in the payout control circuit 300 (S326).

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
Next, the system timer interrupt processing by the payout CPU 301 will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the system timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 interrupts the main process at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt process even during the execution of the main process shown in FIG. 92 described above.

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 performs system timer interrupt processing according to a clock pulse generated in a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 millisecond) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) in the payout control circuit 300. Run.

First, the payout CPU 301 receives the detection commands (signals) of the main control circuit 70 and various sensors, and executes a command reception process for analyzing the received commands at the same time (S331).

Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all the timers (for example, the first and second secured ball timers 306A, 306B, etc.) used in the system timer interrupt processing (S332). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a collateral ball presence detection process (see FIG. 94), which will be described later (S333).

Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a collateral-free detection process (see FIG. 95), which will be described later (S334). After that, the payout CPU 301 executes a counting switch detection process (see FIG. 96), which will be described later (S335). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a motor start waiting process (see FIG. 97), which will be described later (S336).

Finally, the payout CPU 301 executes a command transmission process of transmitting a command indicating the payout error information of the payout control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 70 (S337). For example, when a signal indicating that the lower plate is full is input from the lower plate full tank switch 179, the payout CPU 301 issues a payout error information command indicating that the lower plate is full. Send to 70.

However, since the main control circuit 70 holds the start-up waiting time of the sub control circuit 200 for the specified time (for example, 6 seconds) immediately after the power is turned on, the payout error information is until the main control circuit 70 can receive the information. Avoid sending commands.

Here, when the power is turned on, the history information regarding the payout error information is cleared. Further, even if the lower plate is full before the power failure and the lower plate is released by discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 during the power failure, the lower plate is released after the power failure is restored. No information is sent to the effect that the full tank has been released. However, the payout motor abnormality and the overpayment abnormality that are released when the power is turned on again are initialized when the power is restored.

[Detection processing with collateral ball]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the detection process with a secured ball performed in S333 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the detection process with a collateral ball in the first embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (S341). In S341, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (when the determination in S341 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A is It is determined that replenishment is not necessary, and the process is transferred to S347.

On the other hand, in S341, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is not 0 (when the determination in S341 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is a game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the replenishment of the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is necessary, and it is determined whether or not the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the ON state (S342).

In S342, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is not in the ON state (when the determination in S342 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number (embodiments) in the first ball supply passage 171A. In 1, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no collateral ball, and the process is moved to S347.

On the other hand, in S342, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the ON state (when the determination in S342 is YES), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number in the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that (15 in the first embodiment) game balls are accumulated, that is, there are collateral balls, and the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is subtracted by "1" (S343).

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (S344). In S344, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is not 0 (when the determination in S344 is NO), the payout CPU 301 replenishes the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. Is determined to be necessary and the process is moved to S347.

On the other hand, in S344, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (when the determination in S344 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays a game to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the ball supply is not necessary, and 1 is set in the first falling ball confirmation flag (S345).

Here, the first falling ball confirmation flag is set to "1" when it is not necessary to replenish the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A, that is, when there is a collateral ball, and the first ball supply passage is set to "1". This flag is set to "0" when the 171A needs to be replenished with a game ball, that is, when there is no collateral ball.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 0 to the first stop factor flag (S346).
Here, the first stop factor flag is a flag in which "0" or "1" is set depending on whether or not there is a factor (stop factor) for stopping the payout of the game ball by the prize ball case unit 170. Yes, in particular, regarding the payout of game balls accumulated (secured) in the first ball supply passage 171A, a flag is set to "1" when there is a stop factor, and is set to "0" when there is no stop factor. Is.

In the process of S346, it is determined in S344 that the supply of the game balls to the first ball supply passage 171A is completed and a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of the game balls are accumulated. Therefore, 0 is set in the first stop factor flag in the sense of canceling the ball out which is the stop factor. As the stopping factor, which will be described later, there are various stopping factors other than the ball out. Here, the ball runs out as an example.

Next, when S341 is a YES determination, S342 is a NO determination, or S344 is a NO determination, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (S347). ).

In S347, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (when the determination in S347 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B is Judging that replenishment is not necessary, the detection process with a collateral ball is terminated.

On the other hand, in S347, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0 (when the determination in S347 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is a game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the supply of the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is necessary, and it is determined whether or not the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the ON state (S348).

In S348, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is not in the ON state (when the determination in S348 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number (embodiments) in the second ball supply passage 171B. In 1, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no collateral ball, and the detection process with collateral balls is terminated.

On the other hand, in S348, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the ON state (when the determination in S348 is YES), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number in the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that (15 in the first embodiment) game balls are accumulated, that is, there are collateral balls, and the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is subtracted by "1" (S349).

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (S350). In S350, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0 (when the determination in S350 is NO), the payout CPU 301 replenishes the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. Is determined to be necessary, and the detection process with a collateral ball is terminated.

On the other hand, in S350, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (when the determination in S350 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays a game in the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the ball supply is not necessary, and 1 is set in the second falling ball confirmation flag (S351).

Here, the second falling ball confirmation flag is set to "1" when it is not necessary to replenish the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B, that is, when there is a collateral ball, and the second ball supply passage is set to "1". This flag is set to "0" when the 171B needs to be replenished with a game ball, that is, when there is no collateral ball.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 0 in the second stop factor flag (S352), and ends the detection process with a collateral ball. Here, the second stop factor flag is a flag in which "0" or "1" is set depending on whether or not there is a factor (stop factor) for stopping the payout of the game ball by the prize ball case unit 170. Yes, especially with regard to the payout of game balls accumulated (secured) in the second ball supply passage 171B, a flag is set to "1" when there is a stop factor, and is set to "0" when there is no stop factor. Is.

In the process of S352, it is determined in S350 that the supply of the game balls to the second ball supply passage 171B is completed and a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of the game balls are accumulated. Therefore, 0 is set in the second stop factor flag in the sense of canceling the ball out which is the stop factor.

In this way, in the collateral ball presence detection process, the collateral ball counter and the 15-ball collateral switch are used to determine the presence or absence of the collateral ball, the determination of the supply of the game ball, and the stop factor (of the payout motor, sprocket, or payout). Since it is possible to determine whether or not to cancel, it is possible to more accurately manage the collateral ball in the payout.

[Detection process without collateral ball]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the collateral-free detection process performed in S334 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the detection process without a collateral ball in the first embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is 0 (S361). In S361, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is not 0 (when the determination in S361 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is replenishing the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. Is determined, and the process is moved to S371.

On the other hand, in S361, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is 0 (when the determination in S361 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays a game to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the supply of balls is completed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (S362).

In S362, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (when the determination in S362 is YES), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number (implementation) in the first ball supply passage 171A. In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a collateral ball, and it is determined whether or not the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the OFF state (S363).

Here, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” each time the system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 93 is performed every 1 ms in S361 and S362, that is, the updated value of the first collateral ball timer 306A and the collateral. In S343 of the ball presence detection process (see FIG. 94), "1" is subtracted, that is, the value of the updated first collateral ball counter 305A is compared, and based on the comparison result, the game ball by the first sprocket 173A is used. It is determined whether or not to prohibit the withdrawal.

For example, when S361 is a YES determination and S362 is a YES determination, both the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A and the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A are 0 as predetermined values. Therefore, when 2000 ms, which is the initial value of the first secured ball timer 306A set as a sufficient time to pay out 15 game balls from the ball tank 161 has elapsed, the first secured ball counter This means that 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of 305A, has passed.

The initial value of the first collateral ball counter 305A, 1950 times (1950 ms), is a value that is not subtracted unless the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A detects a game ball. Therefore, when 2000 ms has elapsed (0). When 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of the first collateral ball counter 305A, becomes 0, 15 game balls are replenished in the first ball supply passage 171A. Is guaranteed.

On the other hand, when S361 is a YES determination and S362 is a NO determination, the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A becomes 0 when the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A becomes 0. It will not be.

That is, when 2000 ms, which is the initial value of the first secured ball timer 306A, has elapsed, 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of the first secured ball counter 305A, has not elapsed. From this, it can be estimated that there was a time when the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A did not detect the game ball, that is, there was a time when the supply of the game ball was interrupted before 2000 ms passed. Therefore, when S361 is a YES determination and S362 is a NO determination, it is determined that 15 game balls are not supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A.

The payout CPU 301 that performs a process of comparing the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A with the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A constitutes a determination means.

Next, in S363, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is not in the OFF state (when the determination in S363 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has 15 pieces in the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the game ball is replenished, and the process is moved to S371.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S363 that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the OFF state (when the determination in S363 is YES), the payout CPU 301 is once in the above-mentioned S361 and S362. Although it is guaranteed that 15 game balls are supplied to the ball supply passage 171A of 1, 15 game balls are not supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A for some reason, that is, It is determined that there is no collateral ball, and 0 is set in the first falling ball confirmation flag (S364).

Here, as a factor for determining YES in S363, for example, there is a case where the game ball is excessively paid out due to a malfunction of the first sprocket 173A or the payout motor 174. At this time, the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A is prohibited.

Here, when the game balls are excessively paid out, for example, as a result of the first sprocket 173A being excessively rotated, the number of game balls supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A is changed from 15 to 14. The first 15-ball collateral switch 172A detects that the game balls that have been reduced and supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A in connection with the paid-out game balls move in the direction of the first sprocket 173A. Since the game ball also moves in the direction of the first sprocket 173A, this is a case where the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is turned off.

That is, the payout CPU 301 pays out the game ball by the first sprocket 173A even if the value of the first mortgage ball counter 305A is 0 when the value of the first mortgage ball timer 306A is 0. If the game ball is not detected by the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A before, the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A through the drive of the payout motor 174 is prohibited.

In this way, the payout CPU 301 can grasp whether or not the game ball supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A exists, so that the payout management can be performed more accurately.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) as the monitoring time of the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the first collateral ball timer 306A (S365). When 2000 ms set here has elapsed, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and the payout status notification display device 178 notifies the user.

After that, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the number of times of monitoring the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the first collateral ball counter 305A (S366), and shifts the process to S371.

On the other hand, in S362, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is not 0 (when the determination in S362 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number (in the case of the first ball supply passage 171A). In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no collateral ball, and 1 is set in the first stop factor flag (S367).

In this process, as described above, since it was determined by S361 and S362 that 15 game balls were not supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A, in order to prohibit the payout of the game balls by the first sprocket 173A. , 1 is set in the first stop factor flag.

In other words, the payout CPU 301 is driven by the first sprocket 173A through the drive of the payout motor 174 when the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is not 0 when the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is 0. The payout of game balls is prohibited.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 1 (S368), and shifts the process to S371. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process of requesting the origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A.

Here, the origin of the first sprocket 173A is a rotation position (drive position) at which the game ball can be paid out to the first payout passage 180A when the first sprocket 173A is rotated. In the first embodiment, the number of steps of the payout motor 174 is controlled with reference to this origin.

When the first sprocket 173A stops due to some stopping factor (such as "error related to payout" described later), the index that causes the first sprocket 173A to grasp the rotation position of the position detection sensor (for example, the first sprocket 173A). ) Is not provided, so that the current rotation position (drive position) is unknown, that is, it is unknown how many steps the payout motor 174 is driven with respect to the origin. Therefore, the first sprocket 173A The origin may also be unknown.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, the origin adjustment control for grasping the origin of the first sprocket 173A when the first sprocket 173A is stopped based on the stop factor, that is, when the origin adjustment flag is set to 1. Is done. That is, the payout CPU 301 performs the origin adjustment control when it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited as described above. The same applies to the retry control described later.

By performing the origin adjustment control in this way, the origin position of the sprocket 173 can be adjusted. Therefore, for example, even a payout device using the sprocket 173 that does not have a position detection sensor can accurately pay out. Can be done.

In the first embodiment, the payout device in which the position detection sensor is not provided on the sprocket 173 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout device in which the position detection sensor is provided on the sprocket is not limited to this. By performing the origin adjustment control, it is possible to manage the position of the sprocket and the payout more accurately, so that the payout can be performed more accurately.

The origin adjustment flag is a flag that is set according to the presence or absence of a request for origin adjustment control, is set to "1" when there is a request for origin adjustment control, and is set to "1" when there is no request for origin adjustment control. This is a flag set to "0".

Specifically, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (4 steps in the first embodiment) until the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A. Here, the unit drive amount (4 steps in the first embodiment) described above is smaller than the payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment) described later.

Further, the unit drive amount (4 steps in the first embodiment) is a drive amount obtained by dividing the payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment) described later into four times (the number of origin request retries described later) as a specific number. Is.

Further, this origin adjustment control is a control common to the retry control described later. Therefore, even in the retry control, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (4 steps in the first embodiment) until the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A. Details will be described later. The payout CPU 301 that controls the drive of the payout motor 174 constitutes a control means and a drive control means.

Here, in the above-mentioned S367, 1 is set in the first stop factor flag in order to prohibit the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A, but when the origin adjustment control is required as described above, , The origin cannot be adjusted unless the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A is permitted.

The same applies to retry control. Therefore, in the first embodiment, even if it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited, the payout CPU 301 permits the payout of the game ball on the condition that the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the origin adjustment control (retry control) from being performed due to the prohibition of payout of the game ball.

Next, when S361 is a NO determination, when S363 is a NO determination, or after the end of S366 or after the end of S368, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B is 0. Determine (S371).

In S371, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is not 0 (when the determination in S371 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is replenishing the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that this is the case, and the detection process without a collateral ball is terminated.

On the other hand, in S371, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is 0 (when the determination in S371 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays a game to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the supply of balls is completed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (S372).

In S372, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (when the determination in S372 is YES), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number (implementation) in the second ball supply passage 171B. In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a collateral ball, and it is determined whether or not the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the OFF state (S373).

Here, the determination as to whether or not to prohibit the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B is the same as the determination as to whether or not to prohibit the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A described above. The explanation is omitted. The payout CPU 301 that performs a process of comparing the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B and the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B constitutes a determination means.

Next, in S373, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is not in the OFF state (when the determination in S373 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has 15 pieces in the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the game balls have been replenished, and the detection process without collateral balls is terminated.

On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S373 that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the OFF state (when the determination in S373 is YES), the payout CPU 301 is once in the above-mentioned S371 and S372. Although it is guaranteed that 15 game balls are supplied to the 2 ball supply passage 171B, 15 game balls are not supplied to the 2nd ball supply passage 171B for some reason, that is, It is determined that there is no collateral ball, and 0 is set in the second falling ball confirmation flag (S374).

Here, as a factor for determining YES in S373, for example, there is a case where the game ball is excessively paid out due to a malfunction of the second sprocket 173B or the payout motor 174. At this time, the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B is prohibited.

In other words, the payout CPU 301 pays out the game ball by the second sprocket 173B even if the value of the second mortgage ball counter 305B is 0 when the value of the second mortgage ball timer 306B is 0. If the game ball is not detected by the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B before the game is performed, the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B through the drive of the payout motor 174 is prohibited.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) as the monitoring time of the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the second collateral ball timer 306B (S375). When 2000 ms set here has elapsed, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and the payout status notification display device 178 notifies the user.

After that, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the number of times of monitoring the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the second collateral ball counter 305B (S376), and ends the no collateral ball detection process.

On the other hand, in S372, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is not 0 (when the determination in S372 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number in the second ball supply passage 171B (when the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is NO). In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no collateral ball, and 1 is set in the second stop factor flag (S377).

In this process, as described above, since it was determined by S371 and S372 that 15 game balls were not supplied to the second ball supply passage 171B, in order to prohibit the payout of the game balls by the second sprocket 173B. , 1 is set in the second stop factor flag.

In other words, when the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is 0 and the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0, the payout CPU 301 is driven by the second sprocket 173B through the drive of the payout motor 174. The payout of game balls is prohibited.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 1 (S378), and ends the detection process without a collateral ball. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process of requesting the origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B. Here, since the origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B is the same as the origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Counting switch detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the counting switch detection process performed in S335 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the counting switch detection process in the first embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of the game ball (S381). In S381, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has not detected the passage of the game ball (when the determination in S381 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is the counting switch. End the detection process.

Here, when the origin adjustment control is in progress, the game ball is not yet detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B, so that S381 is determined as NO.

On the other hand, in S381, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of the game ball (when the determination in S381 is YES), the payout CPU 301 is the first. It is determined that the game ball has been paid out by the sprocket 173A or the second sprocket 173B of the above, and the number of requested payouts is subtracted by "1" (S382).

Further, at this time, the payout CPU 301 can count the number of game balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B. Therefore, the payout CPU 301 constitutes a counting means.

Here, the payout request number is a prize ball control command or lending that is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and received by the payout control circuit 300 based on the winning of the game machine or the lending of the game ball to various starting ports and various winning ports. It is a value obtained by sequentially adding the number of prize balls or the number of rented balls based on the ball control signal, and is the total number of game balls to be paid out by the prize ball case unit 170 (total amount to be paid out).

The number of requested payouts is stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. The number of prize balls and the number of rented balls mentioned above correspond to the amount to be paid out. Further, the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300 constitutes a payout storage means. Further, the number of requested payouts is subtracted when the game balls are paid out.

Next, the payout CPU 301 subtracts "1" from the number of drop requests (S383). Here, the number of drop requests is determined as the number of game balls to be paid out by one drive of the payout motor 174 based on the number of payout requests (total amount of payouts) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. The maximum number is 15.

For example, if the number of payout requests (total payout amount) is 15 or more, the drop request number is 15, and if the payout request number (total payout amount) is 14 or less, the drop request number is The number is the same as the number of memorized payout requests.

Further, the number of dropped requests is determined by the payout CPU 301 according to the number of payout requests (total amount of payouts). The required number of drops corresponds to the amount to be paid out separately. Further, the payout CPU 301 corresponds to a delimited payout amount determining means.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S384). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S384 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1, (when the determination in S384 is NO), the payout CPU 301 shifts the process to S387.

On the other hand, in S384, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (when the determination in S384 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S385).

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S386). Here, the origin adjustment completion flag is a flag for determining whether the origin adjustment control is in progress or the origin adjustment control is completed, and is set to "0" when the origin adjustment control is in progress, and the origin adjustment control is completed. When it is, it is a flag set to "1".

Next, when the determination in S364 is NO, or after the end of S386, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of dropped requests is less than 0 (S387). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S387 that the number of dropped requests is not less than 0 (when the determination in S387 is NO), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

On the other hand, in S387, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of drop requests is less than 0 (when the determination in S387 is YES), the payout CPU 301 has an excess of game balls actually paid out with respect to the number of drop requests. It is determined that the result is, and the number of overpaid items is added by "1" (S388).

Here, the number of overpay balls is the number of game balls that exceed the number of game balls actually paid out with respect to the number of balls requested to fall, that is, the number of game balls requested to fall when overpayment occurs. For example, if the number of drop requests is 15, but the number of game balls actually paid out is 16, one game ball is overpaid, so the number of overpay balls is increased. "1" is added.

The payout CPU 301 adds the above-mentioned overpay numbers to the total number of game balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B (the total number of game balls actually paid out). ) And the number of payout requests, which can be stored in the RAM 303.

Therefore, the RAM 303 constitutes a difference storage means. The number of overpays is accumulated in the RAM 303 until a predetermined initialization operation is performed. Examples of the predetermined initialization operation referred to here include turning on the power again.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303, but the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpaid items, or the work area of the error information portion by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121) without turning on the power again. The work area including the above, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of overpaid items is 10 or more (S389). In other words, the payout CPU 301 compares the total number of game balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B (the total number of game balls actually paid out) with the number of payout requests. , It is determined whether or not the difference (total number of overpay pieces) is 10 or more.

In S389, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of overpayments is not 10 or more (when the determination in S389 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has an allowable range (allowable value) for the number of game balls related to overpayment. It is determined that the value is inside, and the counting switch detection process is terminated.

On the other hand, in S389, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of overpayments is 10 or more (when the determination in S389 is YES), the payout CPU 301 does not have the number of game balls related to overpayment within the permissible range (allowable). It is determined that the value is equal to or higher than the value), the overpay flag is set to 1 (S390), and the counting switch detection process is terminated.

Here, the overpay flag is a flag for determining whether or not the number of game balls related to overpayment is within the permissible range (allowable value), and the number of game balls related to overpayment is within the permissible range. When is, it is set to 0, and when the number of game balls related to overpayment is not within the permissible range (greater than or equal to the permissible value), it is set to 1.

Further, when the overpay flag is set to 1, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout motor 174 so as to stop the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B until the above-mentioned predetermined initialization operation is performed. ..

[Motor start waiting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the motor start waiting process performed in S336 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor start waiting process in the first embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S401). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S401 that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 (NO in S401), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is in progress and shifts the process to S406.

On the other hand, in S401, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (when the determination in S401 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been completed, and the first Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second stop factor flag is 1 (S402).

In S402, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (when the determination in S402 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and starts the motor. End the wait process.

On the other hand, in S402, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or the second stop factor flag is 1 (when the determination in S402 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1. (S403).

In S403, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or the second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S403 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no collateral ball and the motor. Ends the startup waiting process.

On the other hand, in S403, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S403 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball and pays out. It is determined whether or not the requested number is greater than 0 (S404).

If the payout CPU 301 determines in S404 that the number of payout requests is not greater than 0 (NO in S404), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request and ends the motor start waiting process.

On the other hand, in S404, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is larger than 0 (when the determination in S404 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request, and performs the motor start initial processing described later (FIG. 98) is executed (S405).

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S406). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S406 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (when the determination in S406 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for origin adjustment control, and shifts the process to S407. Therefore, when the determination in S406 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

On the other hand, in S406, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (when the determination in S406 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for origin adjustment control, and the number of retries is 12 or more. It is determined whether or not it is large, that is, whether or not the origin adjustment control is performed 12 times (S408). Therefore, when the determination in S406 is YES, the origin adjustment control is performed.

Here, the number of retries is the number of times the origin adjustment control is performed, and more specifically, it is a value added every time the number of motor operations described later is updated. In the origin adjustment control, the drive amount required to pay out one game ball to the sprocket 173 and then to pay out the next game ball, that is, the drive amount required to pay out one game ball (payout drive amount). Since the payout motor 174 is driven only, the payout drive amount required to pay out this one game ball (in the first embodiment, 16 steps = unit drive amount (4 steps) x 4 times (origin request retry count)). ) Was set to the number of motors operating = 1. Here, the unit drive amount as the excitation data is 4 steps × 5 ms.

Therefore, every time one motor operation number is set (updated) in S410 described later, the number of retries is added assuming that the origin adjustment control is completed once. As described above, since the origin adjustment control is the same control as the retry control, the number of retries can be said to be the number of times the retry control is performed.

In this way, the payout CPU 301 updates the number of motor operations as a retry value on the condition that the drive amount of the payout motor 174 reaches the payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment).

The payout CPU 301 that updates the number of operating motors constitutes a retry value updating means. Further, the payout CPU 301 manages the number of times the number of motor operations is updated, the number of times the excitation data is set, that is, the number of retries, as the number of times the origin adjustment control (retry control) is performed.

In the first embodiment, three grooves for receiving the game balls are formed in each sprocket so that three game balls are paid out for each rotation of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B. There is.

Therefore, when the number of motors operated is updated 6 times, the drive amount is such that the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B each rotate once (in the first embodiment, 96 steps = 16 steps (unit drive amount (4)). Step) × 4 times (origin request retry count)) × 6 times (half of 12 retries)) means that the payout motor 174 is driven.

Therefore, when the number of retries is larger than 12, the driving amount for two rotations of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B (in the first embodiment, 192 steps = 96 steps (driving amount for only one rotation) × It means that the payout motor 174 was driven with a drive amount exceeding (twice). The number of retries of 12 times is the upper limit number of retries control with 16 steps (unit drive amount (4 steps) x 4 times) as one set.

In S408, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is larger than 12 (when the determination in S408 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of origin adjustment controls has reached the upper limit (12 times). Then, the processing is transferred to S407.

At this time, in the payout CPU 301, the play ball is not detected by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B, and the drive amount of the payout motor 174 exceeds 192 steps (upper limit drive amount), or the number of retries is increased. On condition that the number of times exceeds 12 times (upper limit number of times), the drive of the payout motor 174 is controlled so as to stop the payout of the game ball until a predetermined initialization operation is performed. As a result, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is completed. Examples of the predetermined initialization operation referred to here include turning on the power again.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpaid items, or the work area of the error information portion is performed without turning on the power again. The work area including one, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

In S407, the payout CPU 301 sets the start state of the payout motor 174 (S407), and shifts the process to S414. In this process, when the determination in S406 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed, so the acceleration state of the payout motor 174 according to the number of dropped requests is set so that the normal game ball is paid out. If S408 is determined to be YES, the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state in order to stop the payout of the game ball.

On the other hand, in S408, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is not greater than 12 (when the determination in S408 is NO), the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value by 4 steps in preparation for the next origin adjustment control. (S409). In this process, four steps are set as the unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 when the origin adjustment control is executed.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of motors to be operated to one (S410), and sets the number of origin request retries to four (S411). In this process, the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball is obtained by multiplying the four steps set as the step counter mask value in S409 described above by the four times set as the number of origin request retries. 16 steps are set.

Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer and sets it to 0 (S412). Here, the falling ball monitoring timer determines whether or not there is a falling ball and whether or not a stop factor has occurred after driving the payout motor 174 with excitation data for a unit drive amount (4 steps) in the origin adjustment control. It is a timer that measures the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms in the origin adjustment control).

The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is an excitation data retention period (in the first embodiment) as a retention period for maintaining the postures of the first and second sprockets 171A and 171B after driving the payout motor 174 for four steps. 30 ms) and a cooling period (100 ms in the origin adjustment control) for cooling the payout motor 174.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to "0" (S413). Next, after the end of S407 or after the end of S413, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S414), and ends the motor start waiting process.

In this process, for example, when the origin adjustment control is performed, the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball is 16 steps (unit drive amount (4 steps) x 4 times (origin request retry count)). Set the excitation data. Further, in the case of paying out the normal game balls, the excitation data for a predetermined step is set as the driving amount required to pay out the game balls corresponding to the required number of drops.
When the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state so that the payout of the game ball is stopped, the excitation data is set to 0.

[Initial processing for starting the motor]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the motor start initial process performed in S405 during the motor start wait process (see FIG. 97) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor start initial processing in the first embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of drop requests from the number of payout requests (S421).
In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers are set according to the payout request number (total payout amount). For example, when the number of requested payouts (total amount of payouts) is 20, the number of requested drops is set to 15. On the other hand, when the number of payout requests (total amount of payouts) is 10, the number of drop requests is set to 10 which is the same as the number of payout requests.

Next, the payout CPU 301 performs a collateral ball monitoring setting process (S422). In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of ON detection monitoring times in the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B according to the number of dropped requests.

For example, when the number of dropped requests is 9 to 10, 650 times (650 ms) are set as the number of ON detection monitoring times. Further, the payout CPU 301 sets the monitoring time in the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B according to the number of dropped requests. For example, when the number of requested drops is 9 to 10, 850 ms is set as the monitoring time.

Here, the above-mentioned ON detection monitoring number and monitoring time are the initial values of the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, which are set in the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process of S312 during the power-on processing of FIG. , The initial values of the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B are different.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets "0" in the first and second falling ball confirmation flags, respectively (S423). After that, the payout CPU 301 initializes the number of retries (S424) and sets the origin adjustment completion flag to "1" (S425).

Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer and sets it to 0 (S426). The falling ball monitoring timer cleared here drives the payout motor 174 with excitation data for the amount of drive required to pay out the required number of drops in normal payout control in which origin adjustment control or retry control is not executed. This is a timer that measures the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms in normal payout control) for monitoring whether or not there are as many falling balls as the number of falling balls requested and whether or not a stop factor has occurred.

The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) here is composed of an excitation data holding period (30 ms in the first embodiment) and a cooling period of the payout motor 174 (470 ms in normal payout control). This falling ball monitoring time corresponds to a certain period.

Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the step counter and sets it to 0 (S427).
Here, the step counter is a counter that counts the number of steps of the payout motor 174.

For example, when the number of requested drops is 15, the value of the step counter becomes the value for 240 steps when the drop operation of the 15 game balls, that is, the payout operation is completed. In this process, the payout CPU 301 clears, for example, the values for 240 steps counted as described above.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 16 steps (S428), and ends the motor start initial process. As a result, 16 steps are set as the number of steps of the payout motor 174 required to pay out one game ball.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 to 110, the characteristic portion related to the payout control in the first embodiment will be described in detail.

FIG. 99 is a time chart showing the excitation method of the payout motor 174 of the first embodiment. The payout motor 174 adopts a two-phase excitation method and a method capable of switching between a high current and a low current.

As shown in FIG. 99, the payout CPU 301 rotates the payout motor 174 in the forward direction by changing the excitation data in the order of t1, t2, t3, and t4. However, in the first embodiment, the payout motor 174 is structurally unable to rotate in the reverse direction.

Here, the origin is the position where both "A-" and "B-" of the payout motor 174 are on. In addition, "A + and B + (indicated by" S "in the figure)" of the payout motor 174 represent on / off by soft control, and "A- and B- (indicated by" H "in the figure)" are soft. Indicates on / off by logical inversion of output.

However, in the first embodiment, since the detection means such as the index sensor as in the conventional case is not provided, it is necessary to perform phase matching between the apparent origin (excitation data 0) and the structural origin. Such phase matching of the origin is origin adjustment, and controlling the payout motor 174 to perform phase matching is called origin adjustment control.

The origin adjustment control is performed by utilizing the first payout operation when the first payout request is made when the origin adjustment is required (when there is a target factor of the origin adjustment). For example, the origin adjustment control is performed by utilizing the payout operation of the first game ball of the number of drop requests at the time of the first payout request after the power is turned on.

Here, the payout request is made from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300, and specifically, is transmitted to the payout control circuit 300 as prize ball control data including information such as the number of payout requests. .. As shown in FIG. 100, the payout control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control data from the main control circuit 70 by interrupting reception.

On the other hand, when an error occurs in the payout of the game ball, the payout control circuit 300 transmits the payout error information data to the main control circuit 70 as shown in FIG. 101.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 are unilaterally communicated with each other, but as shown in FIG. 102, the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit are unilaterally communicated with each other. The 300 may communicate with each other.

Here, when the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 communicate with each other, a serial communication method is used as the most desirable form, but the method is not limited to the serial communication method, and is not limited to the serial communication method. Various communication methods such as are available.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103, after the payout control circuit 300 detects an error by self-diagnosis, the payout control circuit 300 uses a serial communication method to transmit error information including the payout control error information described later to the main control circuit 70.

At this time, the minimum transmission interval for error transmission from the payout control circuit 300 is set to a predetermined time (12 ms in the first embodiment), and when the error information changes continuously, as shown in S337. By using the command transmission process that can be executed every 1 ms, the error information is not transmitted to the main control circuit 70 every time the error information changes, but as shown in FIG. 103, the error information is synthesized. Is performed, and error information is transmitted after the minimum transmission interval or the minimum transmission interval has elapsed.

Further, as a method of synthesizing error information, as shown in FIG. 104, each bit value of parameter 1 and parameter 2 composed of 8 bits is updated or changed, and error information is transmitted.

At this time, when the main control circuit 70 receives the parameter 1 and the parameter 2 as the error information, the main control circuit 70 masks each parameter and acquires the error information (payout control error information).

The management of the error information in the payout control circuit 300, the management of the error information in the main control circuit 70, and the management of the error information in the sub control circuit 200 are as shown in FIG. 105.

FIG. 105 shows an error information notification mode in the payout control circuit 300, an error information notification mode in the main control circuit 70, and an error information notification mode in the sub control circuit 200.

Specifically, the lower plate full tank state in the payout control circuit 300 is recognized by the main control circuit 70 as the lower plate full tank detection, and the sub control circuit 200 is based on the error information transmitted from the main control circuit 70. Notify "Please pull out the ball" via the liquid crystal display device 13.

Further, regarding the payout control circuit 300, regarding the ball out 1 state, the ball out 2 state, the motor abnormality state, the VL unconnected state, the CR side communication abnormality, the overpayment abnormality, the payout ball jam, the reception command abnormality, the reception abnormality and the communication error. Is recognized as a payout abnormality detection in the main control circuit 70, and based on the payout error information transmitted from the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit notifies "Please call a staff member" via the liquid crystal display device 13.

As described above, the main control circuit 70 manages a plurality of error information related to the payout control to be transmitted by dividing them into two types, "lower plate full error information" and "other information".

By transmitting and receiving such error information, in an environment where the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 are communicating with each other serially, error reports are continuously generated at the minimum transmission interval of the payout control circuit 300. Even if it changes to (it can also be expressed as error information or multiple errors have occurred), it is possible to synthesize error information.

Therefore, the payout control circuit 300 does not transmit the error information after the main control circuit 70 requests the transmission of the error information (or after some transmission request is made), but the minimum transmission of the payout control circuit 300. It is possible to transmit error information at intervals or at predetermined time intervals.

Further, although the error information (payout control error information) has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and various commands can be combined as the command composition.

Next, the prize ball control process in the first embodiment will be described. In this prize ball control process, at least the above-mentioned origin adjustment control, normal payout control, and retry control are performed. First, the origin adjustment control in the prize ball control process will be described.

As described above, the origin adjustment control is executed when the target factor of the origin adjustment occurs. Here, the target factors when performing the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control process are when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped, when the power is turned on, when the power is restored, and when an underpayment occurs after the origin adjustment control is completed. This includes when the suspension factor is canceled, when the payout abnormality factor is canceled, and when overpay occurs.

When underpayment occurs after the origin adjustment control is completed, for example, when the payout motor 174 is out of step, or a predetermined number of game balls (15 in the first embodiment) are not secured in the ball supply passage 171. In spite of this, there is a case where the 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects a game ball due to a short circuit and an intermittent state occurs.

The origin adjustment control when the stop factor is released is performed, for example, as a response to the backflow of the game ball when the lower plate full tank switch 179 is short-circuited. Further, the origin adjustment control at the time of canceling the payout abnormality factor is performed as a response when the origin is physically displaced due to, for example, disconnection, short circuit, or radio wave irradiation. Further, the origin adjustment control when overpay occurs is performed in consideration of the subsequent step-out of the payout motor 174.

In the origin adjustment control, as described above, when the payout motor 174 is driven in 16 steps, one game ball can be dropped (paid out), so that the unit drive amount is 4 steps x 5 ms. The time when the falling ball confirmation is completed within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms = excitation data retention period 30 ms + cooling period 100 ms) is regarded as the physical origin (origin adjustment completed). If the falling ball cannot be confirmed within the falling ball monitoring time, the payout motor 174 as described above is driven for 16 steps in units of 4 steps.

However, if the falling ball cannot be detected even if the payout motor 174 is driven for 16 steps, it is judged that normal payout is not performed (or it may be judged that there is a stop factor). The drive of the payout motor 174 in units of 4 steps is repeated for 2 rotations.

Further, "repeating the driving of the payout motor 174 for two rotations" means that the starting point is the state of the payout motor 174 or the position of the sprocket 173 at the time when it is determined that the falling ball cannot be detected even if the payout motor 174 is driven. (Or, as the rotation start position), for example, when 48 steps are required for the motor to make one rotation, it is shown that the drive for 96 steps is performed.

This can be expressed as equivalent to a drive capable of dropping 12 balls, and is a drive (or a rotation drive, or a rotation angle equivalent) of a payout motor 174 or a sprocket 173 capable of dropping a predetermined number of game balls. It can also be expressed that driving) is performed.

The origin adjustment control is completed when a falling ball is detected, but if the falling ball is not counted as a paid out game ball, it will be overpaid. Therefore, it is necessary to count the falling ball when the origin adjustment control is completed as the paid-out game ball.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 subtracts one drop request number to 14 on the condition that the falling ball is detected by the counting switch 181 while the origin adjustment control is being executed. As a result, when the origin adjustment control is completed, the remaining number of drop requests (14) excluding one is paid out with respect to the number of drop requests. After that, the normal payout operation is executed.

FIG. 106 is a timing chart of the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 106, when the stop factor is released after the power is turned on again and then a payout request is generated, the origin adjustment control is executed, and the excitation data for 4 steps × 5 ms is first executed. The payout motor 174 is driven for 4 steps based on the above. At this time, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched from a low current to a high current when the origin adjustment control is started.

After that, when the driving of the payout motor 174 for four steps is completed, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period). Then, when the excitation data retention period elapses, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a low current, and then the current is maintained at a low current for 100 ms (cooling period).

Further, the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is composed of 30 ms (excitation data retention period) and 100 ms (cooling period). The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) can be calculated based on the free fall theoretical formula.

After that, when the falling ball is detected by the second counting switch 181B within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms), the number of dropped balls requested, which was three at the start of the origin adjustment, is updated to two. In addition, the origin adjustment control is completed by detecting the falling sphere, and the phase shift from the structural origin is eliminated.

FIG. 107 is a timing chart of the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment is not completed using the prize ball control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 107, if the operation of driving the payout motor 174 for 4 steps (this is called an origin adjustment cycle) based on the excitation data for 4 steps × 5 ms described above is performed only once, the falling ball is generated. If it cannot be detected, the same origin adjustment cycle is repeated up to 16 steps. That is, after the origin adjustment control is started, the origin adjustment cycle is repeated a total of four times.

However, if the falling ball cannot be detected even after the four origin adjustment cycles are performed, the four origin adjustment cycles are performed again. Here, the period during which the first four origin adjustment cycles are performed is referred to as a basic retry operation period. The origin adjustment cycle is a unit drive amount (4 steps) × 5 ms, and the basic retry operation period is a unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times (origin request retry count). In FIG. 107, the operation started when the counting switch counting switch 181 falling ball is not detected during the basic retry operation period is defined as the origin adjustment retry, but the origin adjustment retry is not limited to this, and the basic retry operation period is defined. The mode of repeating up to the upper limit number of times may be an origin adjustment retry.

FIG. 108 is a timing chart of the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process, that is, the normal payout operation. Further, FIG. 108 is a timing chart exemplifying a payout operation when paying out 15 game balls.

As shown in FIG. 108, when 15 pieces are first determined as the number of drop requests, the drive amount of the payout motor 174 is determined by the payout CPU 301 based on the determined number of drop requests (15 pieces). Specifically, the excitation data required for paying out 15 game balls is determined. The payout CPU 301 that determines the drive amount of the payout motor 174 constitutes a drive amount determination means.

Next, when the excitation data required for paying out 15 game balls is set, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a high current, and the payout motor 174 is driven based on the set excitation data. The excitation data at this time is set so that the payout motor 174 gradually accelerates to a steady state, and then decelerates and stops.

After that, when the driving of the payout motor 174 based on the set excitation data is completed, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data retention period as a retention period). Then, when the excitation data retention period elapses, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a low current, and then the current is maintained at a low current for 470 ms (cooling period).

Further, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is composed of 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 470 ms (cooling period). During this falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the drive of the payout motor 174 is stopped. Further, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) at this time is different from the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) during the origin adjustment control.

Then, during the above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the payout CPU 301 monitors whether or not the fall of the game balls corresponding to the number of requested drops (15) can be confirmed. That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the game balls corresponding to the number of requested drops (15) are detected through the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B during the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms). The payout CPU 301 that makes such a determination constitutes a payout determination means.

In the payout CPU 301, when it is not possible to confirm that the number of falling balls (15) has fallen during the above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), that is, the number of game balls corresponding to the requested number of falls (15) is the first. If it is determined that the detection is not detected through the second counting switches 181A and 181B, it is determined that a stop factor has occurred, and the idle state is shifted to stop the subsequent drive of the payout motor 174. As a result, the payout operation cannot be continuously performed.

On the other hand, even if it is confirmed that the number of game balls requested to fall (15) has fallen during the above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the idle state is entered in preparation for the subsequent payout operation.

Here, the excitation data according to the number of dropped requests in the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process is as shown in FIG. 109. For example, when the number of requested drops is 5 to 15, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the excitation data is obtained by performing the acceleration state and the deceleration state for two game balls, respectively.

FIG. 109 (b) shows the case where the number of dropped requests is 4, FIG. 109 (c) shows the case where the number of dropped requests is 3, and FIG. 109 (d) shows the case where the number of dropped requests is 2. (E) represents the excitation data when the number of requested drops is one. The above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is provided regardless of the number of dropped balls requested.

FIG. 110 is a timing chart of the payout operation when a retry operation is required during the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process. Further, FIG. 110 is a timing chart exemplifying a payout operation when paying out five game balls.

As shown in FIG. 110, when the payout operation of the requested number of drops (5 pieces) is executed, if the game ball related to the fourth payout is not detected by the second counting switch 181B, the ball falls. When the ball monitoring time (500 ms) elapses, one is insufficient for the number of dropped balls (5). As a result, it is determined that the payout CPU 301 cannot confirm the fall of the game balls for the required number of drops (5) within the fall ball monitoring time (500 ms).

In this way, when the number of game balls paid out is insufficient for the required number of drops (5 pieces), the origin adjustment retry operation similar to the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment is not completed shown in FIG. 107 occurs. The operation is performed. Since the content of this origin adjustment retry operation is the same as that shown in FIG. 107, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the error processing in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 115.

Examples of the error related to the payout of the game ball in the first embodiment include (1) overpayment, (2) jamming of the payout ball, (3) full tank of the lower plate, (4) out of ball, and (5) abnormality of the payout motor. .. When at least one of these errors occurs, the error is notified via the payout status notification display device 178 (see FIG. 33). Each of these errors will be described in detail below.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a payout status notification display device 178. As shown in FIG. 111, the payout status notification display device 178 includes seven segments a to g and an eighth segment DP. One of these segments a to g and DP is lit according to the error type and the like.

For example, (1) when notifying an overpayment error, the segment b lights up, (2) when notifying an error of payout ball clogging, the segment d lights up, and (3) the lower plate. When notifying a full tank error, the segment f lights up, (4) when notifying an error of running out of balls, the segment e lights up, and (5) when notifying a payout motor abnormality. Lights up the segment c.

The DP segment lights up when notifying that the ball is being lent.
Therefore, the hall manager can easily determine what kind of error has occurred by visually recognizing the lighting state of the segment of the payout status notification display device 178.

First, (1) overpayment is not a stop factor even if it occurs, and is an error that allows the payout operation to be continued. As shown in FIG. 112, the trigger for notifying the error of the overpayment is that the number of game balls overpaid after the payout of the requested number of drops is completed is equal to or more than the specified number of overpayments (10 in the first embodiment). It's the timing.

In FIG. 112, the payout detection signal A is a signal indicating whether or not the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A, and is turned on when the game ball is detected. Similarly, the payout detection signal B is a signal indicating whether or not the game ball is detected by the second counting switch 181B.

In addition, this overpayment error is cleared when the power is turned on again. That is, the trigger for canceling the overpayment error is when the power is turned on again. At this time, the notification of the overpayment error is also canceled.

Next, (2) payout ball clogging is an error based on a stop factor caused by, for example, ball clogging due to backflow of a game ball, adhesion of dust or foreign matter, or disconnection or short circuit of the counting switch 181. As shown in FIG. 113, for example, when the payout detection signal A of the first counting switch 181A is turned on and does not turn off even after 100 ms has passed, the payout ball is clogged, that is, a stop factor has occurred. Is judged. When it is determined that this stop factor has occurred, it is used as a trigger for notifying the error of the payout ball clogging.

When the counting switch 181 is short-circuited, the payout control circuit 300 cannot directly determine the presence or absence of the short-circuit, so that it cannot be used as a stop factor until the retry operation of the origin adjustment control for 12 times described above is completed. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined that the stop factor has occurred with the lapse of the falling ball monitoring time after the retry operation of the origin adjustment control for 12 times is completed.

Further, when the payout control circuit 300 can recognize or determine the short circuit of the counting switch 181 by constantly monitoring the change in the voltage that can occur between the payout control circuit 300 and the counting switch 181, an error occurs without performing the trial operation. The notification may be performed, or the retry operation may be started at the same time as the error notification is performed.

Further, the notification of the error of the payout ball clogging is released by removing each factor such as the ball clogging due to the backflow, the adhesion of dust, the mixing of foreign matter, and the disconnection / short circuit of the counting switch 181.

Next, (3) the lower plate is full is an error based on a stop factor that occurs when the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 are full. As shown in FIG. 114, for example, when the lower plate full tank switch 179 is not turned off even after 1 second has passed since it was turned on, it is determined that a stop factor based on the lower plate full tank has occurred. When it is determined that this stop factor has occurred, it is the trigger for notifying the error that the lower plate is full.

Further, the notification of the error of the lower plate full tank is canceled by discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 in the full tank state.

Next, (4) when the ball is out, for example, when it is detected by the 15-ball collateral switch 172 that the collateral ball is insufficient, or when the game ball is waiting to be replenished to the ball tank 161, the ball supply passage 171 This is an error based on a stop factor that occurs when a ball is clogged or the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is in a disconnected state.

Such a ball out error is determined by the first stop factor flag or the second stop factor flag based on the comparison result between the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B and the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B described above. It occurs when the stop factor flag of is set to 1.

The trigger for notifying this ball-out error is when the above-mentioned stop factor occurs. In addition, this error of ball out is caused by replenishing the ball tank 161 with game balls or removing the game balls causing the ball clogging, so that a predetermined number (15) of game balls are sent to the ball supply passage 171. Is released by being secured. At this time, the notification of the ball out error is also canceled.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115, (5) the payout motor abnormality is caused by executing 12 retry operations based on, for example, the origin adjustment cycle, and the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) in the 12th retry operation has elapsed. Is also an error based on the stopping factor caused by not being able to confirm the falling ball.

The causes of such a stop factor include, for example, when a sticky game ball sticks to the sprocket 173 and does not separate, when a ball bites between the sprocket 173 and the storage ball (motor rotation failure), or a foreign substance. There is a case where step-out occurs due to a non-rotating state of the motor (only the excitation data is updated) such as mixing.

As shown in FIG. 115, the trigger for notifying the payout motor abnormality is when the above-mentioned stop factor occurs. Further, this payout motor abnormality is canceled when the power is turned on again. That is, the trigger for canceling the payout motor abnormality is when the power is turned on again. At this time, the notification of the payout motor abnormality is also canceled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the reception process of the payout control circuit 300 at the time of power failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 116, when an XINT interrupt (power interruption) occurs as a non-maskable interrupt prior to the reception interrupt on the payout control circuit 300 side, the received data is polled in the XINT interrupt to 1 byte. Relieve.

Further, assuming that a power failure occurs immediately after writing to the transmission buffer by the main control circuit 70, the payout control circuit 300 can receive after a delay of the baud rate time even during the processing of the XINT interrupt. As such, it is preferable to consider the elapsed time for receiving within the XINT interrupt. However, it is a condition that the XINT of the power interruption processing of the payout control circuit 300 does not occur electrically before the main control circuit 70.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the values of the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B (first values), respectively, on condition that the payout of the game balls is started. And the values (second value) of the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B are updated.

Therefore, if the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B continuously detect the game ball after the payout of the game ball is started, when the first value becomes 0, The second value, which is smaller than the first value, is already 0. In this case, it is guaranteed that the game balls are replenished according to the payout of the game balls.

On the other hand, if the second value is not 0 when the first value becomes 0, it means that the game balls are not replenished according to the payout of the game balls for some reason.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, by comparing the updated first value and the second value, whether or not the gaming balls are correctly replenished according to the payout of the gaming balls. Can be judged.

As a result, as compared with the case where it is determined whether or not the game ball is being replenished based on the presence or absence of detection of the game ball by, for example, the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B, the first and second It is possible to accurately manage and guarantee the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passages 171A and 171B.

Further, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment prohibits the payout of game balls when the first value is 0 and the second value is not 0, the first and second ball supply passages 171A , 171B can be confirmed for the presence or absence of abnormalities related to the supply of game balls. Thereby, the security regarding the supply and withdrawal of the game ball can be further improved.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, even when the second value becomes 0 when the first value is 0 and it is once guaranteed that the gaming balls have been replenished. After that, before the game balls are paid out, the game balls are excessively paid out due to, for example, a defect of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, and the game balls are paid out in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B. When the number of game balls is reduced, the payout of game balls can be prohibited.

As a result, the game balls in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B can be managed more accurately, and the security regarding the supply and withdrawal of the game balls can be further improved.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment executes retry control for driving the payout motor 174 in units of unit drive amounts (4 steps) until the game balls are detected by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B. Therefore, for example, a retry operation for eliminating ball biting can be performed without providing a slit sensor or the like for detecting the drive positions of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B.

Further, when such a retry operation is performed, the drive positions of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B when the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B detect the game ball are adjusted as the origin. Therefore, the origins of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B can be adjusted without using a slit sensor or the like.

In this way, since the retry operation can be used not only when the ball is bitten but also when the origin is adjusted, the retry control can be given versatility, and as a result, the processing by the payout CPU 301 can be simplified. ..

Further, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is not provided with the slit sensor or the like, the pachinko gaming machine can be configured simply and at low cost.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the unit drive amount (4 steps) of the payout motor 174 when the retry control is executed causes the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B to pay out one game ball. Since it is less than the payout drive amount (16 steps) required to pay out the next game ball, the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B are divided into a plurality of times in order to pay out one game ball. Can be driven. As a result, for example, when ball biting or the like occurs, it can be eliminated, and when adjusting the origin, it can be adjusted to an accurate origin.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, since the unit drive amount (4 steps) described above is the drive amount obtained by dividing the payout drive amount (16 steps) into four times, when paying out one game ball. The number of times the payout motor 174 is driven can be divided into a plurality of times.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the game ball is not detected by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B and the driving amount of the payout motor 174 exceeds the upper limit driving amount (192 steps). The payout means can be stopped until the initialization operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize ball case unit 170 from malfunctioning due to repeated excessive retry operations.

Further, since the payout motor 174 is stopped until the initialization operation is performed, the payout motor 174 is stopped so that, for example, there are no game balls accumulated in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B. It is possible to urge that the prize ball case unit 170 and thus the pachinko gaming machine 1 need to be returned from the abnormal state.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs the origin adjustment control (retry control) when it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited, that is, when the stop factor flag is set to 1, so that some abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the driving of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B is stopped, the retry operation can be performed without fail.

In this way, by performing the retry operation in conjunction with the drive stop of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, the processing can proceed smoothly as compared with the case where the retry operation is performed alone.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment executes a retry operation in the origin adjustment control (retry control) until the game balls are detected by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B, and the number of motors operated. Is managed as the number of retries (the number of retries), so it is possible to reliably determine how many times the retries have been performed regardless of whether the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B have detected the game ball. , And can be easily grasped. Further, the number of retry operations can be reliably and easily grasped even if the slit sensor or the like is not provided. As a result, the retry operation can be smoothly managed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the game ball is not detected by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B and the number of retries exceeds the upper limit number (12 times), the origin adjustment control (retry) is performed. Since the control) is terminated, it is possible to prevent the prize ball case unit 170 from malfunctioning due to repeated excessive retry operations.

Further, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment compares the total number of game balls actually paid out with the number of requested payouts, as a result of the comparison, the total number of actually paid out game balls and the number of requested payouts are compared. If there is a difference between and, it can be grasped as an overpayment of the game ball.

Further, when the above-mentioned difference due to the overpayment exceeds the allowable value (10), the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are stopped until the initialization operation is performed. Therefore, for example, due to fraudulent activity or the like. When there is an unnatural overpayment, it is possible to prevent further overpayment.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when an overpayment occurs, the overpayment is the difference between the total number of game balls actually paid out and the number of requested number of payout amounts until the initialization operation is performed. The number of such game balls can be accumulated.

Thereby, for example, the fact of unnatural overpayment caused by fraudulent activity and the amount of unnecessary game balls paid out (number of prize balls and number of rented balls) caused by the overpayment can be reliably detected.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, during the falling ball monitoring time after driving the payout motor 174, the gaming balls corresponding to the number of requested drops are pressed by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B. Since it is determined whether or not it has been detected, it is possible to cool the payout motor 174 during the falling ball monitoring time, and at the same time, confirm whether or not the game balls corresponding to the required number of drops have been paid out. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently manage the payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of rented balls) while ensuring a sufficient cooling period of the payout motor 174.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the falling ball monitoring time after driving the payout motor 174 is a holding period for holding the postures of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B and the payout motor 174. Since it is composed of the cooling period of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, the postures of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B can be maintained after the payout motor 174 is stopped, and the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are subjected to inertial force. It is possible to prevent over-rotation. Further, the payout motor 174 can be cooled by providing the cooling period.

Further, if the number of game balls corresponding to the required number of drops is not detected by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B during the holding period and the cooling period, the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped, so that the holding period and the holding period and The drive of the payout motor 174 can be efficiently managed by utilizing the cooling period.

(Embodiment 2)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 121.

The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it has a real-time clock 80, but the other configurations are substantially the same. Therefore, in the following, the description of the configuration similar to that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the differences from the first embodiment will be described in particular.

FIG. 117 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117, in the second embodiment, the sub-control circuit 200 includes a real-time clock 80. The real-time clock 80 is connected to the sub CPU 201.

Here, the real-time clock 80 is a device capable of specifying the current "year (year)", "month", "day", "day of the week", "hour", "minute", and "second". Is. The real-time clock 80 is realized as a serial interface type real-time clock module having a built-in crystal oscillator. Since the sub CPU 201 is connected to the real-time clock 80, the time information specified by the real-time clock 80 can be acquired by the sub CPU 201. The real-time clock 80 operates by the power supply when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with power, and when the power is turned off, the real-time clock 80 is an independent power source such as a backup power supply or a button battery that is supplied even in the event of a power failure. Works by. Therefore, the real-time clock 80 can specify the current time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

As described above, in the second embodiment, since the real-time clock 80 is provided, various effects corresponding to the current time can be performed.

[Point addition table]
In the first embodiment, using the point addition table stored in the program ROM 202, points according to the lottery are added, and it is possible to shift to the "first high probability state" according to the accumulated points. rice field.

In the second embodiment as well, the point addition table is stored in the program ROM 202 as in the first embodiment, but the point addition table corresponds to a different time for each character displayed for each determined production content. The points to be added differ depending on the time. As a result, the points to be added in the case of loss will differ depending on the time when the game is played and the characters displayed according to the effect. Therefore, the player can enjoy the changing game, and the interest of the game is improved.

The point addition table of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a point addition table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.

In the second embodiment, there are a plurality of characters (characters A to C) depending on the production content of the loss reach effect. In other words, there are a plurality of lost reach effects corresponding to a plurality of characters. In addition, the time corresponding to each character is fixed, and if the character that corresponds to the time during the game performs the loss reach effect, it will be added more than if the other character's loss reach effect is performed. Points are likely to increase. Therefore, it can be said that there is a high probability of shifting to the "first high probability state". Therefore, if the character corresponding to the time when the game is being played is displayed in the production, it can be said that it is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where other characters are displayed.

For example, character A may correspond to 8:00 to 12:59, character B may correspond to 13:00 to 17:59, and character C may correspond to 18:00 to 23:59. Here, the production of the fluctuation pattern commands "83H02H" and "83H03H" is a loss reach production. The sub-control circuit 200 that has received this variation pattern command determines by lottery which of the detailed contents of the reach effect, that is, characters A to C is displayed. The probability that each of the characters A to C will be displayed may be the same as each other (all are 1/3). As shown in FIG. 118, in the random number values "9" in "83H02H" and all the random number values in "83H03H", the points to be added differ depending on the relationship between the character displayed by the effect and the game time. For example, when the fluctuation pattern command is "83H02H" and the acquired random number value is "9", and the character A is displayed in the "second high probability state", the time is from 8:00 to 12:59. If so, the points to be added are 50, but at other times, the points to be added are 20. Similarly, when character B is displayed in the "second high probability state", the points to be added are 50 if the time is from 13:00 to 17:59, but they are added at other times. The point is 20. Similarly, when character C is displayed in the "second high probability state", the points to be added are 50 if the time is from 18:00 to 23:59, but they are added at other times. The point is 20. The same applies when the variation pattern command is "83H03H". Further, the "normal game state" is the same as in the case of the "second high probability state", but as in the first embodiment, the "second high probability state" is set so that points can be easily accumulated.

Further, as in the first embodiment, the stop symbol and the effect content determination process may be performed according to the points determined using this point addition table (see S1072 and the like in FIG. 72). Further, as in the first embodiment, the expected degree of the addition points for each "time correspondence availability" in "83H43H" and the expectation degree of the addition points for each "time correspondence availability" in "83H00H" are configured to be the same. You can also do it. Further, as in the first embodiment, the expected degree of the added points in "83H44H" can be configured to be higher than the expected degree of the added points in at least "83H00H" and the like.

As mentioned above, the time and the displayed character are made to correspond so that the point addition is different, but the time and the displayed character are made to correspond and the number of navigations given is different instead of the points. May be. In other words, the time corresponding to the character is predetermined, for example, when the character corresponding to the time when the game is being played is selected, the jackpot navigation lottery table different from that used at other times is used. The number of navigations that can be granted is specified in the jackpot navigation lottery table more than those used at other times. As a result, the number of times of navigation is given increases, and the probability of giving navigation can be inevitably increased. In addition to determining the number of navigations by lottery, it is also possible to determine the probability of giving navigation by lottery.
Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery in which the navigation is given with a probability of 1/10 in the lost super reach B is performed, but in the second embodiment, such a lottery may be performed. In addition, a lottery in which navigation is given may be performed in Loss Super Reach A. Further, as described above, the winning probability may change depending on the time and the displayed character.
This case will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table at the time of loss super reach of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 119, when the displayed character corresponds to the time, the probability of winning the navigation is higher than that when it does not correspond. In addition, the number of navigations given is also increasing. In this way, since the advantages and disadvantages for the player differ depending on the time of day, the player will play with the expectation that the player will be in an advantageous state, and the interest of the game will be improved. Note that FIG. 119 shows the case of Loss Super Reach A, but similarly, in the case of Loss Super Reach B, the probability of winning the navigation and the number of navigations to be given are determined by the combination of the displayed character and the time. May be changed.
The probability that each of the characters A to C is displayed is the same as each other, but may be different. For example, the probability that the character corresponding to the time is displayed may be lower than 1/3.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described, in particular, only the processes including steps different from those in the first embodiment.

[Timer interrupt processing]
First, the timer interrupt processing by the sub CPU 201 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 120.

As shown in FIG. 120, the process of S1301 is added between the process of S1023 and the process of S1024, which is different from the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 65).
Since other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S1023 is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1301. In S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs time management processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring and updating data about the reference standard time from the real-time clock 80. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1024.

As a result, in the second embodiment, various effects using the standard time can be performed. For example, a predetermined process can be executed at a specific time. As a result, it is possible to give a privilege to the player at a specific time and perform a special effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Production determination process in the first high probability state]
With reference to FIG. 121, the first high-probability state effect determination process will be described by the sub CPU 201 of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 121, the process of S1302 is added after the process of S1129, which is different from the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 75). Since other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S1129 is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to S1302. In S1302, the sub CPU 201 performs an all-day navigation lottery based on the time. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 has a 1/20 probability of "fourth high probability state" when the character displayed by the effect based on the standard time acquired from the real-time clock 80 is the character corresponding to the current time. , And if you win, set the 4th high probability state flag. If the displayed character does not correspond to the current time, this transition lottery may not be performed. In addition, if the displayed character is not a character corresponding to the current time, the transition lottery may be performed with a probability lower than the winning probability when the displayed character is a character corresponding to the current time. .. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

Further, regardless of the displayed character, the set time flag may be set when the time is set in advance by the real-time clock 80. Then, if the first hit after the set time flag is set is the "big hit" in the special figure (1) -12, the "fourth high probability state" is won with a probability of 1/1, and the "fourth". It is sufficient to shift to the "high probability state". In addition, regardless of the first hit after the set time flag is set, the set time flag is turned off, and the subsequent hits are the "big hits" in Special Figure (1) -12. May win the "fourth high probability state" with a probability of 1/10 and shift to the "fourth high probability state".
As a result, there is a possibility that the so-called all-day navigation can be acquired even when the RAM is not cleared or the power is turned on. Therefore, the player enjoys the game with the expectation of navigation all day long, even if it is not immediately after the store opens. In addition, since it is possible to acquire the navigation system all day without clearing the RAM or turning on the power, it is possible to reduce the amount of work on the hall side and expect an increase in the number of customers.

Further, for example, by setting the real-time clock 80 so that the navigation can be acquired once a day all day, it is possible to realize a 24-hour navigation in which the entire navigation state is continued for 24 hours. In other words, after the store is closed, navigation will continue all day the next day. As a result, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of unfairness, and it is possible to expect an increase in the number of customers.

Further, for example, a high-probability gaming state other than the above may be provided in the "normal gaming state", and navigation may be easily provided at a specific time by using the real-time clock 80 for at least a part of the high-probability states. That is, it is sufficient to have a high-probability gaming state in which the ease with which navigation is given changes according to the time of day.
For example, even in the production in the "first high probability state", the characters A to C are each displayed with a probability of 1/3, and it is a big hit of special figures (1) -8 to special figures (1) -11. However, if the displayed character is a character corresponding to the current time, it may be possible to shift to the "fourth high probability state".
Also, for example, in the "first high probability state", if the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time even if it is a big hit of special figures (1) -1 to special figures (1) -7. , Navi may not be granted, and if the displayed character is a character corresponding to the current time, the probability is higher than when the displayed character is not a character corresponding to the current time. The navigation may be given by. The characters displayed in the production in the "first high probability state" may be different from the characters (characters A to C) in the loss reach production.

(Embodiment 3)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 127.

The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the payout destination (movement destination) of the game ball by the sprocket 173 can be switched, but the other configurations are substantially the same. ing. Therefore, in the following, the description of the configuration similar to that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the differences from the first embodiment will be described in particular.

As shown in FIG. 122, the prize ball case unit 170 of the third embodiment has a first payout passage 180A and a second payout passage 180B as in the first embodiment, and each of these passages has a two-row structure. Therefore, it has the same configuration. Therefore, the configuration will be described by taking the first payout passage 180A as an example.

The first payout passage 180A of the third embodiment is a first ball passage 401A for paying out (or guiding, supplying, circulating) the game ball to the inside of the pachinko gaming machine (for example, the upper plate 21 or the like). And a second ball passage 402A for guiding (moving) (or paying out, supplying, and circulating) the game ball to the outside of the pachinko game machine (for example, the ball circulation path of the island management facility). ..

Here, the island management facility is a device that can be connected to a plurality of or a single gaming machine and a gaming device (for example, a sand, a counter for each machine, a data display, etc.) provided for the gaming machine. It is a management device for managing the state of a game ball or a game machine, and is usually connected to a facility that manages a game field (for example, a computer or a data management device) called a hall computer, and is used for the hall computer. Information about gaming machines is aggregated and data is transmitted.

Here, the ball circulation path is a facility provided in the island management device that enables sharing of game balls between a plurality of or a single gaming machine, and the ball circulation path can be independently driven as a ball circulation device. It may be a device, it is not essential that it is provided in the island management device, it may be provided in the game machine, or it may be a device that circulates the game balls in the game machine.

The second payout passage 180B also has a first ball passage 401B and a second ball passage 402B. Hereinafter, the first ball passage 401A and the first ball passage 401B are collectively referred to as "first ball passage 401", and the second ball passage 402A and the second ball passage 402B are collectively referred to as "first ball passage 401". There is a case of "2 ball passage 402".

Further, the first ball passage 401A is provided with a first counting switch 481A as a first detecting means for detecting a game ball passing through the first ball passage 401A, and the second ball passage 402A is provided with a first counting switch 481A. , A first ball removal switch 482A is provided as a second detection means that passes through the second ball passage 402A.

Similarly, the second counting switch 481B and the second ball removing switch 482B are provided for the first ball passage 401B and the second ball passage 402B. The first counting switch 481A and the second counting switch 481B are collectively referred to as "counting switch 481", and the first ball removing switch 482A and the second ball removing switch 482B are collectively referred to as "ball removing switch 482". There is a case.

Further, between the payout passage 180, more specifically, the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage 402, the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 is set to the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage. First and second flappers 400A and 400B are provided as passage switching means controlled by the payout CPU 301 so as to switch to either one of 402. These first and second flappers 400A and 400B may be collectively referred to as "flapper 400".

The flapper 400 has a flapper drive device 410 (see FIG. 123), and by controlling the drive of the flapper drive device 410 by the payout CPU 301, the flapper 400 can be rotated in the direction of the arrow in the drawing.

Specifically, the flapper 400 has a position where the payout destination of the game ball is on the second ball passage 402 side (position shown by a broken line in the figure) and a position where the payout destination of the game ball is on the first ball passage 401 side. It is designed to rotate with and from the position (the position indicated by the solid line in the figure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 123, in the payout control circuit 300 of the third embodiment, the first counting switch 481A, the second counting switch 481B, the first ball removing switch 482A, and the second ball removing are described above. The switch 482B and the flapper drive device 410 are connected. The flapper drive device 410 is common to the first flapper 400A and the second flapper 400B, but may be provided separately.

Further, when the payout CPU 301 of the third embodiment executes the above-described retry operation without the number of prize balls and the number of loaned balls (payout amount) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300, the game ball The flapper 400 is switched via the flapper drive device 410 so that the payout destination is the second ball passage 402.

Further, when the payout CPU 301 of the third embodiment executes the retry operation in a state where the flapper 400 is switched so that the payout destination of the game ball is the second ball passage 402, the game ball is released by the ball removal switch 482. The retry operation is terminated on the condition that it is detected.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127, the contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300 will be described, in particular, only the processes including steps different from those in the first embodiment.

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
First, the system timer interrupt processing by the payout CPU 301 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124.

As shown in FIG. 124, in the system timer interrupt processing in the third embodiment, each step of S431 to S435 is the same as S331 to S335 of the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 93) in the first embodiment. The description of is omitted.

After the process of S435 is completed, the payout CPU 301 executes the motor drive process described later (S436) and executes the origin adjustment excitation data setting process (S437). After that, the payout CPU 301 executes the command transmission process (S438) and ends the system timer interrupt process. The command transmission process (S438) of the third embodiment is the same as the command transmission process (S337) of the first embodiment.

[Counting switch detection process]
First, the counting switch detection process performed in S435 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 125.

As shown in FIG. 125, in the counting switch detection process in the third embodiment, each step of S481 to S490 is the same as S381 to S390 of the counting switch detection process (see FIG. 96) in the first embodiment. The description of is omitted.

When S481 is a NO determination, S487 is a NO determination, S489 is a NO determination, or after the end of S490, the payout CPU 301 has a first ball removal switch 482A or a second ball removal switch 482B as a game ball. It is determined whether or not the passage of is detected (S491).

In S491, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first ball pull-out switch 482A or the second ball pull-out switch 482B has not detected the passage of the game ball (when the determination in S491 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines. The counting switch detection process is terminated.

On the other hand, in S491, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first ball pull-out switch 482A or the second ball pull-out switch 482B has detected the passage of the game ball (when the determination in S491 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines. It is determined whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S492).

When the payout CPU 301 determines in S492 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1, (when the determination in S492 is NO), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

On the other hand, in S492, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (when the determination in S492 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S493).

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S494). After that, the payout CPU 301 controls the flapper drive device 410 to automatically switch the first and second flapper 400A and 400B to the first ball passages 401A and 401B side (payout side) (S495), and the counting switch. End the detection process.

[Motor drive processing]
First, the motor drive process performed in S436 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 126.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (S501).

In S501, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (when the determination in S501 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and drives the motor. End the process.

On the other hand, in S501, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or the second stop factor flag is 1 (when the determination in S501 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S502).

In S502, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or the second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S502 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no collateral ball and the motor. End the drive process.

On the other hand, in S502, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S502 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball and pays out. It is determined whether or not the requested number is greater than 0 (S503).

If the payout CPU 301 determines in S503 that the number of payout requests is not greater than 0 (NO in S503), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request and ends the motor drive process.

On the other hand, in S503, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is larger than 0 (when the determination in S503 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request and executes the motor start initial process (the motor start initial process). S504). Since the initial process for starting the motor is the same as that in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the payout CPU 301 performs a start state setting process of the payout motor 174 (S505). In this process, since the payout CPU 301 does not perform the origin adjustment control, the acceleration state of the payout motor 174 according to the number of dropped requests is set so that the normal game ball is paid out.

After that, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S506). In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data for a predetermined step as the drive amount required to pay out the game balls corresponding to the number of requested drops, assuming that the normal game balls are paid out.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the payout control flag to "1" (S507), and ends the motor drive process. Here, the payout control flag is a flag in which "0" or "1" is set depending on whether or not the flapper 400 is switched, and is set to "1" when the flapper 400 is switched. This is a flag set to "0" when the flapper 400 is not switched.

[Origin adjustment excitation data setting process]
First, the origin adjustment excitation data setting process performed in S437 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 127.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S511). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S511 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (NO in S511), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for origin adjustment control and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting process. do. Therefore, when the determination in S511 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

On the other hand, in S511, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (when the determination in S511 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for origin adjustment control, and the number of retries is 12 or more. It is determined whether or not it is large, that is, whether or not the origin adjustment control is performed 12 times (S512). Therefore, when the determination in S511 is YES, the origin adjustment control is performed.

In S512, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is larger than 12 (when the determination in S512 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of origin adjustment controls has reached the upper limit (12 times). Then, the processing is transferred to S513.

In S513, the payout CPU 301 sets the start state of the payout motor 174 (S513), and shifts the process to S523. In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the payout motor 174 to an idle state in order to stop the payout of the game ball.

On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S512 that the number of retries is not greater than 12 (NO in S512), the payout CPU 301 resets the activated state of the payout motor 174 (S514).

Next, the payout CPU 301 resets the excitation data (S515) and determines whether or not the payout control flag is 1 (S516). In S516, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout control flag is not 1 (when the payout control flag is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that switching between the first and second flappers 400A and 400B is unnecessary. Then, the process is transferred to S518. In this case, the first and second flappers 400A and 400B are not switched, and the payout destination of the game ball is maintained on the first ball passages 401A and 401B side (payout side).

On the other hand, in S516, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout control flag is 1 (when the determination in S516 is YES), the payout CPU 301 needs to switch between the first and second flappers 400A and 400B. Then, the flapper drive device 410 is controlled to automatically switch the first and second flappers 400A and 400B to the second ball passages 402A and 402B (ball removal side) (S517).

Next, when the determination in S516 is NO, or after the end of S517, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to four steps in preparation for the origin adjustment control (S518). In this process, four steps are set as the unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 when the origin adjustment control is executed.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of motors to be operated to one (S519), and sets the number of origin request retries to four (S520). In this process, the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball is obtained by multiplying the four steps set as the step counter mask value in S518 described above by the four times set as the number of origin request retries. 16 steps are set.

Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer and sets it to 0 (S521). The falling ball monitoring timer is the same as that of the first embodiment. Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to "0" (S522).

Next, after the end of S513 or after the end of S522, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S523), and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting process. In this process, for example, when performing origin adjustment control, excitation data for 16 steps is set as a payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball.

Further, in the case of paying out the normal game balls, the excitation data for a predetermined step is set as the driving amount required to pay out the game balls corresponding to the required number of drops. When the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state so that the payout of the game ball is stopped, the excitation data is set to 0.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment exhibits the following effects in addition to the effects in the first embodiment.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the payout destination of the game ball is set to either the first ball passage 401 or the second ball passage 402 in each of the first and second payout passages 180A and 180B, respectively. Since the flapper 400 for switching to one side is provided, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed when the game ball is paid out to the outside of the game machine, for example, when the game ball is rented or when the prize ball is paid out. Occasionally, the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 can be switched to the first ball passage 401 by the flapper 400.

On the other hand, when the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed without paying out the game ball to the outside of the game machine, the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 is switched to the second ball passage 402 by the flapper 400. Can be done. As a result, overpayment of the game ball by the origin adjustment control (retry control) is prevented.

Therefore, by switching to either the first ball passage 401 or the second ball passage 402 by the flapper 400, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed regardless of whether or not the game ball is paid out to the outside of the game machine. be able to.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment executes the origin adjustment control (retry control) in a state where there is no payout amount (number of prize balls and number of rented balls) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. Switch the flapper 400 so that the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 is the second ball passage 402. Therefore, when the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed without paying the game ball to the outside of the game machine. Even so, it is possible to prevent the sprocket 173 from overpaying the game ball.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment ends the origin adjustment control (retry control) on the condition that the ball removal switch 482 detects the game ball, so that the payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls) stored in the RAM 303 is stored. Even if the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed without the number of rented balls), the counting switch 481 does not detect the game ball.

Therefore, the game balls paid out from the sprocket 173 are paid out to the outside of the game machine by the origin adjustment control (retry control) executed without the payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of rented balls) stored in the RAM 303. It is possible to prevent the ball from being detected as a game ball. As a result, the range of operations of origin adjustment control (retry control) can be expanded.

(Embodiment 4)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130.

In the fourth embodiment, the first embodiment is particularly the number of remaining drop requests obtained by subtracting one ball from the number of drop requests after the completion of the origin adjustment control (for example, if 15 before the subtraction, the remaining number of drop requests). Is different in that the game balls for (14) are paid out, but the other configurations are substantially the same.

Therefore, in the following, the description of the configuration similar to that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the differences from the first embodiment will be described in particular. Specifically, only the processing different from the first embodiment will be described. The processing other than the processing described below (for example, system timer interrupt processing and the like) is the same as the processing in the first embodiment.

[Counting switch detection process]
First, the counting switch detection process performed in S335 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 93) similar to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the counting switch detection process in the fourth embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of the game ball (S581). In S581, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has not detected the passage of the game ball (when the determination in S581 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is the counting switch. End the detection process. Here, when the origin adjustment control is in progress, the game ball is not yet detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B, so S581 is determined as NO.

On the other hand, in S581, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of the game ball (when the determination in S581 is YES), the payout CPU 301 requests a drop. The number is subtracted by "1" (S582).

That is, the payout CPU 301 updates the number of dropped requests on condition that the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B. The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a delimited payout amount update means.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the number of payout requests is not subtracted in the counting switch detection process. The number of payout requests is equal to the number of game balls corresponding to the determined (set) number of drop requests when the number of drop requests is determined (set) in S627 in the motor start initial processing (see FIG. 130) described later. It has been subtracted.

In other words, when the number of drop requests is determined (set), the payout CPU 301 subtracts the number of game balls corresponding to the determined (set) number of drop requests from the number of payout requests. There is. The payout CPU 301 that subtracts the game ball constitutes the subtraction means.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S583). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S583 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1, (when the determination in S583 is NO), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

On the other hand, in S583, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (when the determination in S583 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S584).

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S585). After that, the payout CPU 301 sets the flag to 1 after the origin adjustment is executed (S586), and ends the counting switch detection process.

Here, the post-origin adjustment flag is a flag in which "0" or "1" is set depending on whether the origin adjustment control has been executed or before (not executed), and the origin adjustment control has been executed. This is a flag that is set to "1" when it is after the execution of, and is set to "0" when it is before the execution of the origin adjustment control.

[Motor start waiting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the motor start waiting process performed in S336 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 93) similar to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor start waiting process in the fourth embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S601). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S601 that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 (NO in S601), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is in progress and shifts the process to S605.

On the other hand, in S601, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (when the determination in S601 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been completed, and the first Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second stop factor flag is 1 (S602).

In S602, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (when the determination in S602 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and starts the motor. End the wait process.

On the other hand, in S602, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or the second stop factor flag is 1 (when the determination in S602 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S603).

In S603, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or the second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S603 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no collateral ball and the motor. Ends the startup waiting process.

On the other hand, in S603, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when the determination in S603 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball, which will be described later. The initial process of starting the motor (see FIG. 122) is executed (S604). In the fourth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, it is not determined whether or not the number of requested payouts is larger than 0.

Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the payout request flag described later is set, and whether or not there is a payout request from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300 is determined by the payout request flag. This payout request flag is transmitted at the same time when the information on the number of payout requests is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300, for example. The payout request flag is set to "1" when there is a payout request, and is set to "0" when there is no payout request.

Here, since the processing of S605 to S613 is the same as the processing of S406 to S414 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Initial processing for starting the motor]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the motor start initial process performed in S604 during the motor start wait process (see FIG. 129) of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the motor start initial processing in the fourth embodiment.

First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the flag after the origin adjustment is executed is 1 (S621). In S621, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the flag after the origin adjustment execution is not 1 (when the determination in S621 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has not been executed (or has not been executed). , The process is transferred to S623.

On the other hand, in S621, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the flag after the origin adjustment is executed is 1 (when the determination in S621 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been executed and falls. It is determined whether or not the requested number is 0 or less (S622).

When the payout CPU 301 determines in S622 that the number of drop requests is not 0 or less (when the determination in S622 is NO), the payout CPU 301 keeps the number of drop requests as it is, that is, in the counting switch detection process (see FIG. 128). The process is transferred to S628 with the number of dropped requests after subtracting "1" in S582.

On the other hand, in S622, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of drop requests is 0 or less (when the determination in S622 is YES), the payout CPU 301 resets (or initially sets) the number of drop requests. , The value of the drop request number is reduced to the payout request number (S623).

For example, when the value of the number of drop requests becomes "-1" due to the overpayment of the game ball, the payout CPU 301 subtracts "1" from the number of payout requests that have already been subtracted by the number of drop requests.

That is, the payout CPU 301 reflects the number of drop requests (“-1” in the case of overpayment) after subtracting “1” in S582 of the above-mentioned counting switch detection process (see FIG. 128) in the payout request number. The payout CPU 301 that performs such reflection constitutes a reflection means. When the process of S623 is performed for the first time (first time), both the number of requests for payout and the number of requests for drop are "0".

Here, in the payout CPU 301, when all the game balls corresponding to the number of payout requests are paid out, the number of drop requests after "1" is subtracted in S582 of the above-mentioned counting switch detection process (see FIG. 128) is ". If it is not "0", it is determined that a payout error has occurred. The payout CPU 301 that makes such a determination constitutes a payout error determination means.

For example, when the number of falling requests after subtraction is larger than "0" when the number of game balls requested to be paid out is paid out, it can be determined that a payout error due to underpayment has occurred.

On the other hand, when the number of dropped request balls after subtraction is smaller than "0" when the number of game balls requested to be paid out is paid out, it can be determined that a payout error due to overpayment has occurred.

Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the number of payout requests is smaller than "-10" (S624). That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of overpaid items is 10 or more.

In S624, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the number of payout requests is smaller than "-10" (when the determination in S624 is YES), the payout CPU 301 does not have the number of game balls related to overpayment within the permissible range. It is determined that the overpay flag is set to 1 (S625), and the motor start initial processing is completed.

On the other hand, in S624, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the number of payout requests is not smaller than "-10" (when the determination in S624 is NO), the payout CPU 301 allows the number of game balls related to overpayment. It is determined that it is within the range, and it is determined whether or not the payout request flag is 1. (S626).

If the payout CPU 301 determines in S626 that the payout request flag is not 1 (NO in S626), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request for the game ball from the main control circuit 70. Motor start The initial processing is completed.

On the other hand, in S626, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout request flag is 1 (when the determination in S626 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the number of drop requests from the number of payout requests (S627).

In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers are set according to the payout request number (total payout amount). At this time, at the same time as setting the number of drop requests, the number of payout requests is subtracted by the set number of drop requests.

Here, since the processing of S628 to S634 is the same as the processing of S422 to S428 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment exhibits the following effects in addition to the effects in the first embodiment.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the number of dropped requests is updated on condition that the gaming balls are detected by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B.
That is, the drop request number is updated every time the game ball is detected by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B.

As a result, for example, when the payout motor 174 is driven to pay out the game balls according to the number of requested drops, if the number of balls requested to be dropped is exceeded (overpayment), the overpaid amount of the game balls is paid out. The number of drops required can be updated by adding the number.

On the other hand, the payout request number is subtracted by the number of game balls corresponding to the drop request number when the drop request number is determined, and then the updated drop request number is reflected. As a result, even if the above-mentioned overpayment occurs by driving the payout motor 174 once, the number of game balls subtracted from the number of payout requests and the number of game balls actually paid out can be obtained. Can be matched.

As a result, it is not necessary to stop the payout motor 174 every time an overpayment occurs by driving the payout motor 174 once, so that the payout of the game ball can be continued. Therefore, smooth payout can be performed.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is an enclosed gaming machine, in which a launching means for launching a gaming ball is installed on the upper part of the gaming machine, and the launched gaming ball passes through a gaming area provided on the gaming board. (The game board itself may be a game area), and it is also applied to an enclosed game machine that is collected in a ball polishing device or a lifting device provided in the game machine.

When the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to such a gaming machine, a means for lifting a gaming ball provided in a lifting device by a sprocket (for example, a screw) or a payout motor. Even if the driving means for driving the means for lifting (for example, a lifting motor) and the counting switch are the discharge detecting means from the lifting device (for example, a sensor for managing the circulation of a game ball). good.

According to the above embodiment of the present invention, the game ball passes through the payout passage 180, is paid out to the upper plate 21 provided on the front surface of the game machine, and moves from the upper plate 21 to the launching device 15. The gaming machine according to the present invention is also applicable to a device such as the above, which is to be lifted to the launching device 15.

Further, in the above embodiment of the present invention, the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage near the sprocket 173, and the payout passage 180 may be integrally formed. The term "integrally" expressed here includes a state in which it is integrally formed by welding, die cutting, screwing, caulking, or the like.

Further, from the four configurations exemplified in the case where the ball tank lower passage 162 and the ball supply passage 171 are integrally formed, and the case where the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage near the sub rocket 173 are integrally formed. The two configurations may be extracted and integrally formed by the different configurations.

Similarly, the case where the ball passage near the sprocket 173 and the payout passage 180 are integrally formed, and the case where the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage near the sprocket 173 are integrally formed are exemplified. Three configurations may be extracted from the four configurations to be formed, and the body may be formed by the configurations divided into cases.

Further, the ball supply passage 171 may be provided in a gaming member (for example, a decorative unit or a ball polishing device of an enclosed gaming machine) constituting the gaming machine. This means that the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied even when the device provided with the member corresponding to the sprocket 173 is connected to the gaming member acting as the ball supply passage 171.

Further, the ball supply passage 171 may be provided with a configuration in which the game ball can be moved like the sub rocket 173, and generally, the game ball existing in the ball supply passage 171 in conjunction with and in synchronization with the sprocket 173. If is movable, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied.

Further, in the above embodiment of the present invention, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period), and when the excitation data holding period elapses, the current of the payout motor 174 becomes a low current. It is switched and then maintained at a low current for 470 ms (cooling period). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is configured by 30 ms (excitation data retention period) and 470 ms (cooling period), but the time is not limited to this, and is not limited to 30 ms (excitation data retention period). The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms + 0 to 100 ms) may be configured by the period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period).

With such a configuration, the position of the sprocket 173 can be finely adjusted during the sprocket adjustment period, and forward rotation and reverse rotation assuming ball biting may be repeated. Further, when a heat detecting means capable of detecting the heat generation of the payout motor 174 is provided and the payout control circuit 300 can determine an abnormality of the payout motor 174 when the heat generation of the payout motor 174 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value and a predetermined range. May continue to use the sprocket adjustment period as the cooling period.

Further, even if the heat detecting means is not provided, when the payout of a predetermined value or more (for example, when paying out a maximum of 16 balls, the payout of 10 or more balls) continues for a predetermined number of times or more (for example, 3 times or more). The sprocket adjustment period may be set to a specific value (for example, 50 ms). At this time, the set sprocket adjustment period may be a predetermined value or a constant value. Normally, there is a sufficient cooling period, so it is not necessary to set a sprocket adjustment period for cooling. Cooling of 174 may be inadequate. Therefore, by assuming such a case and adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to take care of the cooling period of the payout motor 174 when the payout is continuous. As a result, it becomes possible to pay out more safely.

As described above, when the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms + 0 to 100 ms) is configured by 30 ms (excitation data retention period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period), the player falls. It can be expressed that the cooling period of the payout motor 174 is extended based on the extension of the ball monitoring time, and it can also be expressed that the falling ball monitoring time is extended based on the extension of the cooling period. Is possible.

Further, in the above embodiment of the present invention, if the flapper 400 is controlled by the payout CPU 301 to switch to either the first ball passage 401 or the second ball passage 402, the shape, material, and driving method are particularly limited. It is not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 114, it may be plate-shaped, or it may be moved horizontally by being cured by a game ball falling from the upper part of the ball passage so that the game ball cannot pass through one of the ball passages. As a result, the mechanism may be such that the game balls can be distributed, or a mechanism similar to that of the sprocket 173 is provided, and the game balls are once received and then guided in an arbitrary direction. There may be.

Further, in the above embodiment of the present invention, 5 ms × 4 steps are defined as excitation data corresponding to the unit drive amount, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the excitation data for the number of retries, the payout motor 174 of 5 ms × 16 steps is driven, and the excitation data retention period 30 ms + cooling period 470 ms = 500 ms after the drive of the payout motor 174 of 5 ms × 16 steps is stopped is set, and the basic retry operation engine. Is set to 5000 ms (basic retry operation period), and the time required by subtracting the excitation data retention period, the cooling period, and the time required for one retry (5 ms × 16 = 80 ms) from the basic retry operation period is calculated. It may be set as the falling ball monitoring time, and when a stop factor occurs or the retries of the specified number of times (240 times) are completed within the falling ball monitoring time, the state may be shifted to the idle state. At this time, the maximum number of retries is 240, and the time required for one retry is set as the basic retry operation period. As a result, a sufficient monitoring time is set as the falling ball monitoring time, so that the falling ball monitoring time can be used as the time to be stored for intermittent prevention when the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is disconnected. It will be possible to pay out more safely.

Further, in the above embodiment of the present invention, the number of game balls to be moved by one drive of the payout motor 174 is subtracted based on the number of game balls detected by the counting switch 181 in the retry control to request the number of drops. Although (separation payout amount) is set, the term "setting the drop request number (separation payout amount)" here can include contents such as determination, update, and change.

Further, the payout in the above embodiment of the present invention is premised on paying out a game ball as a game medium, but the payout is not limited to this, and the game medium includes medals, credits, and an electronically managed game medium. It is considered to pay out various media such as pseudo-medium that is treated in terms of quantity and amount.

The "movement" described in the claims of the present application includes a case where the position of the game ball is moved by the game ball control means such as payout, lending, retry control, and lifting. Therefore, the present invention can be applied to any case as long as the position of the game ball is moved by the above-mentioned game ball control means.

In addition, "the game ball moves" means that the game ball is free when the game ball is directly pushed or towed by the game ball control means, or when the lock of the game ball is released. The game ball moves indirectly, which is assumed when one or more game balls move indirectly as a result of starting the fall or moving one game ball by the game ball control means. Including the case.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, the execution of the navigation is performed according to the number of the assigned navigations, but the continuation rate lottery may be performed and the continuation rate of the navigation may be given. That is, for example, it is possible to stock a plurality of navigation systems having a continuation rate of 0%, 50%, 80%, etc., and when the navigation system is executed, a continuous lottery is performed according to the continuation rate to determine whether or not the navigation system is continuously performed. You may decide. If you win, the lottery will be continued at the same continuation rate next time, and if you do not win, this navigation will disappear, but if the navigation is in stock, use the next navigation to continue the navigation. The continuous lottery may be conducted at a rate. The continuation rate of 0% is a state in which the navigation does not continue and ends only once. If all the navigation systems are granted, the navigation system guarantees the execution of the navigation system three times, and then the continuation rate lottery may be performed. Further, in the case of all navigation, a navigation with a continuation rate of 100% may be given, in which the number of continuations is limited to three.

In addition, for example, as a production during the "big hit game", it was shown that the number of navigation systems is determined in advance and the result is shown in the production, but the player succeeds in a mini game or the like in order to have the technical intervention of the player. If this is the case, navigation may be added. For example, a push game with multiple difficulty levels is to be executed during a jackpot game, and if a low difficulty game is successful, 0% continuous navigation is given, and if a high difficulty game is successful, 0% continuous navigation is given. All navigation may be given. The mini-game may be a game other than a push game, for example, a quiz or the like.

In the "second high probability state", if the hit content is "normal without payout" (special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12), the set game is not performed after the "big hit game state". It shifts to the "first high probability state" of the "normal game state". Therefore, the effect of recognizing the transition to the "first high probability state" is performed. However, due to this effect, the player may recognize that the gaming state shifts, and may mistakenly think that the expectation of "big hit" has increased.
Therefore, the effect suggesting the transition to the "normal gaming state (sub)" may be performed before the effect that the transition to the "first high probability state" can be recognized. As a result, the player recognizes that the transition from the "big hit gaming state" to the "first high probability state" actually shifts to the "normal gaming state (sub)" after the "big hit gaming state". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the above misunderstanding.

In addition, in the "time saving game" after 50 times, it was decided to suppress the navigation such as not executing the navigation from the viewpoint of preventing "capture hitting", but the player who has performed the "time saving game" 50 times or more. It can be said that is not always "capturing". Therefore, for example, a right-handed sensor for detecting a game ball is installed in the area on the right side of the game area 12a so that it can be detected that a right-handed hit has been made. Based on the detection signal of the right-handed sensor or the like, it is sufficient to determine the normal timing due to the normal constant firing and the abnormal timing caused by operating the firing handle 25.
For example, as shown in FIG. 131, the right-handed sensor 58 and the rail 59 for guiding the game ball to the right-handed sensor 58 may be provided on the game board 12. FIG. 131 is a front view showing the configuration of a gaming board of a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 131, the same members as those of the game board 12 shown in FIG. 3 are designated by the same reference numerals. The game board 12 shown in FIG. 131 is substantially the same as the game board 12 shown in FIG. 3, except that the game board 12 has a right-handed sensor 58 and a rail 59.
In FIG. 131, the right-handed sensor 58 is installed on the upper right side of the game board 12. Further, the rail 59 is also installed on the upper right side of the game board 12, and when the player is performing a right-handed hit, the rail 59 is arranged at a position where the game ball is guided to the rail 59. Further, the game ball guided by the rail 59 is arranged so as to always pass through the right-handed sensor 58. As a result, when the player is hitting right, the game ball always passes through the right-handed sensor 58, and whether or not the player is firing the game ball toward the right side of the game board 12 is determined. You can judge.
As described above, the normal timing and the abnormal timing can be discriminated based on the detection signal of the second start opening winning ball switch 45a and the detection signal of the right-handed sensor 58. As a result, it is presumed that the "capture strike" is performed when the timing is abnormal even though the navigation for the 16 rounds of "big hit game" is performed. If the output timing of the detection signal by "capture strike" is detected (abnormality detection), it can be inferred that "capture strike" is being performed regardless of the number of "time saving games", and in that case, navigation is suppressed. You can set the flag.

In addition, if the time from the output of the detection signal from the second start opening winning ball switch 45a to the output of the detection signal from the right-handed sensor 58 is too long, it may be presumed that it is a “capture hit”. .. Since the output timing of the detection signal by the normal striking method and the output timing of the detection signal by the "capture striking" are different, it can be inferred that the "capture striking" is being performed.

In addition, if the first abnormality is detected, a "warning" will be given, the final warning will be given the second time, and the navigation will be stopped the third time. You may take it.

Further, although the ordinary symbol is known, the ordinary symbol and the special symbol may be related to each other. For example, if it is decided to have a plurality of ordinary symbols and it becomes "V hit", the ordinary symbol and the first grand prize that triggered the opening of the second starting port 45 that triggered the "V hit". The next navigation lottery may be performed based on the special symbol in the opening of the device 54.

For example, it is assumed that there are two types of ordinary symbols, ordinary symbols (1) and ordinary symbols (2), and if the combination of ordinary symbols (1) and small hits (2) -1 is used, there is a high probability that the next navigation lottery will be performed. The lottery will be decided, and if it is a combination of ordinary symbols (2) small hits (2) -4, it may be decided that the lottery will be done with a low probability in the next navigation lottery. As a result, the player can play the game with a hobby even when the player reaches "V hit".

Further, in the case of "per V", the navigation lottery probability may change according to the number of winnings at the time of winning the second starting port 45, which is the trigger. Further, the number of winning prizes may be notified. For example, a display such as "If three or more balls enter the second starting port 45 and hit V, the next navigation is confirmed" may be displayed. As a result, the player can play the game with a hobby even when the player reaches "V hit".

In the above-described embodiment, the navigation is executed according to the number of assigned navigations, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, even when the number of navigations is 1 or more, the navigations are used. Whether or not it may be decided by lottery when a short-time jackpot is won. As a result, since such a release effect is performed during the big hit, the player can hope for the game with more interest during the big hit.

The present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. In the enclosed gaming machine, the number of gaming balls in the gaming machine is constant, and the number of gaming balls is managed from the viewpoint of fraud prevention. Therefore, it also detects the launched game balls and manages the number of launched balls. Therefore, when the present invention is applied to an enclosed gaming machine, for example, a ceiling lottery may be performed based on the number of launches of the gaming balls. For example, it may be determined whether or not a "big hit" has been won every time 1500 game balls are fired, and if not, a ceiling lottery may be performed. If the "big hit" is not won even after firing 15,000 pieces, 100% of the ceiling lottery may be won. By using the number of launches of the gaming machine as a reference in this way, the ceiling state is uniformly given without being affected by the ease of winning a prize at the starting port.

In the above embodiment, when the ceiling lottery is performed and the game is won, the game immediately shifts to the "third high probability state". May be made to transition after 20 times. Then, during these 20 times, an effect (so-called precursor effect) may be performed to notify that the ceiling lottery will be won. As a result, the player can know the game state and the like that will be transferred from now on, and can play the game with a sense of expectation. Further, in general, such a precursory effect can be performed only for the number of reserved game balls, but the precursory effect can be performed over a longer game period, and the player can expect a feeling of expectation for a relatively long time. It is possible to have it.

Although it is said that the all-day navigation lottery has a high probability by clearing the RAM, as described above, the all-day navigation lottery may have a high probability by turning on the power of the gaming machine.

The content of the navigation effect, the opportunity to give the number of navigations, and the like are not limited to the above-described embodiment. In the above embodiment, in the "first high probability state", when the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7, all navigation, that is, the number of navigations is three, but the number of times of navigation is given. Is not limited to three, and for example, only two may be given. However, it is preferable that the "first high probability state" is more likely to be provided with navigation than the gaming states other than the "first high probability state".

In the above-described embodiment, the advantageous first special game is the one with a large number of rounds, but the case where the number of sets in the time-saving game state is eliminated and the jackpot shifts to the time-saving game is defined as the first special game, and the time-saving game is adopted. The case where it becomes a normal big hit that does not shift may be the second special game. Then, when the navigation is given, the first special game and the second special game are not limited if there is an advantage or disadvantage for the player, such as launching a navigation at the time of winning a small hit, which is the first special game.

[Application example]
In each of the above-described embodiments and the above-mentioned various modifications, the pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other gaming machines, for example, to various gaming machines such as slot gaming machines, spinning machines, bullet gaming machines, gaming machines, and enclosed gaming machines. You can also do it. Further, for example, it can be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine, an arrange ball, a ball, etc., which is a kind of ball game machine.

The background techniques and problems (No. 1 to No. 10) of the configuration described in the above-described embodiment will be described.

[Background technology and issues (1)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Is paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, each time a game ball wins a prize in a predetermined area (for example, a starting port) provided in the game area, a predetermined number (for example, 4) is set as an upper limit, and a predetermined area is set. It is possible to store (hold) a plurality of information (starting memory) indicating that the game ball has won a prize, and based on the starting memory, whether or not to win (including a big hit and a small hit) is determined. The game is played by making a judgment and displaying the identification information in a variable manner according to the judgment result. Here, the information regarding the mode of the variation display of the identification information and the variation time is also referred to as a variation pattern, and the progress of the game is controlled by determining the variation pattern. Further, in such a pachinko gaming machine, an effect display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) for displaying the effect is provided, and the effect displayed on the effect display device based on the determined fluctuation pattern. The content is decided.

Further, in such a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more of start memories are held, at least in a game that is not determined to be a hit, a fluctuation time shorter than usual is associated. In general, it is easy to determine the variation pattern (shortening variation), and when the shortening variation is determined, the effect content displayed on the effect display device is also determined with low expectation. Will be done.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236703 discloses a gaming machine that determines points to be given according to a combination of an executed effect (for example, a reach effect) and an effect (for example, a combination of a notice effect and a reach effect). There is.

By the way, in a gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236703, for example, in a game determined to be a hit, there is a high possibility that an effect in which points are easily given is executed, so that a certain point is given. However, in a game that is not judged to be a hit and the shortening fluctuation is determined, there is a high possibility that an effect that makes it difficult for points to be given will be executed, so points are expected to be given. Can't.

For this reason, the player who desires to award points should take a long interval for firing the game ball so that the starting memory is not held more than a predetermined number (for example, 3) (that is, the shortening variation is not determined). It becomes. Therefore, there is a problem that the operation of the game machine is reduced and the game hall may suffer an unexpected loss.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and in a gaming machine that gives points to a player, the operation of the gaming machine is reduced and the playing field suffers an unexpected loss. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing such a situation.

Further, in a gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236703, for example, since the executed effect and the points to be given are associated in advance, the game is repeated for a certain period of time. However, there is a problem that the points to be given are predicted in advance, and depending on the type of production or the like performed, the interest of the game may be lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and in a gaming machine that grants points to a player, it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the granting of points without deteriorating the interest. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine.

Further, in a gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236703, for example, an unintended lottery (for example, a lottery relating to the awarding of points) due to the intervention of fraudulent acts or the occurrence of a defect is performed. There is a problem that it is executed and only a specific player may obtain an unintended profit, or the hall (game hall) may suffer an unexpected disadvantage.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and in a gaming machine that gives points to a player, an unintended lottery is performed due to the intervention of fraudulent acts or a defect. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be prevented from being executed.

[Background technology and issues (2)]
For example, a so-called pachinko gaming machine is known as a gaming machine that plays a game using a gaming ball. In such pachinko gaming machines, when a game ball launched in the game area wins a prize at a starting port, a large winning opening, a general winning opening, or the like, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by a payout device. ..

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-205146 describes a pachinko machine of this type, a sprocket rotated by a stepping motor, a ball supply passage for supplying game balls from a storage tank at the top of the game machine toward the sprocket, and a ball. A payout device equipped with a passage ball out switch for detecting whether or not a game ball does not exist in the supply passage is disclosed.

In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-205146, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be stored in the ball supply passage, and the ball out state in the ball supply passage is a passage ball out switch. If it is detected for a predetermined time or longer, the payout device stops paying out the game ball.

However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-205146, since the ball-out state in the ball supply passage is determined only by the detection result of the passage ball-out switch, the gaming ball can be accurately used. There was a problem that it was not useful because it could not be managed and guaranteed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine provided with a highly useful payout device.

[Background technology and issues (3)]
Among the players who enjoy playing games with pachinko and pachislot machines, there are players who select the game machine in the expectation that it will be in an advantageous state for the player. However, in general, it is difficult to find a gaming machine that is in an advantageous state for a player without playing a game. In general, the hall side wants to reduce the number of gaming machines that are in an advantageous state for players if possible, while the gaming machines are used for the purpose of attracting customers during times when the number of players is decreasing. There is also a hall that wants to put the machine in an advantageous state for the player, and a gaming machine that can set the gaming machine in an advantageous state for the player is desired.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-22248, the gaming state when the power of the gaming machine is turned off is saved as a backup, and when the power is turned on again, the game can be started in that gaming state. The gaming machine is disclosed. In such a gaming machine, when the hall is closed in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the power of the gaming machine is turned off while the gaming state is advantageous to the player. If the power of this gaming machine is turned on immediately before the opening of the store on the next day, the gaming machine will be in an advantageous gaming state for the player who was in the state when the store was closed on the previous day. When such a gaming machine is installed, a player who has closed the store in an advantageous gaming state can enjoy the game in an advantageous gaming state by playing with the gaming machine from the opening of the next day. be able to. In this way, the player may be able to find the gaming machine in an advantageous state.

However, in this gaming machine, unless the power is turned off in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the gaming state that is advantageous to the player will not occur the next time the power is turned on. The gaming machine is not always in an advantageous gaming state for the player after the power of the gaming machine is turned off, that is, after the store is closed. Therefore, with this gaming machine, it has been difficult to realize a gaming state that is advantageous to the player at a desired timing on the hall side.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a state advantageous to a player at a desired timing.

[Background technology and issues (4)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Is paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, the number of game balls corresponding to the game balls that have won the big prize opening is paid out. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hit game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening / closing region, and the gaming ball can enter the opening / closing region. There is a pachinko machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening / closing area, and the game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during the small hit game, so that the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize in the V winning opening during a small hit game and is controlled to a big hit game state, a small hit symbol showing the result of a special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit game state. The game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the type of. As the gaming state changes, for example, the probability of transition to the jackpot gaming state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player may change.

By the way, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375 has a configuration in which it is easy to win a small hit game during a time-saving game, and the opening / closing area is easily opened. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot game state. In addition, even if the player is not in the short-time game, the game state may shift to the big hit game state, and the game state may be changed. As described above, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes as a result of the change in the game state. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, the number of gaming balls that a player can acquire as a result of the change in the gaming state changes rather than a constant ratio. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. However, it is only about the number of game balls that the player can acquire. Even when the player continues the game for a long period of time, in order to concentrate the game without getting tired, it is preferable that the gaming machine has a configuration capable of further suppressing the game from becoming monotonous. If the game does not have such a configuration, there is a problem that the player will eventually get tired of the game if the game is continued for a long time.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of allowing a player to concentrate on playing a game without getting bored and improving the interest of the game. And.

[Background technology and issues (No. 5)]
In pachinko gaming machines, for example, there is a type called a one-kind-two-kind mixed type as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-273786. In this pachinko gaming machine, a special symbol lottery is executed when a gaming ball wins a prize at a predetermined starting port. Then, after the symbols are variablely displayed on the symbol display, the symbols indicating the results of the special symbol lottery are stopped and displayed. Here, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display, it becomes a type 1 jackpot and the first special game is executed. On the other hand, when a predetermined small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display, the blade member that closes the variable specific winning opening is activated, and during this time, the game ball enters the variable specific winning opening and passes through the V zone. If you do, it will be a big hit of 2 types and the second special game will be executed.

In addition to the above-mentioned predetermined starting port, this pachinko gaming machine is provided with a variable starting port that is normally opened only while the electric accessory is operating, and is executed when a game ball wins a prize in this variable starting port. In the special symbol lottery that is held, there is a relatively high probability that a small hit will be made. In this pachinko gaming machine, the winning probability of the opening / closing lottery of the variable starting port executed when the game ball passes through a predetermined passing area is relatively high, and the variable starting opening when the opening / closing lottery is won is The game may be controlled in a time-saving game state in which the opening time is extended. In the time-saving game state, there is a relatively high possibility that the game ball will enter the variable specific winning opening, and there is also a high possibility that the game ball will pass through the V zone and become a big hit of two types. Further, even if the game balls do not pass through the V zone, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out even if the game balls enter the variable specific winning opening. In this way, the time-saving gaming state can be said to be an advantageous gaming state for the player.

As described above, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-273786, not only the type 1 jackpot and the type 2 jackpot but also the time-saving gaming state is advantageous for the player, so that the time-saving gaming state is a long period of time. It can be said that it is preferable for the player to continue. Therefore, some players perform a firing operation of the game ball at a timing so that the game ball does not pass through the V zone even if it enters the variable specific winning opening. By such anomalous striking, the number of game balls to be paid out can be further increased by preventing the game balls from passing through the V zone until just before the end of the duration of the time-saving game state.

However, such anomalous striking by the player is not preferable for the hall side. Therefore, some holes prohibit this irregular striking, and measures such as caution are taken when a player who is performing irregular striking is seen. However, in order to find out that this irregular hit is being made, it is necessary to keep watching the state of the game for a while, and it is not easy to find it.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a player from making irregular hits.

[Background technology and issues (6)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Is paid out. Since the game balls can be exchanged for cash, the player is playing the game in the expectation that more game balls will be paid out.

Further, depending on the pachinko gaming machine, points may be added by satisfying a predetermined condition in the game. Then, by accumulating these points, some kind of privilege is given. For example, in a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-42574, points are added when a game specified as a point-up condition is performed, and when the points are equal to or greater than the number of "reference points", the gaming level is reached. Is calculated, and a lottery necessary for collecting item information used for the game such as music data and character image data is performed according to the quantity of the game level.

As a result, the player can enjoy not only increasing the number of game balls but also increasing the points by playing the game.

As described above, it can be said that it is certainly one of the pleasures of the game to be able to collect music data, character image data, etc. in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-42574. However, this point is not related to the payout of the game ball, and it can be said that the player is a little less interested in the point.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and it is possible for a player to play a diversified game while enjoying an increase in points accumulated in the game, and to improve the interest of the game. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

[Background technology and issues (7)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area on the game board surface by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined value is determined. A number of gaming balls are paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time.
In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

By the way, in recent years, as a configuration of a winning device, there is a gaming machine having a configuration in which a gaming ball that has entered a large winning opening rolls to the back side of the game board surface and a winning sensor detects the gaming ball. As such a gaming machine, Patent Document 1 has a function of giving a probable change state after the end of a big hit game by passing a game ball through a specific area provided in the big winning opening, and specifies the opening mode of the big winning opening. A gaming machine is disclosed in which the degree of overlap with the operating mode of the region shutter is changed to make the difficulty level of the gaming ball passing through a specific region different.

However, in the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-255784, when the gaming ball can pass through the specific area provided with the winning sensor, the rolling speed of the gaming ball cannot be adjusted, so that the rolling speed of the gaming ball cannot be adjusted. In some cases, the moving speed was high and the winning sensor could not detect the passage of the game ball.

An object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately detecting the passage of a gaming ball by a passage detecting means.

[Background technology and issues (8)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Is paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

By the way, in recent years, a movable accessory has been provided in a gaming machine in order to improve the color rendering index. As such a gaming machine, Patent Document 1 states that after each of the first and second upper peach movable members is rotated so as to open outward, the first and second upper peach movable members are closed inward. In the peach-shaped movable accessory device that rotates around, first and second magnet portions are provided on the inner portions of the joints of the first and second upper peach movable members, and the first and second magnets are provided. The first and second upper peach movable members are arranged so as to be substantially opposed to each other in a closed state, and in such a state, the first and second magnet portions are arranged so as to attract each other. The game machine is disclosed.

However, since the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-87611 uses a magnet to reinforce the bond between the end faces between the accessories, even if the bond between the two accessories can be reinforced. It is not possible to reinforce the end of the accessory for a configuration in which the accessory operates alone, and from the viewpoint of stabilizing the state of the single accessory after operation, it can be used as another accessory. The configuration was difficult to apply.

An object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a gaming machine capable of easily stabilizing the state after the operation of the accessory by a configuration in which the operating accessory can be fixed. ..

[Background technology and issues (No. 9)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area on the game board surface by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined value is determined. A number of gaming balls are paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time.
In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

By the way, in recent years, there is a gaming machine equipped with a winning device that guides a gaming ball falling from an upstream in a gaming area to the inside of a winning opening by driving a movable piece in the front-rear direction when viewed from the player. As such a gaming machine, Patent Document 1 has a winning opening for receiving a flowing game ball, and is connected to a driving means so as to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction between the front and the rear of the winning opening. A gaming machine including a winning device having a ball receiving member that receives a gaming ball into a winning opening when it advances forward by driving is disclosed.

However, in the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-177281, the ball receiving member that advances and retreats in the front-rear direction between the front and the rear of the winning opening only receives the game ball into the winning opening. Even if you pick up an excessive number of game balls, they will all be guided to the inside of the winning opening. If such a phenomenon is repeated, a large amount of profit is unexpectedly given to the player, while the game hall suffers a large amount of loss unexpectedly, and the balance of profit between the player and the game field is a game. It deviates greatly from the estimation at the time of manufacturing the machine.

An object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a gaming machine provided with a winning device capable of accurately managing a balance of profits between a player and a playing field.

[Background technology and issues (No. 10)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Is paid out. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot game in which the jackpot, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the big prize opening. Here, some of the big winning openings have a blade member, and such a large winning opening repeatedly operates the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

By the way, in recent years, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of movable accessories are driven from a standby position at a predetermined timing, and after driving, form one design without touching each other in front of a display screen. As such a game machine, Patent Document 1 describes a first movable body that is swingably supported via a first movable shaft, and a second movable body that is swingably supported via a second movable shaft. By driving the two movable bodies, the interlocking means for interlocking the first movable body and the second movable body, and the interlocking means, the first movable body is swung between the first position and the second position. A driving means for swinging the second movable body between the third position and the fourth position is provided, and the driving means moves the first movable body from the first position to the second position and the second movable body into the third position. When the interlocking means is driven in the direction of swinging from the position to the fourth position, the first movable body swings upward and the second movable body swings downward in front of the display screen of the effect display device. The game machine to play is disclosed.

However, the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-46038 has a structure in which a plurality of movable accessories cannot come into contact with each other after being driven. It forms two designs. Therefore, in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to limit the place where one design is formed by a plurality of movable accessories to, for example, the front of the display screen.

Further, when forming one design with only a plurality of such movable accessories, the plurality of movable accessories are driven to a place where one design is formed while maintaining the momentum of starting the drive from the standby position. If the movable accessories are brought into contact with each other, the movable accessories may be damaged by the impact.

In order to solve such a problem, the present invention improves the effect of the movable accessory while avoiding damage to the movable accessory when the movable accessory is driven and brought into contact with another member. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine capable of

As described above, according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention (including each embodiment and each modification), at least the following gaming machines (No. 1 to No. 11) can be provided.

[Game machine of the present invention (No. 1)]
The game machine of the present invention has a game area in which the game ball can roll (for example, a game area 12a) and a start area provided in the game area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the first start port 44, the first start port 44, the first 2 start port 45), a start storage means capable of storing a plurality of start memories indicating that the game ball has passed through the start area (for example, a first special symbol start storage area, a second special symbol start storage area), and Based on the start memory stored in the start storage means, a special game state transition determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. By means (for example, main CPU 71), identification information display means (for example, special symbol display device 61) for variable display of identification information, start storage number stored in the start storage means, and special game state transition determination means. A variation pattern determining means (for example, a main variation time determination table) that determines a variation pattern of the identification information based on the determination result, and an effect executing means (for example, an effect executing means that performs an effect according to the determination result by the variation pattern determining means). For example, a privilege is given to the player from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display of the identification information according to the determination result by the liquid crystal display device 13) and the variation pattern determining means. A point granting determination means (for example, a point addition table) for determining whether or not to grant points related to the granting of points, and a point storage means (for example, work RAM 203) for storing the points determined by the point grant determination means. And a privilege giving means (for example, sub CPU201) that grants a privilege based on the number of the points stored by the point storage means becoming a specific number (for example, 100 or more), and the variation pattern. When the determination result by the special game state transition determination means does not shift to the special game state (for example, the lottery result is lost), the determination means stores a predetermined number of start memories stored in the start storage means. When it is less than, the first fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation A) associated with the first fluctuation time (for example, 10000 ms) can be determined, and the start storage stored in the start storage means can be determined. When is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, it is possible to determine a second fluctuation pattern (for example, shortened fluctuation A) associated with a second fluctuation time (for example, 2000 ms) shorter than the first fluctuation time. Yes, the determination result by the special game state transition determination means is the special In the case of shifting to another game state, a third variation pattern (for example, advance notice effect) can be determined, and the point granting determining means determines the first variation pattern by the variation pattern determining means. It is determined whether or not to give the points with the same expectation (for example, the point determination random value and the addition points shown in the point addition table) when the second fluctuation pattern is determined and when the second fluctuation pattern is determined. It is characterized in that it is possible to determine to give the points when the third variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern determining means.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, at least when the lottery result does not shift to the special gaming state, the expectation that points are given is the same regardless of the length of the fluctuation time based on the number of start memories (number of holdings). It is configured to be. Therefore, the player who wants to award points does not need to take a long interval for firing the game ball, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of the game machine from being reduced and the game field from suffering an unexpected loss. can.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured so that points can be given even when the lottery result shifts to the special gaming state. Therefore, for example, when the number of points is less than a predetermined number, even if an effect indicating that the lottery result shifts to the special gaming state is executed at the initial stage of the variable display of the identification information, the identification is performed. Since it is possible to give a feeling of expectation for point awarding by the end of the variable display of information, it is possible to further improve the interest in awarding points.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is provided in the gaming area and can be varied between a first state in which the game ball is easily accepted and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to be accepted, and a specific area through which the game ball can pass. A variable winning device (for example, the first winning device 54, the second winning device 53) having (for example, the V winning opening 57) inside, and a first state provided in the starting area and easily accepting a game ball. A movable member (for example, an ordinary electric accessory 46) that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to accept the game ball, and a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, a big hit game with a short time is executed). ), The specific game state control means (for example, a time-saving game state) that controls the movable member to a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) in which the movable member is likely to be changed to the first state for a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 times). , Main CPU71), and in the special gaming state, when the variable winning device is controlled to the first state (for example, when the small hit gaming state is controlled), the specific area is set. Based on the passage of the game ball, the variable winning device is further controlled to be in the first state (for example, 16R in V winning) and the variable winning device is in the first state. When controlled, the player is further controlled to set the variable winning device to the first state based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area, as compared with the first special gaming state. Including a disadvantageous second special gaming state (for example, 2R in V winning), the privilege granting means is specific based on the fact that the points stored by the point storage means become the specific number. When the privilege granting state (for example, the first high probability state) is controlled during the number of games (for example, the determined number of first high-probability medium games) and the predetermined start condition is satisfied in the privilege-giving state. In the specific gaming state, when the determination result by the special gaming state transition determination means shifts to the first special gaming state, the effect executing means performs the first effect (for example, launch navigation effect). When the privilege of executing the game is given and the determination result by the special game state transition determination means shifts to the second special game state, the second effect different from the first effect by the effect execution means. It is characterized by giving a privilege of executing the effect of (for example, launch suppression navigation effect).

The gaming machine of the present invention is configured to be provided with a privilege that an effect that allows the player to obtain more profits in a specific gaming state is executed according to the points granted. Therefore, since the actual profit can be changed according to the points given, it is possible to further improve the interest in giving points.

[Game machine of the present invention (No. 2)]
The game machine of the present invention has a game area in which the game ball can roll (for example, a game area 12a) and a start area provided in the game area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the first start port 44, the first start port 44, the first 2 Starting port 45) and, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the starting area, it is determined whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Based on the determination results of the special game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 71), the identification information display means (for example, the special symbol display device 61) for variablely displaying the identification information, and the special game state transition determination means. A variation pattern determining means (for example, a main variation time determination table) for determining a variation pattern of the identification information, and an effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) that performs an effect according to a determination result by the variation pattern determining means. Then, according to the determination result by the variation pattern determining means, the player is given points related to the granting of the privilege from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the start of the next variation display of the identification information. By a point granting determination means (for example, a point addition table) for determining whether or not to perform, a point storage means (for example, work RAM 203) for storing the points determined by the point grant determination means, and the point storage means. The points are given by the privilege giving means (for example, sub CPU201) for giving the privilege and the point granting determining means based on the stored number of the stored points (for example, 100 or more). The first point granting state (for example, the second high probability state) in which is more likely to be determined, and the second point granting state in which it is more difficult for the point granting determining means to determine that the points are granted than in the first point granting state. A point-giving state control means (for example, sub CPU201) that has a point-giving state (for example, a normal gaming state (sub)) and controls the point-giving state based on a predetermined transition condition, and a first Mode (for example, low mode) and a second mode (for example, high mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, and is set to either mode based on a specific transition condition. A mode control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) to be controlled is provided, and when the mode control means controls the second mode, the point grant state control means controls the first point grant state. If so, the mode When the control means controls the first mode, the number of times the first point-giving state continues as compared with the case where the point-giving state control means controls the first point-giving state. It is characterized by increasing.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, when controlled to the first point giving state (for example, the second high probability state) in the second mode (for example, high mode), in the first mode (for example, low mode). The number of times the first point-giving state continues (for example, the number of times the second high-probability state continues) is configured to be larger than when the first point-giving state is controlled. Here, the first point-giving state is a state in which it is easy to determine that points will be given. That is, if the first point granting state continues for a long time, the number of points tends to be a specific number (for example, 100 or more), and as a result, the privilege is likely to be granted. Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of expectation regarding the awarding of points without deteriorating the interest.

[Game machine of the present invention (No. 3)]
The game machine of the present invention has a game area in which the game ball can roll (for example, a game area 12a) and a start area provided in the game area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the first start port 44, the first start port 44, the first 2 Starting port 45) and, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the starting area, it is determined whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Based on the determination results of the special game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 71), the identification information display means (for example, the special symbol display device 61) for variablely displaying the identification information, and the special game state transition determination means. A variation pattern determining means (for example, a main variation time determination table) for determining a variation pattern of the identification information, and an effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) that performs an effect according to a determination result by the variation pattern determining means. Then, according to the determination result by the variation pattern determining means, the player is given points related to the granting of the privilege from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the start of the next variation display of the identification information. By a point granting determination means (for example, a point addition table) for determining whether or not to perform, a point storage means (for example, work RAM 203) for storing the points determined by the point grant determination means, and the point storage means. The points are given by the privilege giving means (for example, sub CPU201) for giving the privilege and the point granting determining means based on the stored number of the stored points (for example, 100 or more). The first point granting state (for example, the second high probability state) in which is more likely to be determined, and the second point granting state in which it is more difficult for the point granting determining means to determine that the points are granted than in the first point granting state. A point-giving state control means (for example, sub CPU201) that has a point-giving state (for example, a normal gaming state (sub)) and controls the point-giving state based on a predetermined transition condition, and a first Mode (eg, low mode) and a second mode (eg, initial mode) that is more favorable to the player than the first mode, and is controlled to either mode based on a specific transition condition. A game machine including a mode control means (for example, a sub CPU 201), and the mode control means is initialized when a predetermined initialization condition in the game machine is satisfied (for example, the sub control circuit 200 is initialized). When a command is received), the above-mentioned first When the mode is controlled to the second mode and the mode control means controls the second mode, and the point-giving state control means controls the first point-giving state, the mode control means When controlled to the first mode, the number of times the first point-giving state continues is larger than that when the point-giving state control means controls the first point-giving state. It is characterized by.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, when controlled to the first point giving state (for example, the second high probability state) in the second mode (for example, the initial mode), in the first mode (for example, the low mode). The number of times the first point-giving state continues (for example, the number of times the second high-probability state continues) is configured to be larger than when the first point-giving state is controlled.
Here, the first point-giving state is a state in which it is easy to determine that points will be given. That is, if the first point granting state continues for a long time, the number of points tends to be a specific number (for example, 100 or more), and as a result, the privilege is likely to be granted. Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of expectation regarding the awarding of points without deteriorating the interest.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, under the predetermined initialization condition, the time from when the power of the gaming machine is turned off to when it is turned on is the maintenance work (for example, clearing of ball clogging, etc.) in the gaming machine. ) Is more than the first time required (for example, 30 minutes) and less than the second time (for example, 11 hours) indicating that the game hall where the gaming machine is installed is closed. It is characterized in that it is established when the initialization time (for example, 2 hours) has elapsed.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, when the time from when the power is turned off to when it is turned on again has passed a predetermined initialization time (for example, 2 hours), a second advantage is given to the player. The mode (for example, the initial mode) is configured to be set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play when the game is not continuously performed for a predetermined time in the game machine, and it is possible to prevent the second mode from being frequently set.

[Game machine of the present invention (No. 4)]
The game machine of the present invention has a game area in which the game ball can roll (for example, a game area 12a) and a start area provided in the game area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the first start port 44, the first start port 44, the first 2 Starting port 45) and, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the starting area, it is determined whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Based on the determination results of the special game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 71), the identification information display means (for example, the special symbol display device 61) for variablely displaying the identification information, and the special game state transition determination means. A variation pattern determining means (for example, a main variation time determination table) for determining a variation pattern of the identification information, and an effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) that performs an effect according to a determination result by the variation pattern determining means. Then, according to the determination result by the variation pattern determining means, the player is given points related to the granting of the privilege from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the start of the next variation display of the identification information. By a point granting determination means (for example, a point addition table) for determining whether or not to perform, a point storage means (for example, work RAM 203) for storing the points determined by the point grant determination means, and the point storage means. The points are given by the privilege giving means (for example, sub CPU201) for giving the privilege and the point granting determining means based on the stored number of the stored points (for example, 100 or more). The first point granting state (for example, the second high probability state) in which is more likely to be determined, and the second point granting state in which it is more difficult for the point granting determining means to determine that the points are granted than in the first point granting state. A point-giving state control means (for example, sub CPU201) that has a point-giving state (for example, a normal gaming state (sub)) and controls the point-giving state based on a predetermined transition condition, and a first Mode (eg, low mode) and a second mode (eg, initial mode) that is more favorable to the player than the first mode, and is controlled to either mode based on a specific transition condition. It has a mode control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) and a special gaming state (for example, a fourth high probability state) that is advantageous to the player, which is different from the special gaming state and the first point granting state. When the special transition condition is satisfied (for example) For example, when the RAM clear flag is on, the special game state control means (for example, the sub CPU201) that controls the special game state in the case of the "big hit" in the special figure (1) -12, The mode control means is a gaming machine provided with the above-mentioned second mode control means when a predetermined initialization condition in the gaming machine is satisfied (for example, when the sub-control circuit 200 receives an initialization command). The special game state control means controls the mode, and when the predetermined initialization condition in the game machine is satisfied, the special game state control means terminates the special game state and is controlled by the mode control means to the second mode. When the point-giving state control means controls the first point-giving state, the point-giving state control means controls the mode to the first mode. It is characterized in that the number of times the first point awarding state continues is larger than that in the case where the first point awarding state is controlled.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, when controlled to the first point giving state (for example, the second high probability state) in the second mode (for example, the initial mode), in the first mode (for example, the low mode). The number of times the first point-giving state continues (for example, the number of times the second high-probability state continues) is configured to be larger than when the first point-giving state is controlled.
Here, the first point-giving state is a state in which it is easy to determine that points will be given. That is, if the first point granting state continues for a long time, the number of points tends to be a specific number (for example, 100 or more), and as a result, the privilege is likely to be granted.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the special gaming state (for example, the fourth high probability state) which is advantageous to the player is terminated when the initialization condition of the gaming machine is satisfied (for example, the RAM is cleared). However, instead, a second mode (for example, an initial mode) is configured to be set. Therefore, for example, even when the special game state ends, it is possible to have a sense of expectation regarding the awarding of points without deteriorating the interest.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied in the special gaming state, the privilege granting means further determines the determination result by the special gaming state transition determining means in the specific gaming state. In the case of shifting to the first special gaming state, the privilege of causing the first effect to be executed by the effect executing means is given, and the determination result by the special game state transition determining means is the second special game. In the case of shifting to the state, it is characterized in that the privilege of executing the second effect by the effect executing means is given.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured to be provided with a privilege that, in the special gaming state, an effect that allows the player to obtain more profits in the specific gaming state is executed. Therefore, the actual profit can be changed not only according to the points to be given but also in the special game state, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Game machine of the present invention (No. 5)]
The game machine of the present invention has a game area in which the game ball can roll (for example, a game area 12a) and a start area provided in the game area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the first start port 44, the first start port 44, the first 2 start port 45), a start storage means capable of storing a plurality of start memories indicating that the game ball has passed through the start area (for example, a first special symbol start storage area, a second special symbol start storage area), and Based on the start memory stored in the start storage means, a special game state transition determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. The variation pattern of the identification information is based on the determination result of the means (for example, the main CPU 71), the identification information display means (for example, the special symbol display device 61) for variablely displaying the identification information, and the special game state transition determination means. A variation pattern determining means (for example, a main variation time determination table) for determining the above, an effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) that performs an effect according to a determination result by the variation pattern determining means, and the variation pattern determination. Depending on the determination result by the means, it is determined whether or not to give the player points related to the granting of the privilege from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display of the identification information. A point granting determination means (for example, a point addition table), a point storage means for storing the points determined by the point grant determination means (for example, work RAM 203), and the points stored by the point storage means are A privilege granting means (for example, sub CPU201) for granting a privilege based on a specific number (for example, 100 or more) is provided, and the fluctuation pattern determining means is determined by the special gaming state transition determining means. When the result does not shift to the special gaming state (for example, the lottery result is lost), the first fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation B) associated with the first fluctuation time (for example, 5000 ms) is used. And any of the second fluctuation patterns (for example, special normal fluctuations) different from the first fluctuation pattern can be determined in association with the first fluctuation time, and the transition to the special gaming state can be determined. When the determination result by the determination means shifts to the special gaming state, a third fluctuation pattern (for example, advance notice effect) can be determined, and the point granting determination means is said by the variation pattern determination means. The first fluctuation pattern is Whether or not to give the points with a higher expectation (for example, the point determination random value and the addition point shown in the point addition table) when the second fluctuation pattern is determined than when the determination is made. The effect executing means determines the start storage number display means for displaying information (for example, a holding ball) indicating the start storage number stored in the start storage means, and the start storage number display means displayed on the start storage number display means. The pre-reading effect executing means that executes the pre-reading effect by changing the display mode of the information indicating the start memory number (for example, the display mode of the holding ball) is included, and the pre-reading effect executing means is at least the said. When the second variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern determining means, and when the third variation pattern is determined, a specific look-ahead effect (for example, a hit look-ahead effect pattern and a special loss look-ahead) It is characterized by executing a look-ahead effect based on an effect pattern.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, not only when the lottery result shifts to the special gaming state, but also when the lottery result does not shift to the special gaming state, the identification with high expectation of awarding points In the case of the fluctuation pattern of (for example, the second fluctuation pattern), the look-ahead effect with a high degree of expectation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the look-ahead effect, and even if the look-ahead effect is executed when the actual lottery result does not shift to the special gaming state, points are given. Since it is possible to give a sense of expectation, it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the awarding of points without deteriorating the interest.

[Game machine of the present invention (No. 6)]
The game machine of the present invention has a game area in which the game ball can roll (for example, a game area 12a) and a start area provided in the game area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the first start port 44, the first start port 44, the first 2 Starting port 45) and, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the starting area, it is determined whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Based on the determination results of the special game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 71), the identification information display means (for example, the special symbol display device 61) for variablely displaying the identification information, and the special game state transition determination means. A variation pattern determining means (for example, a main variation time determination table) for determining a variation pattern of the identification information, and an effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) that performs an effect according to a determination result by the variation pattern determining means. Then, according to the determination result by the variation pattern determining means, the player is given points related to the granting of the privilege from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the start of the next variation display of the identification information. By a point granting determination means (for example, a point addition table) for determining whether or not to perform, a point storage means (for example, work RAM 203) for storing the points determined by the point grant determination means, and the point storage means. A privilege granting state control means (for example, sub CPU201) that controls the privilege granting state (for example, the first high probability state) based on the stored points becoming a specific number (for example, 100 or more). When the privilege granting state is controlled by the privilege granting state control means, a specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state based on the special figures (1) -1 to 7) is performed by the special gaming state transition determining means. When it is determined that the information is to be transferred to, a privilege granting means (for example, sub CPU201) for granting a predetermined privilege (for example, all navigation) is provided, and the point granting determining means is stored by the point storage means. When the number of points is less than the specific number, it is determined by the special gaming state transition determining means to shift to the specific special gaming state, and the variation pattern determining means determines a specific variation pattern (for example, advance notice). Even when the effect) is determined, it is determined whether or not to give the points, and the privilege giving means is said to be special when the points stored by the point storage means are less than the specific number. By game state transition determination means In the case where it is determined to shift to the specific special gaming state, the point granting determination means determines to grant the points, and the point storage means stores the specific number of the points. In this case as well, it is characterized in that the predetermined privilege is given.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, when the accumulated points are less than a specific number (for example, 100 points), the lottery result shifts to a specific special gaming state, and a specific variation pattern. When (for example, advance notice production) is decided, it is decided whether or not to give more points in the game, and it is judged whether or not the number of points including the given points is more than a specific number, and the points are given. When the number of players exceeds a specific number, a predetermined privilege (for example, all navigation) is given to the player. Therefore, even when the lottery result shifts to the special gaming state when the number of points is less than a specific number, it is possible to have a sense of expectation regarding the awarding of points without deteriorating the interest.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when the number of points stored by the point storage means is less than the specific number, the effect execution means determines the specific variation pattern by the variation pattern determining means. In this case, at the initial stage of the variable display of the identification information by the identification information display means, an effect indicating that the special gaming state transition determination means has determined to shift to the special gaming state is executed, and the identification information display. During the variable display of the identification information by the means, an effect suggesting the points determined to be given by the point granting determination means is executed, and by the time the variable display of the identification information by the identification information display means is completed. It is characterized in that an effect indicating whether or not the specific number of the points are stored in the point storage means is executed (for example, a premier advance notice effect or a normal advance notice effect is executed).

In the gaming machine of the present invention, when a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, advance notice effect) is determined, a series of effects as described above are performed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in giving points depending on the content of the effect when the lottery result shifts to a specific special gaming state.

[Game machine of the present invention (No. 7)]
The game machine of the present invention has a game area in which the game ball can roll (for example, a game area 12a) and a start area provided in the game area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the first start port 44, the first start port 44, the first 2 start port 45), identification information display means (for example, special symbol display device 61) that variablely displays identification information based on the passage of the game ball through the start area, and a main control that controls game operation. A means (for example, a main control circuit 70) and a sub control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) for controlling an effect operation according to the progress of a game are provided, and the main control means to the sub control means. The main control means is a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of commands are transmitted, and the main control means is in a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the starting area. , The change pattern of the identification information is determined based on the determination result of the special game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 71) for determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state) and the special game state transition determination means. The variation pattern determining means (for example, the main variation time determination table) to be determined, and the variation display control means (for example, the variation display control means) that controls the variation display of the identification information by the identification information display means according to the determination result by the variation pattern determining means. The sub-control means includes the main CPU 71) and the sub-control means from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the start of the next variation display of the identification information according to the determination result by the variation pattern determination means. , A point granting determination means (for example, a point addition table) for determining whether or not to grant points related to the granting of benefits to a player, and a point storage means for storing the points determined by the point grant determination means (for example, a point addition determination means). For example, the work RAM 203) and the privilege granting means (for example, the sub CPU 201) that grants the privilege based on the number of the points stored by the point storage means becoming a specific number (for example, 100 or more). Including, the variation pattern determining means can determine a variation pattern from a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation time of the identification information by the identification information display means is different, and the sub control means is transmitted from the main control means. A fluctuation time monitoring means (for example, a fluctuation time monitoring process by the sub CPU 201) for monitoring whether or not the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means is consistent is provided based on the command. , The point granting determination means When the monitoring result by the fluctuation time monitoring means does not match the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means, it is not determined to give the points. And.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when the main control means starts the variable display of the identification information by the identification information display means, the first command (for example, the start of special symbol production) is given to the sub control means. A command) is transmitted, and when the variation display of the identification information by the identification information display means is completed, a second command (for example, a symbol stop command) is transmitted to the sub-control means, and the variation time monitoring means. Is a variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means based on the time from the transmission of the first command by the main control means to the transmission of the second command by the main control means. It is characterized in that it monitors whether or not the fluctuation time associated with is consistent.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, the sub-control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 200) that controls the awarding of points is configured to monitor the consistency between the fluctuation time of the symbol and the supplied command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended lottery (for example, a lottery relating to the awarding of points) from being executed due to the intervention of fraudulent activity or the occurrence of a defect.

[Game machine of the present invention (No. 8)]
The game machine of the present invention has a game area in which the game ball can roll (for example, a game area 12a) and a start area provided in the game area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the first start port 44, the first start port 44, the first 2 start port 45), identification information display means (for example, special symbol display device 61) that variablely displays identification information based on the passage of the game ball through the start area, and a main control that controls game operation. The main control means (for example, the main control circuit 70) and the sub control means (for example, the sub control circuit 200) for controlling the effect operation according to the progress of the game are provided, and the main control means to the sub control means. The main control means is a game machine to which a plurality of types of commands are transmitted, and the main control means can store a plurality of start memories indicating that the game ball has passed through the start area (for example, a first special symbol start). Based on the storage area (second special symbol start storage area) and the start memory stored in the start storage means, a special game state (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player is set. A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 71) for determining whether or not to shift, and a variation pattern determining means for determining the variation pattern of the identification information based on the determination result by the special gaming state transition determining means (for example, the main CPU 71). For example, the main fluctuation time determination table) and the variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 71) that controls the variation display of the identification information by the identification information display means according to the determination result by the variation pattern determination means. , The sub-control means grants a privilege to the player from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the start of the next variation display of the identification information according to the determination result by the variation pattern determining means. A point granting determination means (for example, a point addition table) for determining whether or not to grant points according to the above, a point storage means for storing the points determined by the point grant determination means (for example, work RAM 203), and Based on the fact that the number of points stored by the point storage means is a specific number (for example, 100 or more), the privilege giving means (for example, sub CPU201) for giving a privilege and the main control means transmit the points. The point-giving determination means includes a sequence monitoring means for monitoring the order of commands (for example, a sequence monitoring process by the sub CPU 201), and the monitoring result by the sequence monitoring means does not match a predetermined order. When there is, the above points are given It is characterized by not deciding to do.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, when the main control means subtracts the start memory stored in the start storage means with the start of the variable display of the identification information by the identification information display means, the command is described. When a first command (for example, a hold subtraction command) is transmitted to the sub-control means and the variable display of the identification information by the identification information display means starts, a second command (for example, a hold subtraction command) is sent to the sub-control means. For example, a special symbol effect start command) is transmitted, and when the variable display of the identification information by the identification information display means ends, a third command (for example, a symbol stop command) is transmitted to the sub-control means. The sequence monitoring means is characterized in that it monitors whether or not the command transmitted by the main control means is in the order of the first command, the second command, and the third command. ..

In the gaming machine of the present invention, a sub-control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) for controlling the awarding of points is configured to monitor the order of supplied commands. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended lottery (for example, a lottery relating to the awarding of points) from being executed due to the intervention of fraudulent activity or the occurrence of a defect.

[Game machine of the present invention (No. 9)]
The game machine of the present invention has a game area in which the game ball can roll (for example, a game area 12a) and a start area provided in the game area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the first start port 44, the first start port 44, the first 2 start port 45), identification information display means (for example, special symbol display device 61) that variablely displays identification information based on the passage of the game ball through the start area, and a main control that controls game operation. The main control means (for example, the main control circuit 70) and the sub control means (for example, the sub control circuit 200) for controlling the effect operation according to the progress of the game are provided, and the main control means to the sub control means. The main control means is a game machine to which a plurality of types of commands are transmitted, and the main control means can store a plurality of start memories indicating that the game ball has passed through the start area (for example, a first special symbol start). Based on the storage area (second special symbol start storage area) and the start memory stored in the start storage means, a special game state (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player is set. A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 71) for determining whether or not to shift, and a variation pattern determining means for determining the variation pattern of the identification information based on the determination result by the special gaming state transition determining means (for example, the main CPU 71). For example, the main fluctuation time determination table) and the variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 71) that controls the variation display of the identification information by the identification information display means according to the determination result by the variation pattern determination means. , The sub-control means grants a privilege to the player from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the start of the next variation display of the identification information according to the determination result by the variation pattern determining means. A point granting determination means (for example, a point addition table) for determining whether or not to grant points according to the above, a point storage means for storing the points determined by the point grant determination means (for example, work RAM 203), and Based on the fact that the number of points stored by the point storage means is a specific number (for example, 100 or more), the privilege giving means (for example, sub CPU201) for giving a privilege and the main control means transmit the points. Based on the command, the reserved number monitoring means (for example, the sub CPU 201) that monitors whether or not the number of start storages stored in the start storage means and the number of fluctuations of the identification information displayed by the identification information display means match. (Holding quantity monitoring process by), including, and the point award decision When the monitoring result by the reserved number monitoring means does not match the number of start storages stored in the start storage means and the number of variable display of the identification information by the identification information display means, the means said. It is characterized in that it does not decide to award points.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the main control means transmits a first command (for example, a hold addition command) to the sub control means when the start memory is stored in the start storage means. Then, when the variable display of the identification information by the identification information display means is started, a second command (for example, a special symbol effect start command) is transmitted to the sub-control means, and the reserved number monitoring means is used. It is characterized in that it monitors whether or not the number of times the first command is transmitted by the main control means and the number of times the second command is transmitted by the main control means match.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, the number of times the game ball has passed through the starting region and the number of fluctuations of the identification information are determined by the sub-control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 200) that controls the awarding of points, based on the supplied command. It is configured to monitor the integrity of. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended lottery (for example, a lottery relating to the awarding of points) from being executed due to the intervention of fraudulent activity or the occurrence of a defect.

[Game machine of the present invention (No. 10)]
The game machine of the present invention has a game area in which the game ball can roll (for example, a game area 12a) and a start area provided in the game area through which the game ball can pass (for example, the first start port 44, the first start port 44, the first 2 start port 45), identification information display means (for example, special symbol display device 61) that variablely displays identification information based on the passage of the game ball through the start area, and a main control that controls game operation. A means (for example, a main control circuit 70) and a sub control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) for controlling an effect operation according to the progress of a game are provided, and the main control means to the sub control means. The main control means is a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of commands are transmitted, and the main control means is in a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the starting area. , The change pattern of the identification information is determined based on the determination result of the special game state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 71) for determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state) and the special game state transition determination means. The variation pattern determining means (for example, the main variation time determination table) to be determined, and the variation display control means (for example, the variation display control means) that controls the variation display of the identification information by the identification information display means according to the determination result by the variation pattern determining means. The main CPU 71) and a main control side rotation number counting means (for example, a rotation number counter) for counting the number of times of variation display of the identification information by the identification information display means are included, and the sub control means determines the variation pattern. Depending on the determination result by the means, it is determined whether or not to give the player points related to the granting of the privilege from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display of the identification information. A point granting determination means (for example, a point addition table), a point storage means for storing the points determined by the point grant determination means (for example, work RAM 203), and the points stored by the point storage means are The identification information display means is used based on a privilege granting means (for example, sub CPU201) that grants a privilege based on a specific number (for example, 100 or more) and a command transmitted from the main control means. A sub-control side rotation number counting means (for example, a rotation number monitoring counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the identification information, a counting result by the main control side rotation number counting means, and a counting result by the sub-control side rotation number counting means. Monitor if they are consistent with The rotation speed monitoring means (for example, the rotation speed monitoring process by the sub CPU 201) is included, and in the point granting determination means, the monitoring result by the rotation speed monitoring means is the count result by the main control side rotation speed counting means. When the count result by the sub-control side rotation speed counting means does not match, it is characterized in that it does not decide to give the point.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when the main control means starts the variable display of the identification information by the identification information display means, a predetermined command (for example, a special symbol effect start command) is given to the sub control means. ) Is transmitted, and the predetermined command includes information indicating the counting result by the main control side rotation speed counting means, and the sub control side rotation speed counting means receives the predetermined command by the main control means. Based on the transmission, the number of times of variation display of the identification information by the identification information display means is counted, and the rotation speed monitoring means counts the count result by the main control side rotation speed counting means included in the predetermined command. It is characterized in that it monitors whether or not the information indicating the above and the counting result by the sub-control side rotation speed counting means match.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, the sub-control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 200) for controlling the awarding of points is monitored by the main control means (for example, the main control circuit 70) based on the supplied command. It is configured to monitor the consistency between the number of fluctuations (rotational speed) of the symbol and the number of fluctuations (rotational speed) of the symbol monitored by the sub-control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 200). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended lottery (for example, a lottery relating to the awarding of points) from being executed due to the intervention of fraudulent activity or the occurrence of a defect.

Further, in the game machine of the present invention, the main control side rotation speed counting means initializes the counting result when the initialization condition in the main control means is satisfied (for example, when the work RAM 203 is cleared). The sub-control side rotation speed counting means initializes the counting result when the initialization condition in the sub-control means is satisfied (for example, when a command at the time of power recovery is received), and the rotation speed monitoring means When the count result by the main control side rotation speed counting means and the count result by the sub control side rotation speed counting means do not match, the initialization condition in the sub control means is set by the sub control side rotation speed counting means. When the number of times of variation display of the identification information by the identification information display means is counted for the first time after the establishment, the count result by the sub-control side rotation speed counting means is counted by the main control side rotation speed counting means. It is characterized in that the monitoring result is not inconsistent with the count result by the main control side rotation speed counting means and the count result by the sub control side rotation speed counting means.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, for example, the condition for initializing the rotation speed (for example, the rotation speed counter) monitored by the main control means (for example, the main control circuit 70) and the sub control means (for example, the sub control circuit 200). ), Even if the conditions for initializing the rotation speed (for example, rotation speed monitoring counter) are different, it is possible to prevent it from being determined that fraudulent activity has frequently intervened or a problem has occurred. can do.

[Game machine of the present invention (No. 11)]
The game machine of the present invention has a ball supply passage (first and second ball supply passages 171A, 171B) capable of accumulating game balls, and a supply detection means (first) for detecting a game ball passing through the ball supply passage. The first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A, 172B) and the game ball control means (first and second sprocket 173A, 173B and payout motor 174) capable of moving the game ball passing through the ball supply passage. A first value (for example, 2000 ms or less) corresponding to a sufficient time (for example, 2000 ms or less) for moving a predetermined number (for example, 15 or less) of game balls is set by a predetermined time (for example, 1 ms). The first updating means (first and second secured ball timers 306A, 306B) to be updated each time the lapse of time, and the first value corresponding to the time during which the supply detecting means is detecting the game ball. A second updating means (first and second collateral ball counters 305A,) that updates a second value (for example, 1950 times or less) in which a value in a narrower range can be set every time the predetermined time elapses. Based on the result of comparison between 305B) and the first value updated by the first updating means and the second value updated by the second updating means, the game by the game ball control means. It has a configuration including a determination means (payout CPU 301) for determining control of a sphere.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, both the first updating means and the second updating means update the first value and the second value, respectively, every time a predetermined time elapses. Therefore, if the replenishment detecting means continuously detects the game ball after the movement of the game ball is started, when the first value reaches a predetermined value, the second value is already a predetermined value. It means that. In this case, it is guaranteed that the game ball is replenished according to the movement of the game ball.

On the other hand, if the second value is not the predetermined value when the first value becomes the predetermined value, it means that the game ball is not replenished according to the movement of the game ball for some reason. .. That is, by comparing the updated first value and the second value, it is possible to determine whether or not the replenishment of the game ball is correctly performed according to the movement of the game ball.

According to the present invention, as compared with the case where it is determined whether or not the game ball is replenished simply by the presence or absence of detection of the game ball by the replenishment detecting means, the management of the game ball accumulated in the ball supply passage and the management of the game ball Since the guarantee can be accurately performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a highly useful payout device.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when the first value is a predetermined value and the second value is not the predetermined value, the determining means moves the gaming ball by the gaming ball controlling means. It may be prohibited.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when the first value is a predetermined value and the second value is not a predetermined value, the movement of the gaming ball is prohibited. It is possible to confirm the presence or absence. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the security regarding the supply and withdrawal of the game ball.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the determination means is the gaming ball by the gaming ball control means even if the second value is the predetermined value when the first value is the predetermined value. If the game ball is not detected by the replenishment detecting means before the movement of the game ball is performed, the movement of the game ball by the game ball control means may be prohibited.

With this configuration, even when the gaming machine according to the present invention is once guaranteed that when the first value is a predetermined value, the second value becomes a predetermined value and the gaming ball is replenished. After that, if the game balls are excessively paid out and the number of game balls in the ball supply passage is reduced due to, for example, a malfunction of the game ball control means, before the game balls are moved, the game balls Movement can be prohibited. Therefore, the game balls in the ball supply passage can be managed more accurately, and the security regarding the supply and withdrawal of the game balls can be further improved.

1 Pachinko game machine 710 Second movable accessory 711 Base member 711a Base body 711d Base tooth part 712 Motor 713 First movable member 713a First movable member body 713b First transmission member 714 Second movable member 714c Second movable member tooth part

Claims (1)

A lottery means to draw a lottery to see if the result is advantageous to the player when the lottery conditions are met,
A game state control means that controls whether or not to shift to a special game state that is advantageous to the player,
A point granting determination means for determining whether or not to grant points related to the granting of benefits to the player according to the lottery by the lottery means, and
A point storage means for storing the points determined by the point granting determination means, and a point storage means for storing the points.
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on a specific number of points stored by the point storage means, and a privilege granting means.
It is determined that the first point awarding state in which the point awarding determination means is likely to determine the point awarding and the point awarding determination means are performed by the point awarding determination means rather than the first point awarding state. A point-giving state control means that has a difficult second point-giving state and controls the point-giving state,
A mode control means having at least a first mode and a second mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode, and the mode can be changed triggered by the change of the game state by the game state control means. And with
The mode control means is a mode more advantageous than the mode staying before the predetermined initialization process, triggered by the execution of the predetermined initialization process including the initialization of the point stored in the point storage means. May be migrated to
A gaming machine characterized in that the transition of the point granting state by the point granting state control means can be performed at a different opportunity from the mode transition by the mode control means.

Images